Home

ZyXEL XGS-4728F User's Manual

1. mcm E o m consou i X TER off EERE o Jo gt 1 eyo ozona T D Figure 14 Rear Panel DC Model E a SOOO O of Jo l o ag Jo em Dn zc Ree XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 3 Hardware Overview The following figure shows the front panel of the EM 422 and EM 412 modules Figure 15 The Front Panel of the EM 422 and EM 412 Modules LNK ACT EM 422 EM 412 The following table describes the ports on the rear panel Table 2 Panel Connections CONNECTO DESCRIPTION Optional two These ports are available when you install an EM 422 or ES 412 in the XFP or CX4 optional uplink module B in the figure above Both the EM 422 and ES Ports 412 are used to connect your switch to other high speed Ethernet switches for stacking in you network For EM 422 connection Use 10 Gigabit Small Form Factor Pluggable XFP transceivers to connect 1000Base X fiber optic cables to these ports See Section 3 1 3 1 on page 37 and Section 3 1 3 2 on page 37 for information on installing and removing transceivers e For EM 412 connection Use 10GBase CX4 cables to connect to these ports See the EM 422 and EM 412 User s Guides for more information Two stacking Connect these ports to other XGS 4728F switches for stacking using ports stacking cable
2. 123 12 1 Comore a PROB PAS auis cuuscquiepdti epDlam pureckatrf rid Kec iE Coat sth Fa ED RUE ax CR Ra 123 Chapter 13 Spanning mee ProlOCO O Oe 125 TS STRSTR OVENI argia esce A E 125 1951 3 STP TENDOI aue a ha AKAR 125 1S LS PON SIF NOE aana a a bu PORE Ce TERES Pd 126 TO oP PRG abossaiexpndatitapbt agar eodd pode dn a aen tcs a db bo Ga a 127 Tet TINS REIS cies cuss tdasdrgn dannii eels is sun oadcrade Dn ER bdo aD Fit Lud 127 TTS TAUB So TU mcm 128 15 2 Spanning Tree Protocol Status SOIBEE 2c steers pen a XR Re eu RE DERR OA TREE aba 131 19 3 Spanning Mee COBMIOUISESIT ausseoptuis otiosa Gat ope caeso hne tana a E 131 1944 Configure Rapid Spanning Tree Protogol ciccsececsccnncetocscastraeincentrceciarnniedeascenteatanntannenscce 132 13 5 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol SUB aussssinseciisniacsentiiat raaelreuh duse ai seats dus 134 13 6 Configure Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol sssssseseeeees 136 13 7 Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status sessssseeeee 138 13 8 Configure Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol sssssseseeeeeenenen nnne 140 13 9 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Statis uses tree ecce scere ebat cesse peius 143 Chapter 14 Bandwidth pep 145 14 1 Bandwidth Control NeW TT 145
3. ee NER VLAN 1 Click Advanced Applications OX Port Setting aD Subnet Based Vian Protocol Based Vian VLAN Status and VLAN in the navigation ee E panel Then click the VLAN Port Setting link NEMORE Pu GVRP Acceptable Frame Type VLAN Trunking r n All r Enter 2 in the PVID field for port H 1 and click Apply to save your 3 r r Al c r changes back to the run time oS FES z memory Settings in the run time i Ds la eaea a EXAMP LE r 1 I an memory are lost when the Switch s power is turned off XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 5 Initial Setup Example 5 1 5 Enabling RIP To exchange routing information with other routing devices across different routing domains enable RIP Routing Information Protocol in the RIP screen Click IP Application and RIP in the navigation panel Select Both in the Direction field to set the Switch to broadcast and receive routing information In the Version field select RI P 1 for the RIP packet format that is universally supported xum Active v Index Network Direction 1 172 23 19 95 24 Both gt 2 192 168 1 1 24 Both z Apply Cancel Version RIPH RIP Click Apply to save your changes back to the run time memory Settings in the run time memory are lost when the Switch s power is turned off XGS 4728F User s Guide Tutorials This chapter provides some examples of using the web config
4. LINK DESCRIPTION VLAN Mapping This link takes you to screens where you can configure VLAN mapping settings on the Switch Layer 2 This link takes you to a screen where you can configure L2PT Layer 2 Protocol Protocol Tunneling settings on the Switch Tunneling Private VLAN This link takes you to a screen where you can block traffic between ports in a VLAN on the Switch IP Application Static Route This link takes you to a screen where you can configure static routes A static route defines how the Switch should forward traffic by configuring the TCP IP parameters manually RIP This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the RIP Routing Information Protocol direction and versions OSPF This link takes you to screens where you can view the OSPF status and configure OSPF settings IGMP This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the GMP settings DVMRP This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the DVMRP Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol settings DiffServ This link takes you to screens where you can enable DiffServ configure marking rules and set DSCP to I EEE802 1p mappings DHCP This link takes you to screens where you can configure the DHCP settings VRRP This link takes you to screens where you can configure redundant virtual router for your network Management Maintenance This link takes you to screens where you can perform
5. 1 Inthe web configurator click IP eomme Status Application and DHCP in the VID 2 navigation panel and click the DHCP Status ed Relay VLAN link Server Client IP Pool Starting Address 192 168 2 100 Size of Client IP Pool 66 2 Inthe VLAN Setting screen IP Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 specify the ID of the VLAN to Detaull Gateway EE i Primary DNS Server 172 23 5 1 which the DHCP clients belong A E nde a the starting IP r l Relay 3ta g address poo Remote DHCP Server 1 subnet mask default gateway SAARA AENOR A address and the DNS server Remote DHCP Server 3 Relay Agent Information Option 82 address es etait 3 Click Add to save the settings to Add Cancel Cleer EXAMPLE the run time memory Settings in the run time memory are lost when the Switch s power is turned off 5 1 3 Creating a VLAN VLANs confine broadcast frames to the VLAN group in which the port s belongs You can do this with port based VLAN or tagged static VLAN with fixed port members XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 5 Initial Setup Example In this example you want to configure port 1 as a member of VLAN 2 Figure 22 Initial Setup Network Example VLAN BQ VLAN2 1 Click Advanced Application gt VLAN in the navigation panel and click the Static VLAN link COLTE VLAN Port Setting Eie The Number of VLAN 1 Index VID Elapsed Time Status 1 1 1 00 31 Static Change Pages Previous Next 2 Inthe Static V
6. Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XGS 4728F User s Guide VLAN Stacking This chapter shows you how to configure VLAN stacking on your Switch See the chapter on VLANs for more background information on Virtual LAN 23 1 VLAN Stacking Overview A service provider can use VLAN stacking to allow it to distinguish multiple customers VLANs even those with the same customer assigned VLAN ID within its network Use VLAN stacking to add an outer VLAN tag to the inner IEEE 802 1Q tagged frames that enter the network By tagging the tagged frames double tagged frames the service provider can manage up to 4 094 VLAN groups with each group containing up to 4 094 customer VLANSs This allows a service provider to provide different service based on specific VLANs for many different customers A service provider s customers may require a range of VLANs to handle multiple applications A service provider s customers can assign their own inner VLAN tags on ports for these applications The service provider can assign an outer VLAN tag for each customer Therefore there is no VLAN tag overlap among customers so traffic from different customers is kept separate 23 1 1 VLAN Stacking Example In the following example figure both A and B are Service Provider s Network SPN customers with VPN tunnels between their head offices and branch offices respectively Both have an identical VLAN tag fo
7. Link Aggregator ID consists of the following system priority MAC address key port priority and port number Refer to Section 17 2 1 on page 154 for more information on this field The ID displays only when there is a port belonging to this trunk group and LACP is also enabled for this group XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 17 Link Aggregation Table 39 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation Status continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Criteria This shows the outgoing traffic distribution algorithm used in this trunk group Packets from the same source and or to the same destination are sent over the same link within the trunk src mac means the Switch distributes traffic based on the packet s source MAC address dst mac means the Switch distributes traffic based on the packet s destination MAC address src dst mac means the Switch distributes traffic based on a combination of the packet s source and destination MAC addresses src ip means the Switch distributes traffic based on the packet s source IP address dst ip means the Switch distributes traffic based on the packet s destination IP address src dst ip means the Switch distributes traffic based on a combination of the packet s source and destination IP addresses Status This field displays how these ports were added to the trunk group It displays Static if the ports are configured as static members of a trunk group
8. XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 40 Access Control Table 127 SNMP IP Traps OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION ping pingProbeFailed 1 3 6 1 2 1 80 0 1 This trap is sent when a single ping probe fails pingTestFailed 1 3 6 1 2 1 80 0 2 This trap is sent when a ping test consisting of a series of ping probes fails pingTestCompleted 1 3 6 1 2 1 80 0 3 This trap is sent when a ping test is completed traceroute traceRouteTestFailed 1 3 6 1 2 1 81 0 2 This trap is sent when a traceroute test fails traceRouteTestCompleted 1 3 6 1 2 1 81 0 3 This trap is sent when a traceroute test is completed Table 128 SNMP Switch Traps OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION stp STPNewRoot 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 0 1 This trap is sent when the STP root switch changes MRSTPNewRoot 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 46 4 This trap is sent when the 3 2 1 MRSTP root switch changes MSTPNewRoot 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 46 1 This trap is sent when the MSTP 07 70 1 root switch changes STPTopologyChange 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 0 2 This trap is sent when the STP topology changes MRSTPTopologyChange 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 46 4 This trap is sent when the 3 2 2 MRSTP topology changes MSTPTopologyChange 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 46 1 This trap is sent when the MSTP 07 70 2 root switch changes mactable MacTableFullEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 46 3 This trap is sent when more 1 2 1 than 9996 of
9. Dimensions Standard 19 rack mountable 438 mm W x 310 mm D x 44 45 mm H Weight 4 9 Kg Power Specification AC 100 240 VAC 50 60 Hz 0 8 A max 85 W internal universal power supply DC 36 VDC 72 VDC 2 3 A max 80 W consumption There is no tolerance for the DC input voltage One Backup Power Supply BPS connector Interfaces 24 Gigabit Ethernet GbE Dual Personality interfaces Each interface has a 1000Base T port compatible with Cat5 5e 6 copper cable amini GBIC slot compatible with Small Form Factor Pluggable SFP Multi Source Agreement MSA transceivers to be used with 1000Base X fiber cables For each Dual Personality interface one port or slot is active at a time Two stacking ports One optional uplink module set One local management Ethernet 10 100Base T port One RS 232 console port Ethernet Ports Auto negotiating 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps in either half duplex or full duplex mode 1000 Mbps and 10 Gbps in full duplex Auto crossover Use either crossover or straight through Ethernet cables Auto MDIX Compliant with IEEE 802 3ad u x Back pressure flow control for half duplex Flow control for full duplex IEEE 802 3x XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 50 Product Specifications Table 147 Hardware Specifications Environment LEDs Main switch BPS PWR SYS ALM Per Stacking port S1 S2 Per mini GBIC port green LED Per 1000Base T port G
10. Firmware Upgrade Download new firmware when available from the ZyXEL web site and use the web configurator CLI or an FTP TFTP tool to put it on the Switch Note Only upload firmware for your specific model Configuration Backup amp Restoration Make a copy of the Switch s configuration and put it back on the Switch later if you decide you want to revert back to an earlier configuration Cluster Management Cluster management also known as iStacking allows you to manage switches through one switch called the cluster manager The switches must be directly connected and be in the same VLAN group so as to be able to communicate with one another XGS 4728F User s Guide 397 Chapter 50 Product Specifications Table 149 Switching Specifications Layer 2 Features Bridging 16K MAC addresses Static MAC address filtering by source destination Broadcast storm control Static MAC address forwarding Switching STP Qos Switching fabric 144 Gbps non blocking Max Frame size 9 kbytes Forwarding frame EEE 802 3 IEEE 802 1q Ethernet II PPPoE Prevent the forwarding of corrupted packets IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree capability 4 configurable trees IEEE 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1p Eight priority queues per port Port based egress traffic shaping Rule based traffic mirroring Supports IGMP snoop
11. Table 65 RADIUS vs TACACS RADIUS TACACS Transport UDP User Datagram Protocol TCP Transmission Control Protocol Protocol Encryption Encrypts the password sent for All communication between the client authentication the Switch and the TACACS server is encrypted 25 2 AAA Screens The AAA screens allow you to enable authentication authorization accounting or all of them on the Switch First configure your authentication and accounting server settings RADIUS TACACS or both and then set up the authentication priority activate authorization and configure accounting settings XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 25 AAA Click Advanced Application gt AAA in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 115 Advanced Application gt AAA x RADIUS Server Setup TACACS Server Setup AAA Setup Click Here Click Here Click Here 25 2 1 RADIUS Server Setup Use this screen to configure your RADIUS server settings See Section 25 1 2 on page 216 for more information on RADIUS servers and Section 25 3 on page 226 for RADIUS attributes utilized by the authentication and accounting features on the Switch Click on the RADIUS Server Setup link in the AAA screen to view the screen as shown Figure 116 Advanced Application gt AAA gt RADIUS Server Setup OXDZDUSEKTIDDUEDIC NHMMNNNND AAA Authentication Server Mode index priority z Timeout
12. Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this check box to enable the VLAN mapping feature on this port Clear this check box to disable the VLAN mapping feature Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 28 VLAN Mapping 28 3 Configuring VLAN Mapping Click the VLAN Mapping Configure link in the VLAN Mapping screen to display the screen as shown Use this screen to enable and edit the VLAN mapping rule s Figure 140 VLAN Mapping Configuration C VLAN Mapping Configure VLAN Mapping Active Name Port VID Translated VID Priority Oy Add Cancel Index Active Name Port VID Translated VID Priority Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 88 VLAN Mapping Configuration Translated VID LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Check this box to activate this rule Name Enter a descriptive name up to 32 printable ASCII characters for identification purposes Port Type a port to be included in this rule VID Enter a VLAN ID from 1 to 4094 This is the VLAN tag carried in the
13. Figure 220 Clustering Application Example 43 2 Cluster Management Status Click Management gt Cluster Management in the navigation panel to display the following screen Note A cluster can only have one manager Figure 221 Management Cluster Management Clustering Management Status Configuration Status Manager Manager 00 13 49 01 1fb0 The Number Of Member 1 Index MacAddr Name Model Status t 00 13 49 ae fb 7a ES 2024PWR ES 2024PWR Online XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 43 Cluster Management The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 139 Management gt Cluster Management LABEL DESCRIPTION Status This field displays the role of this Switch within the cluster Manager Member you see this if you access this screen in the cluster member switch directly and not via the cluster manager None neither a manager nor a member of a cluster Manager This field displays the cluster manager switch s hardware MAC address The Number This field displays the number of switches that make up this cluster The of Member following fields describe the cluster member switches Index You can manage cluster member switches via the cluster manager switch Each number in the I ndex column is a hyperlink leading to the cluster member switch s web configurator see Figure 222 on page 366 MacAddr This is the cluster member switch s hardware MAC address Name This is
14. OAND IP Address 172 21 0 2 172 21 3 16 172 21 3 19 172 21 3 40 172 21 3 66 172 21 3 90 172 21 3 91 172 21 3 95 172 21 3 120 172 21 3 138 172 21 4 99 172 21 10 11 172 21 100 153 172 21 207 247 192 168 1 1 192 158 1 5 192 168 1 10 192 168 1 100 MAC Address 00 05 5d 04 30 fl 00 05 1c 15 08 71 00 0b cd 8c 6d ed 00 0c 76 07 41 0d 00 50 8d 47 73 4f 00 05 5d f4 49 20 00 50 ba ad 55 7c 00 10 b5 ae 55 97 00 10 b5 ae 52 32 00 a0 5 b2 62 26 00 0c 76 09 cf 88 08 00 20 ad 16 88 00 90 27 be a2 8c 00 0c 76 09 17 1a 00 a0 c5 3f 91 56 00 85 30 01 01 04 00 a0 c5 5e df f8 00 85 a0 01 01 00 Type dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic static dynamic The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 144 Management gt ARP Table LABEL Index DESCRIPTION This is the ARP Table entry number IP Address This is the learned IP address of a device connected to a Switch port with the corresponding MAC address below MAC Address This is the MAC address of the device with the corresponding IP address above Type This shows whether the MAC address is dynamic learned by the Switch or static manually entered in the Static MAC Forwarding screen XGS 4728F User s Guide Routing Table This chapter introduces the routing table 47 1 Overview The routing
15. Port This field displays a port number m Use this row to make the setting the same for all ports Use this row first and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this check box to enable the loop guard feature on this port The Switch sends probe packets from this port to check if the Switch it is connected to is in loop state If the Switch that this port is connected is in loop state the Switch will shut down this port Clear this check box to disable the loop guard feature Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XGS 4728F User s Guide VLAN Mapping This chapter shows you how to configure VLAN mapping on the Switch 28 1 VLAN Mapping Overview With VLAN mapping enabled the Switch can map the VLAN ID and priority level of packets received from a private network to those used in the service provider s network The Switch checks incoming traffic from the switch ports non management ports against the VLAN mapping table first the MAC learning table and then the VLAN table before forwarding them through the Giga
16. State This field displays the state of the Switch backup or DR designated router Priority This field displays the priority of the Switch This number is used in the designated router election Designated This field displays the router ID of the designated router Router Backup This field displays the router ID of a backup designated router Designated Router Time Intervals Configured This field displays the time intervals in seconds configured Neighbor Count This field displays the number of neighbor routers Adjacent This field displays the number of neighbor router s that is adjacent to Neighbor Count the Switch Neighbor Neighbor ID This field displays the router ID of the neighbor Pri This field displays the priority of the neighbor This number is used in the designated router election State This field displays the state of the neighbor backup or DR designated router Dead Time This field displays the dead time in seconds Address This field displays the IP address of a neighbor Interface This field displays the MAC address of a device Link State Database Link ID This field displays the ID of a router or subnet ADV Router This field displays the IP address of the layer 3 device that sends the LSAs Age This field displays the time in seconds since the last LSA was sent XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 33 OSPF Table 96 OSPF
17. Access Control Logins LABEL DESCRIPTION Administrator This is the default administrator account with the admin user name You cannot change the default administrator user name Only the administrator has read write access Old Password Type the existing system password 1234 is the default password when shipped New Password Enter your new system password Retype to Retype your new system password for confirmation confirm Edit Logins You may configure passwords for up to four users These users have read only access You can give users higher privileges via the CLI For more information on assigning privileges see the Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide User Name Set a user name up to 32 ASCII characters long Password Enter your new system password Retype to Retype your new system password for confirmation confirm Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 40 4 SSH Overview Unlike Telnet or FTP which transmit data in clear text SSH Secure Shell is a secure communication protocol that combines authentication and data encryption to provide secure encrypted communication betwee
18. VLAN mapping 259 activating 260 configuration 261 example 259 priority level 259 tagged 259 traffic flow 259 untagged 259 VLAN ID 259 VLAN number 88 VLAN stacking 191 193 configuration 194 example 191 frame format 193 port roles 192 195 port based Q in Q 195 priority 193 selective Q in Q 196 VLAN Trunking Protocol see VTP VLAN protocol based See protocol based VLAN VLAN subnet based See subnet based VLANs 103 VRID Virtual Router ID 318 VRRP 317 advertisement interval 321 authentication 320 backup router 317 configuration example 323 Hello message 321 how it works 317 interface setup 319 master router 317 network example 317 324 parameters 321 preempt mode 321 322 priority 321 322 status 318 uplink gateway 322 uplink status 319 Virtual Router 317 Virtual Router ID 322 VRID 318 VSA 224 VTP 266 W warranty 411 note 411 web configurator 28 45 getting help 54 home 46 login 45 logout 54 navigation panel 48 weight queuing 188 Weighted Round Robin Scheduling WRR 188 WFQ Weighted Fair Queuing 188 WRR Weighted Round Robin Scheduling 188 Z ZyNOS ZyXEL Network Operating System 334 XGS 4728F User s Guide
19. deny An ARP packet was discarded because there were no bindings with the same MAC address and VLAN ID dhcp permit An ARP packet was forwarded because it matched a dynamic binding static permit An ARP packet was forwarded because it matched a static binding In the ARP Inspection VLAN Configure screen you can configure the Switch to generate log messages when ARP packets are discarded or forwarded based on the VLAN ID of the ARP packet See Section 26 7 2 on page 253 Time This field displays when the log message was generated 26 7 ARP Inspection Configure Use this screen to enable ARP inspection on the Switch You can also configure the length of time the Switch stores records of discarded ARP packets and global XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 26 IP Source Guard settings for the ARP inspection log To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt Configure Figure 130 ARP Inspection Configure ARP inspection Configure g Port VLAN ARP Inspection Active Ci Filter Aging Time Filter aging time 300 seconds Log Profile Log buffer size 32 entries Syslog rate 5 entries Log interval i seconds Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 83 ARP Inspection Configure LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this to enable ARP inspection on the Switch You still have to enable ARP inspection o
20. Advanced Application gt Classifier continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Layer 2 Specify the fields below to configure a layer 2 classifier VLAN Select Any to classify traffic from any VLAN or select the second option and specify the source VLAN ID in the field provided Priority Select Any to classify traffic from any priority level or select the second option and specify a priority level in the field provided Ethernet Type Select an Ethernet type or select Other and enter the Ethernet type number in hexadecimal value Refer to Table 48 on page 177 for information Source MAC Address Select Any to apply the rule to all MAC addresses To specify a source select the second choice and type a MAC address in valid MAC address format six hexadecimal character pairs Port Type the port number to which the rule should be applied You may choose one port only or all ports Any Destinatio n MAC Address Select Any to apply the rule to all MAC addresses To specify a destination select the second choice and type a MAC address in valid MAC address format six hexadecimal character pairs Layer 3 Specify the fields below to configure a layer 3 classifier DSCP Select Any to classify traffic from any DSCP or select the second option and specify a DSCP DiffServ Code Point number between 0 and 63 in the field provided IP Protocol Select an IP prot
21. Advertisement Specify the number of seconds between Hello message Interval transmissions The default is 1 Preempt Mode Select this option to activate preempt mode Priority Enter a number between 1 and 254 to set the priority level The bigger the number the higher the priority This field is 100 by default Uplink Gateway Enter the IP address of the uplink gateway in dotted decimal notation The Switch checks the link to the uplink gateway Primary Virtual IP Enter the IP address of the primary virtual router in dotted decimal notation Secondary Virtual This field is optional Enter the IP address of a secondary virtual IP router in dotted decimal notation This field is ignored when you enter 0 0 0 0 322 XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 38 VRRP Table 117 P Application VRRP Configuration VRRP Parameters continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to discard all changes made in this table Clear Click Clear to set the above fields back to the factory defaults 38 3 4 Configuring VRRP Parameters View the VRRP configuration summary at the bottom of the screen Figure 186 VRRP Configuration
22. Area ID Enter a 32 bit ID that uses the format of an IP address in dotted decimal notation that uniquely identifies an area A value of 0 0 0 0 indicates that this is a backbone also known as Area 0 You can create only one backbone area on the Switch XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 33 OSPF Table 98 IP Application gt OSPF Configuration Area Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Authenticati Select an authentication method Simple or MD5 to activate on authentication Select None default to disable authentication Usually interface s and virtual interface s should use the same authentication method as the associated area If interface s and virtual interface s use different authentication methods than the associated area the authentication methods are based on the interface s and virtual interface s settings Stub Select this option to set the area as a stub area Network i If you enter 0 0 0 0 in the Area ID field the settings in the Stub Area fields are ignored No Select this option to set the Switch to not send receive LSAs Summary Default Specify a cost between 0 and 16777214 used to add a default route into Route a stub area for routes which are external to an OSPF domain If you do not Cost set a route cost no default route is added Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or lose
23. Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 43 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication gt MAC Authentication LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to permit MAC authentication on the Switch Note You must first enable MAC authentication on the Switch before configuring it on each port Name Prefix Type the prefix that is appended to all MAC addresses sent to the RADIUS server for authentication You can enter up to 32 printable ASCII characters If you leave this field blank then only the MAC address of the client is forwarded to the RADIUS server XGS 4728F User s Guide 167 Chapter 18 Port Authentication Table 43 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication gt MAC Authentication LABEL DESCRIPTION Password Type the password the Switch sends along with the MAC address of a client for authentication with the RADIUS server You can enter up to 32 printable ASCII characters Timeout Specify the amount of time before the Switch allows a client MAC address that fails authentication to try and authenticate again Maximum time is 3000 seconds When a client fails MAC authentication its MAC address is learned by the MAC address table with a status of denied The timeout period you specify here is the time the MAC address entry stays in the MAC address table until it is cleared If you specify 0 for the timeout value t
24. Figure 202 Management Maintenance Backup Configuration COLAM D Maintenance This page allows you to back up the device s current configuration to your workstation Now click the Backup button Backup Follow the steps below to back up the current Switch configuration to your computer in this screen 1 Click Backup 2 Click Save to display the Save As screen 3 Choose a location to save the file on your computer from the Save in drop down list box and type a descriptive name for it in the File name list box Click Save to save the configuration file to your computer 39 8 FTP Command Line This section shows some examples of uploading to or downloading files from the Switch using FTP commands First understand the filename conventions 39 8 1 Filename Conventions The configuration file also known as the romfile or ROM contains the factory default settings in the screens such as password Switch setup IP Setup and so on Once you have customized the Switch s settings they can be saved back to your computer under a filename of your choosing XGS 4728F User s Guide 333 Chapter 39 Maintenance 39 8 1 1 ZyNOS ZyXEL Network Operating System sometimes referred to as the ras file is the system firmware and has a bin filename extension Table 120 Filename Conventions INTERNA EXTERNA L NAME L NAME DESCRIPTION Configuration config cfg This is the configuration config filename on Fi
25. Load balancing is possible as traffic from different VLANs can use distinct paths in a region MSTP Network Example The following figure shows a network example where two VLANs are configured on the two switches If the switches are using STP or RSTP the link for VLAN 2 will be blocked as STP and RSTP allow only one link in the network and block the redundant link Figure 64 STP RSTP Network Example XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol With MSTP VLANs 1 and 2 are mapped to different spanning trees in the network Thus traffic from the two VLANs travel on different paths The following figure shows the network example using MSTP Figure 65 MSTP Network Example 13 1 5 2 MST Region An MST region is a logical grouping of multiple network devices that appears as a single device to the rest of the network Each MSTP enabled device can only belong to one MST region When BPDUs enter an MST region external path cost of paths outside this region is increased by one Internal path cost of paths within this region is increased by one when BPDUs traverse the region Devices that belong to the same MST region are configured to have the same MSTP configuration identification settings These include the following parameters Name of the MST region Revision level as the unique number for the MST region e VLAN to MST Instance mapping 13 1 5 3 MST Instance An MST Instance MSTI is a spanning tr
26. Table 132 Management gt Access Control gt Service Access Control LABEL DESCRIPTION Services Services you may use to access the Switch are listed here access the Switch Service For Telnet SSH FTP HTTP or HTTPS services you may change the default Port service port by typing the new port number in the Server Port field If you change the default port number then you will have to let people who wish to use the service know the new port number for that service Timeout Type how many minutes a management session via the web configurator can be left idle before the session times out After it times out you have to log in with your password again Very long idle timeouts may have security risks Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 40 10 Remote Management From the Access Control screen display the Remote Management screen as shown next XGS 4728F User s Guide 355 Chapter 40 Access Control You can specify a group of one or more trusted computers from which an administrator may use a service to manage the Switch Click Access Control to return to the Access Control screen Figure 216 Management
27. Up Time This field shows the total amount of time in hours minutes and seconds the port has been up Clear Counter Type a port number select Port and then click Clear Counter to erase the recorded statistical information for that port or select Any to clear statistics for all ports XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 7 System Status and Port Statistics 7 2 1 Status Port Details Click a number in the Port column in the Status screen to display individual port statistics Use this screen to check status and detailed performance data about an individual port on the Switch Figure 38 Status Port Details E Por Detalls Port Status Port Info Port NO 1 Name Link Down Status STOP LACP Disabled TxPkts 0 RxPkts 0 Errors 0 Tx KBs s 0 0 Rx KBs s 0 0 Up Time 0 00 00 TX Packet TX Packets 0 Multicast 0 Broadcast 0 Pause 0 Tagged 0 RX Packet RX Packets 0 Multicast 0 Broadcast 0 Pause 0 Control 0 TX Collision Single 0 Multiple 0 Excessive 0 Late 0 Error Packet RX CRC 0 Length D Runt 0 Distribution 64 0 65 to 127 0 128 to 255 D 256 to 511 0 51210 1023 D 1024 to 1518 D Giant D The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 8 Status gt Port Details LABEL DESCRIPTION Port Info Port NO This field displays the port number you are viewing Name This field displays the name of the port Link This field displays the speed either 10M for 10Mbps 100M for 10
28. e LACP if the ports are configured to join a trunk group via LACP XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 17 Link Aggregation 17 4 Link Aggregation Setting Click Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting to display the screen shown next See Section 17 1 on page 153 for more information on link aggregation Figure 80 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting Link Aggregation Setting g Status LACP Group ID Ti T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 Active Criteria src dst ip src ip gt src dst mac AiR R RO pe c Group NO o ROC nN z o 3 4 Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 40 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION Link This is the only screen you need to configure to enable static link Aggregation aggregation Setting Group ID The field identifies the link aggregation group that is one logical link containing multiple ports Active Select this option to activate a trunk group XGS 4728F User s Guide 157 Chapter 17 Link Aggregation Table 40 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION Criteria Select the outgoing traffic distribution type Packets from the same source and or to the same destination are sent over
29. 1 Kbps 0 0 7 rit Kbps 1 Kbps O 0 0 Mode C color aware DSCP Kbps i i Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 107 IP Application gt DiffServ gt 2 rate 3 Color Marker LABEL Active DESCRIPTION Select this to activate TRTCM Two Rate Three Color Marker on the Switch The Switch evaluates and marks the packets based on the TRTCM settings Note You must also activate DiffServ on the Switch and the individual ports for the Switch to drop red high loss priority colored packets Mode Select color blind to have the Switch treat all incoming packets as uncolored All incoming packets are evaluated against the CIR and PIR Select color aware to treat the packets as marked by some preceding entity Incoming packets are evaluated based on their existing color Incoming packets that are not marked proceed through the Switch Port This field displays the index number of a port on the Switch Active Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Select this to activate TRTCM on the port XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 36 Differentiated Services Table 107 P Application gt Di
30. Active Select Active to enable IGMP Snooping to forward group multicast traffic only to ports that are members of that group Querier Select this option to allow the Switch to send IGMP General Query messages to the VLANs with the multicast hosts attached Specify the time from 1 to 16 711 450 in seconds that elapses before the Switch removes an IGMP group membership entry if it does not receive report messages from the port Host Timeout 802 1p Priority Select a priority level 0 7 to which the Switch changes the priority in outgoing IGMP control packets Otherwise select No Change to not replace the priority XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 24 Multicast Table 60 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting continued LABEL DESCRIPTION IGMP Filtering Select Active to enable IGMP filtering to control which IGMP groups a subscriber on a port can join Note If you enable IGMP filtering you must create and assign IGMP filtering profiles for the ports that you want to allow to join multicast groups Unknown Specify the action to perform when the Switch receives an unknown Multicast Frame multicast frame Select Drop to discard the frame s Select Flooding to send the frame s to all ports Reserved Multicast Group The IP address range of 224 0 0 0 to 224 0 0 255 are reserved for multicasting on the local network only For example 224 0 0 1 is for all hosts on a loca
31. Cancel Transfer Type Index MAC Address VID Port U0 02 63 57 ea 1c 00 04 11 95 78 00 00 11 00 15 12 92 00 08 00 11 60 10 00 0f fe 18 00 11 Cc ROO UN o 3 C Condition C MAC jJ 5 EN m Type dynamic dynamic static dynamic dynamic XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 44 MAC Table The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 142 Management MAC Table LABEL DESCRIPTION Condition Select All to display all MAC addresses in the MAC table Select Static to only display static MAC address es in this screen Select MAC and enter a valid MAC address six hexadecimal character pairs to display the MAC address information in this screen Select VI D and type a VLAN identification number to display all MAC addresses in the VLAN Select Port and type the number of a port to display all MAC addresses learned from the port Sort by Select this to display and arrange the data according to MAC address MAC VLAN group VI D or port number Port The information is then displayed in the summary table below Transfer Type Select Dynamic to MAC forwarding and click Transfer to add the relative dynamic MAC address es you select the criteria here into the static MAC forwarding table see Section 10 2 on page 115 The type of the MAC address es will be changed to static Select Dynamic to MAC filtering and click Transfer to add the relative dynamic MAC address
32. Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes 24 5 IGMP Filtering Profile An IGMP filtering profile specifies a range of multicast groups that clients connected to the Switch are able to join A profile contains a range of multicast IP addresses which you want clients to be able to join Profiles are assigned to ports in the Multicast Setting screen Clients connected to those ports are then able to join the multicast groups specified in the profile Each port can be assigned a single profile A profile can be assigned to multiple ports XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 24 Multicast Click Advanced Applications gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt I GMP Filtering Profile link to display the screen as shown Figure 105 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Filtering Profile ED IGMP Filtering Profle ng Multicast Setting Profile Setup Profile Name Start Address End Address 224 0 0 0 224 0 0 0 Profile Name Default Add Clear Start Address End Address Delete Profile Delete Rule Ci 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 62 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Filtering Profile LABEL DESCRIPTION Profile Name Enter a descriptive name for the profile for identification purposes To configure additional rule s for a profile that you have already added ente
33. Cloning allows you to copy the basic and advanced settings from a source port to a destination port or ports Click Management gt Configure Clone to open the following screen Figure 231 Management Configure Clone Configure Clone g Source Destination Pot Port Features Active Name Speed Duplex BPDU Control Flow Control Intrusion Lock VLAN1q LAN1q Member Bandwidth Control VLAN Stacking Port Security Broadcast Storm Control Mirroring Part Authentication Queuing Method IGMP Filtering Spanning Tree Protocol Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Basic Setting Advanced Application Ge ELT Be De ERA XGS 4728F User s Guide 383 Chapter 48 Configure Clone Proto se N Port hased VLAN MAC Authentication Two rate three color marker Ethernet OAM Loop Guard ARP Inspection DHCP Snooping VLAN Mapping Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling LLDP Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 146 Management gt Configure Clone LABEL DESCRIPTION Source Destination Port Enter the source port under the Source label This port s attributes are copied Enter the destination port or ports under the Destination label These are the ports which are going to have the same attributes as the source port You can enter individual ports separated by a comma or a ran
34. Current This is the current voltage reading MAX This field displays the maximum voltage measured at this point MIN This field displays the minimum voltage measured at this point Threshold This field displays the percentage tolerance of the voltage with which the Switch still works Status Normal indicates that the voltage is within an acceptable operating range at this point otherwise Error is displayed XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting 8 3 General Setup Use this screen to configure general settings such as the system name and time Click Basic Setting and General Setup in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 40 Basic Setting gt General Setup t General Setup System Name XGS 4728F Location Contact Person s Name Use Time Server when Bootup None i Time Server IP Address 0 0 0 Current Time o po New Time hh mm ss foo bo Current Date 970 o T New Date yyyy mm dd hoo 01 Time Zone UTC m Daylight Saving Time n Start Date First Sunday Y of January Yj at 0 00 End Date First Sunday of January at 0 00 It will take 60 seconds if time server is unreachable 9i e en b b e c FE The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 10 Basic Setting gt General Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION System Name Type a descriptive name for identification purposes This name co
35. EJ Chapter 37 DHCP Table 114 IP Application gt DHCP gt VLAN continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Server Use this section if you want to configure the Switch to function as a DHCP server for this VLAN clen IP Specify the first of the contiguous addresses in the IP address pool Poo Starting Address Size of Specify the size or count of the IP address pool The Switch can issue eect IP from 1 to 253 IP addresses to DHCP clients IP Subnet Enter the subnet mask for the client IP pool Mask Default Enter the IP address of the default gateway device Gateway Primary Enter the IP addresses of the DNS servers The DNS servers are passed to S DNS ar the DHCP clients along with the IP address and the subnet mask Server Relay Use this section if you want to configure the Switch to function as a DHCP relay for this VLAN Remote Enter the IP address of a DHCP server in dotted decimal notation DHCP Server 1 aod Relay Select the Option 82 check box to have the Switch add information slot Agent number port number and VLAN ID to client DHCP requests that it relays enman to a DHCP server Informati This read only field displays the system name you configure in the on General Setup screen Select the check box for the Switch to add the system name to the client DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch
36. Index This is the index number of the entry VID This field displays the multicast VLAN ID Port This field displays the port number that belongs to the multicast group Multicast Group This field displays IP multicast group addresses XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 24 Multicast 24 3 Multicast Setting Click Advanced Applications Multicast Multicast Setting link to display the screen as shown See Section 24 1 on page 199 for more information on multicasting Figure 103 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting OMS Multicast Status IGMP Snooping VLAN IGMP Filtering Profile MVR Active O Querier E IGMP Snooping Host Timeout 60 802 1p Priority No Change IGMP Filtering Active O Unknown Multicast Frame Flooding C Drop Reserved Multicast Group Flooding C Drop Port immed Nomao EAStl OU0 Groug Max Group Throttling IGMP Filtering IGMP Querier Leave Limited Num Profile Mode 2 ol of o J Dey E Desu auto m 1 faooo cko m fp Dey peewz Awo s 2 mw cko m fp Dey Defutz Ao z 3 faooo cko m fp Dey Detz Ao H 4 joo cko cr fo Dey Defout Auto v 5 C a c zoo r Deny Dez Auto z Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 60 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION IGMP Snooping Use these settings to configure IGMP Snooping
37. Loop Guard 255 VLAN Mapping 259 Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling 263 Private VLAN 267 VLAN The type of screen you see here depends on the VLAN Type you selected in the Switch Setup screen This chapter shows you how to configure 802 1Q tagged and port based VLANs 9 1 Introduction to IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLANs A tagged VLAN uses an explicit tag VLAN ID in the MAC header to identify the VLAN membership of a frame across bridges they are not confined to the switch on which they were created The VLANs can be created statically by hand or dynamically through GVRP The VLAN ID associates a frame with a specific VLAN and provides the information that switches need to process the frame across the network A tagged frame is four bytes longer than an untagged frame and contains two bytes for the TPID Tag Protocol Identifier residing within the type length field of the Ethernet frame and two bytes for the TCI Tag Control Information starting after the source address field of the Ethernet frame The CFI Canonical Format Indicator is a single bit flag always set to zero for Ethernet switches If a frame received at an Ethernet port has a CFI set to 1 then that frame should not be forwarded as it is to an untagged port The remaining twelve bits define the VLAN ID giving a possible maximum number of 4 096 VLANs Note that user priority and VLAN ID are independent of each other A frame with VID VLAN Identifier of null 0 is c
38. Ports dynamically join a VLAN using GVRP Acceptable Frame Type VLAN Tag Control Tagged Ports belonging to the specified VLAN tag all outgoing frames transmitted Untagged Ports belonging to the specified VLAN don t tag all outgoing frames transmitted VLAN Port Port VID This is the VLAN ID assigned to untagged frames that this port received You may choose to accept both tagged and untagged incoming frames just tagged incoming frames or just untagged incoming frames on a port Ingress filtering If set the Switch discards incoming frames for VLANs that do not have this port as a member 9 3 Port VLAN Trunking Enable VLAN Trunking on a port to allow frames belonging to unknown VLAN groups to pass through that port This is useful if you want to set up VLAN groups on end devices without having to configure the same VLAN groups on intermediary devices The following figure describes VLAN Trunking Suppose you want to create VLAN groups 1 and 2 V1 and V2 on devices A and B Without VLAN Trunking you must configure VLAN groups 1 and 2 on all intermediary switches C D and E otherwise they will drop frames with unknown VLAN group tags However with VLAN Trunking enabled on a port s in each intermediary switch you only need to create VLAN groups in the end devices A and B C D and E automatically XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN allow frames with VLAN group tags 1 and 2 VLAN gr
39. Router Link States Area 0 0 0 0 ADV Router Age Seq CkSum Link count x jao Set Interval Stop The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 95 IP Application gt OSPF Status LABEL DESCRIPTION OSPF This field displays whether OSPF is activated Running or not Down Interface The text box displays the OSPF status of the interface s on the Switch Neighbor The text box displays the status of the neighboring router participating in the OSPF network Link State Database The text box displays information in the link state database which contains data in the LSAs XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 33 OSPF Table 95 IP Application gt OSPF Status continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Poll The text box displays how often in seconds this screen refreshes You Interval s may change the refresh interval by typing a new number in the text box and then clicking Set I nterval Stop Click Stop to end OSPF status polling The following table describes some common output fields Table 96 OSPF Status Common Output Fields FIELD DESCRIPTION Interface Internet This field displays the IP address and subnet bits of an IP routing Address domain Area This field displays the area ID Router ID This field displays the unique ID of the Switch Transmit Delay This field displays the transmission delay in seconds
40. Spanning Tree Protocol Status Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP Bridge Root Bridge ID 0000 000000000000 Hello Time second D Max Age second 0 Forwarding Delay second 0 Cost to Bridge D Port ID 0x0000 Topology Changed Times Time Since Last Change Configuration RSTP MRSTP MSTP Our Bridge 0000 000000000000 0 0 0 0 00 00 This screen differs depending on which STP mode RSTP MRSTP or MSTP you configure on the Switch This screen is described in detail in the section that follows the configuration section for each STP mode Click Configuration to activate one of the STP standards on the Switch 13 3 Spanning Tree Configuration Use the Spanning Tree Configuration screen to activate one of the STP modes on the Switch Click Configuration in the Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol Figure 69 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Configuration ree Configuration OE Rapid Spanning Tree Spanning Tree Mode C Multiple Spanning Tree C Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Apply Cancel Status XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 27 Advanced Application Spanning Tree Protocol Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Spanning Tree You can activate one of the STP modes on the Switch Mode Select Rapid Spanning Tree Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree or Multiple Span
41. Summary 1 Yes Index Actie Name Example Network VRID 192 168 1 10 24 1 Primary VIP 192 168 1 1 Uplink Gateway Priority Delete 192 168 1 100 110 E Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 118 VRRP Configuring VRRP Parameters LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This field displays the index number of an entry Active This field shows whether a VRRP entry is enabled Yes or disabled No Name This field displays a descriptive name of an entry Network This field displays the IP address and subnet mask of an interface VRID This field displays the ID number of a virtual router Primary VIP This field displays the IP address of the primary virtual router Uplink This field displays the IP address of the uplink gateway Gateway Priority This field displays the priority level 1 to 255 of the entry Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes 38 4 VRRP Configuration Examples The following sections show two VRRP configuration examples on the Switch XGS 4728F User s Guide a Chapter 38 VRRP 38 4 1 One Subnet Network Example The figure below shows a simple VRRP network with only one virtual router VR1 VRID 1 and two switches The network is connected to the WAN via an uplink gateway G 172 21 1 100 The host computer X is set to use
42. The following table describes the ports Table 1 Panel Connections CONNECTO DESCRIPTION 24 Dual Each interface has one 1000Base T copper RJ 45 port and one mini GBIC Personality Gigabit Interface Converter fiber port with one port active at a time Interfaces e 24 1000Base T Ports Connect these ports to high bandwidth backbone network Ethernet switches using Category 5 5e 6 1000Base T Ethernet cables Use an 8 wire Ethernet cable for Gigabit connections Using a 4 wire Ethernet cable limits your connection to 100 Mbps Note that the connection speed also depends on what the Ethernet device at the other end can support e 24 Mini GBIC Ports Use Small Form Factor Pluggable SFP transceivers in these ports for 1000Base X fiber optic connections to backbone Ethernet switches 3 1 1 Dual Personality Interfaces There are 24 Dual Personality interfaces comprising 24 1000Base T mini GBIC combo ports For each interface you can connect either to the 1000Base T port or the mini GBIC port The mini GBIC ports have priority over the 1000Base T ports XGS 4728F User s Guide EJ Chapter 3 Hardware Overview This means that if a mini GBIC port and the corresponding 1000Base T port are connected at the same time the 1000Base T port will be disabled 3 1 2 1000Base T Ports The Switch has 24 1000Base T auto negotiating auto crossover Ethernet ports In 100 1000 Mbps Gigabit Ethernet the speed ca
43. This field displays how long in seconds the Switch waits to update the DHCP snooping database after the current bindings change Agent running This section displays information about the current update and the next update of the DHCP snooping database This field displays the status of the current update or access of the DHCP snooping database none The Switch is not accessing the DHCP snooping database read The Switch is loading dynamic bindings from the DHCP snooping database write The Switch is updating the DHCP snooping database Delay timer expiry This field displays how much longer in seconds the Switch tries to complete the current update before it gives up It displays Not Running if the Switch is not updating the DHCP snooping database right now Abort timer expiry This field displays when in seconds the Switch is going to update the DHCP snooping database again It displays Not Running if the current bindings have not changed since the last update This section displays information about the last time the Switch updated the DHCP snooping database Last succeeded time This field displays the last time the Switch updated the DHCP snooping database successfully Last failed time This field displays the last time the Switch updated the DHCP snooping database unsuccessfully Last failed reason This field displays the reason the Switch updated the DHCP snooping database unsu
44. advantages 216 and authentication 216 Network example 216 server 216 settings 217 setup 217 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol See RSTP 125 reboot load configuration 331 reboot system 331 redistribute route 285 reducing routing table size 285 registration product 411 related documentation 3 remote management 355 service 356 trusted computers 356 resetting 52 330 to factory default settings 330 restoring configuration 52 332 Reverse Path Forwarding RPF 296 Reverse Path Multicasting RPM 295 RFC 3164 359 RIP 285 configuration 275 direction 275 overview 275 version 275 vs OSPF 277 RIP Routing Information Protocol 275 Round Robin Scheduling 188 route cost 286 router D 282 routing domain 86 319 routing protocols 399 routing table 381 RSTP 125 rubber feet 31 XGS 4728F User s Guide Index S safety warnings 7 save configuration 51 330 Secure Shell See SSH security 399 service access control 354 service port 355 Simple Network Management Protocol see SNMP SNMP 28 338 agent 338 and MI B 338 authentication 345 communities 344 management model 338 manager 338 MI B 339 network components 338 object variables 338 protocol operations 339 security 345 setup 344 traps 346 version 3 and security 339 versions supported 338 SNMP traps 340 supported 340 341 343 Spanning Tree Protocol See STP 125 SPQ Strict Priority Queuing 188 SSH encryption methods 350 how it works 349 impl
45. corresponding port listed on the left its outgoing port CPU refers to the Switch management port By default it forms a VLAN with all Ethernet ports If it does not form a VLAN with a particular port then the Switch cannot be managed from that port Outgoing These are the egress ports An egress port is an outgoing port that is a port through which a data packet leaves If you wish to allow two subscriber ports to talk to each other you must define the egress port for both ports CPU refers to the Switch management port By default it forms a VLAN with all Ethernet ports If it does not form a VLAN with a particular port then the Switch cannot be managed from that port Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XGS 4728F User s Guide 113 Chapter 9 VLAN XGS 4728F User s Guide Static MAC Forward Setup Use these screens to configure static MAC address forwarding 10 1 Overview This chapter discusses how to configure forwarding rules based on MAC addresses of devices on your network 10 2 Configuring Static MAC Forwarding A static MAC address is an address that has been manually entered in the MAC address
46. gt Static VLAN ED Static VLAN NEN VLAN Status ACTIVE BE Name VLAN Group ID Port Control Tagging Normal M TxTagding 1 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M TxTagging 2 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M TxTagging 3 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden Iv TxTagging 4 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden Iv TxTagging 5 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M TxTagging 6 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M TxTagging 7 C e oe Normal Fixed Forbidden M TxTagging n i idden j e eS Add Cancel Clear VID Active Name Delete Yes 1 r1 Delete Cancel The following table describes the related labels in this screen Table 17 Advanced Application VLAN Static VLAN LABEL DESCRIPTION ACTIVE Select this check box to activate the VLAN settings Name Enter a descriptive name for the VLAN group for identification purposes This name consists of up to 64 printable characters spaces are allowed VLAN Group Enter the VLAN ID for this static entry the valid range is between 1 and ID 4094 Port The port number identifies the port you are configuring Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN
47. sn seconds Index IP Address UDP Port Shared Secret Delete 1 0 0 0 0 1812 n 2 o 0 0 0 1812 LH Apply Cancel Accounting Server Timeout sn seconds Index IP Address UDP Port Shared Secret Delete 1 0 0 0 0 1813 LH 2 0 0 0 0 1813 O Apply Cancel XGS 4728F User s Guide 217 Chapter 25 AAA The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 66 Advanced Application AAA RADIUS Server Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Authentication Server Use this section to configure your RADIUS authentication settings Mode This field only applies if you configure multiple RADIUS servers Select index priority and the Switch tries to authenticate with the first configured RADIUS server if the RADIUS server does not respond then the Switch tries to authenticate with the second RADIUS server Select round robin to alternate between the RADIUS servers that it sends authentication requests to Timeout Specify the amount of time in seconds that the Switch waits for an authentication request response from the RADIUS server If you are using index priority for your authentication and you are using two RADIUS servers then the timeout value is divided between the two RADIUS servers For example if you set the timeout value to 30 seconds then the Switch waits for a response from the first RADIUS server for 15 seconds and then tries the second RADIUS server Index This is a read only number repre
48. so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 17 6 Static Trunking Example This example shows you how to create a static port trunk group for ports 2 5 XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 17 Link Aggregation 1 Make your physical connections make sure that the ports that you want to belong to the trunk group are connected to the same destination The following figure shows ports 2 5 on switch A connected to switch B Figure 82 Trunking Example Physical Connections 2 Configure static trunking Click Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting n this screen activate trunk group T1 select the traffic distribution algorithm used by this group and select the ports that should belong to this group as shown in the figure below Click Apply when you are done Figure 83 Trunking Example Configuration Screen Status LACP Group ID Active Criteria T2 src dst mac 13 lere det mac ial T4 src dst mac v T5 src dst mac 7 TB src dst mac HEBES Port Group None 7 Your trunk group 1 T1 configuration is now complete XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 17 Link Aggregation XGS 4728F User s Guide Port Authentication This chapter describes the IEEE 802 1x and MAC authentication methods 18
49. that you want to remove in the Delete Rule column then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete Profile Delete Rule check boxes 24 6 MVR Overview 24 6 1 Multicast VLAN Registration MVR is designed for applications such as Media on Demand MoD that use multicast traffic across an Ethernet ring based service provider network MVR allows one single multicast VLAN to be shared among different subscriber VLANs on the network While isolated in different subscriber VLANs connected devices can subscribe to and unsubscribe from the multicast stream in the multicast VLAN This improves bandwidth utilization with reduced multicast traffic in the subscriber VLANs and simplifies multicast group management MVR only responds to IGMP join and leave control messages from multicast groups that are configured under MVR Join and leave reports from other multicast groups are managed by IGMP snooping The following figure shows a network example The subscriber VLAN 1 2 and 3 information is hidden from the streaming media server S In addition the multicast VLAN information is only visible to the Switch and S Figure 106 MVR Network Example mom om VLAN3 T 9 9 Types of MVR Ports In MVR a source port is a port on the Switch that can send and receive multicast traffic in a multicast VLAN while a receiver port can only receive multicast traffic XGS 4728F User
50. the rack lining up the two screw holes on the bracket with the screw holes on the side of the rack Yoooooo 100000 qb oo P a WE Jooooooog PEKEN G 1000000 0 O0 AO 2 Using a 2 Philips screwdriver install the M5 flat head screws through the mounting bracket holes into the rack 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to attach the second mounting bracket on the other side of the rack XGS 4728F User s Guide 33 Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection XGS 4728F User s Guide Hardware Overview This chapter describes the front panel and rear panel of the Switch and shows you how to make the hardware connections 3 1 Front Panel Connections The figure below shows the front panel of the Switch Figure8 Front Panel Enanzn u iil E NN NW R WU S mM EN N NONE EN SINE NM NE NE D LO Ot diu diu tU du Bu dt Bduiou t tct iiod 9 L tur Ou tut dtu au dtu YA e PSUA PLN Yu o 0 PY R YA YAN Yu TUA YU TUA TUN YUAN YA YU TUA Yu PuA Pu Tu r Li f Li p Li r L p L r L r if r Li r Li is Li i Li U i u r Li r u r LI r u r L r L f u r u r u r u T Li
51. then this screen will appear locked for 60 seconds Please wait Current Time This field displays the time you open this menu or refresh the menu New Time hh min ss Enter the new time in hour minute and second format The new time then appears in the Current Time field after you click Apply Current Date This field displays the date you open this menu New Date Enter the new date in year month and day format The new date then yyyy mm dd appears in the Current Date field after you click Apply Time Zone Select the time difference between UTC Universal Time Coordinated formerly known as GMT Greenwich Mean Time and your time zone from the drop down list box Daylight Daylight saving is a period from late spring to early fall when many Saving Time countries set their clocks ahead of normal local time by one hour to give more daytime light in the evening Select this option if you use Daylight Saving Time Start Date Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time starts if you selected Daylight Saving Time The time is displayed in the 24 hour format Here are a couple of examples Daylight Saving Time starts in most parts of the United States on the second Sunday of March Each time zone in the United States starts using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A M local time So in the United States you would select Second Sunday March and 2 00 Daylight Saving Time starts in the European U
52. 00 1 Port Priority and Port Number are 0 as it is the aggregator ID for the trunk group not the individual port XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 17 Link Aggregation 17 3 Link Aggregation Status Click Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation in the navigation panel The Link Aggregation Status screen displays by default See Section 17 1 on page 153 for more information Figure 79 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation Status F3 T4 T5 T6 D Link Aggregation Status Link Aggregation Setting Group Enabled Synchronized Rapregator ID Criteria Status ID Ports Ports 0000 00 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 0000 T src dst mac LACP 1 38 0000 00 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 0000 T2 7 src dst ip Static src dst mac src dst mac src dst mac src dst mac The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 39 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Group ID This field displays the group ID to identify a trunk group that is one logical link containing multiple ports Enabled Port These are the ports you have configured in the Link Aggregation screen to be in the trunk group The port number s displays only when this trunk group is activated and there is a port belonging to this group Synchronized Ports These are the ports that are currently transmitting data as one logical link in this trunk group Aggregator ID
53. 1 Port Authentication Overview Port authentication is a way to validate access to ports on the Switch to clients based on an external server authentication server The Switch supports the following methods for port authentication IEEE 802 1x An authentication server validates access to a port based on a username and password provided by the user MAC An authentication server validates access to a port based on the MAC address and password of the client Both types of authentication use the RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RFC 2138 2139 protocol to validate users See Section 25 1 2 on page 216 for more information on configuring your RADIUS server settings Note If you enable IEEE 802 1x authentication and MAC authentication on the same port the Switch performs IEEE 802 1x authentication first If a user fails to authenticate via the IEEE 802 1x method then access to the port is denied 18 1 1 IEEE 802 1x Authentication The following figure illustrates how a client connecting to a IEEE 802 1x authentication enabled port goes through a validation process The Switch prompts the client for login information in the form of a user name and password When the client provides the login credentials the Switch sends an authentication 2 Atthe time of writing IEEE 802 1x is not supported by all operating systems See your operating system documentation If your operating system does not support 802 1x then you
54. 3 1 Transceiver Installation Use the following steps to install a mini GBIC transceiver SFP or XFP module 1 Insert the transceiver into the slot with the exposed section of PCB board facing down Figure9 Transceiver Installation Example RES 2 Press the transceiver firmly until it clicks into place 3 The Switch automatically detects the installed transceiver Check the LEDs to verify that it is functioning properly Figure 10 Installed Transceiver 3 1 3 2 Transceiver Removal Use the following steps to remove a mini GBIC transceiver SFP module 1 Open the transceiver s latch latch styles vary Figure 11 Opening the Transceiver s Latch Example XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 3 Hardware Overview 2 Pull the transceiver out of the slot Figure 12 Transceiver Removal Example SEES 3 2 Rear Panel The following figures show the rear panels of the AC and DC power input model switches The rear panels contain A connector for the backup power supply A An optional slot B for installing an EM 422 or EM 412 uplink module Two stacking ports C An RJ 45 out of band management port D An RS 232 management console port E A connector for the power receptacle F A power switch G DC power input model only Figure 13 Rear Panel AC Model
55. 3 293 versions supported 292 IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol 199 292 IGMP filtering 199 profile 205 profiles 201 IGMP leave timeout fast 202 mormal 202 IGMP snooping 200 MVR 207 IGMP throttling 203 ingress port 113 Installation Rack mounting 32 installation freestanding 31 precautions 32 interface 280 and OSPF 286 interface and OSPF 278 Internal Router IR 278 introduction 25 IP capability 399 interface 86 319 routing domain 86 services 399 setup 86 IP multicast example 291 IP source guard 231 DHCP snooping 231 232 static bindings 231 IP table 375 how it works 375 L L2PT 263 access port 264 CDP 263 configuration 265 encapsulation 263 LACP 263 MAC address 263 mode 264 overview 263 PAgP 263 point to point 263 STP 263 tunnel port 264 UDLD 263 VTP 263 LACP 153 266 system priority 160 timeout 160 layer 2 features 398 Layer 2 protocol tunneling see L2PT layer 3 features 399 LEDs 41 limit MAC address learning 171 Link Aggregate Control Protocol LACP 153 link aggregation 153 dynamic 153 ID information 154 setup 157 159 status 155 traffic distribution algorithm 156 traffic distribution type 158 link state database 278 280 lockout 52 log 357 login 45 password 51 login account Administrator 347 non administrator 347 login accounts 347 ARP inspection 231 234 XGS 4728F User s Guide Index configuring via web configurator 347 multiple 347 number of 347 login pass
56. 802 1Q consists of the following three fields Table 53 VLAN Tag Format Type Priority VID Type is a standard Ethernet type code identifying the frame and indicates that whether the frame carries IEEE 802 1Q tag information SP TPID Service Provider Tag Protocol Identifier is the service provider VLAN stacking tag type Many vendors use 0x8100 or 0x9100 TPI D Tag Protocol Identifier is the customer IEEE 802 1Q tag f the VLAN stacking port role is Access Port then the Switch adds the SP TPID tag to all incoming frames on the service provider s edge devices 1 and 2 in the VLAN stacking example figure If the VLAN stacking port role is Tunnel Port then the Switch only adds the SP TPID tag to all incoming frames on the service provider s edge devices 1 and 2 in the VLAN stacking example figure that have an SP TPI D different to the one configured on the Switch If an incoming frame s SP TPID is the same as the one configured on the Switch then the Switch will not add the tag Priority refers to the IEEE 802 1p standard that allows the service provider to prioritize traffic based on the class of service CoS the customer has paid for On the Switch configure priority level of the inner IEEE 802 1Q tag in the Port Setup screen 0 is the lowest priority level and 7 is the highest VID is the VLAN ID SP VID is the VID for the second service provider s VLAN tag 23 3 1 Frame Format The frame
57. 81 Time RFC 868 81 time server 81 time service protocol 81 format 81 Time To Live TTL 297 trademarks 409 transceiver installation 37 removal 37 translating RIP into OSPF 285 traps destination 345 TRTCM and bandwidth control 304 and DiffServ 304 color aware mode 301 color blind mode 301 setup 303 trunk group 153 trunking 153 398 example 160 trusted ports ARP inspection 235 DHCP snooping 232 Tunnel Protocol Attribute and RADIUS 225 tutorials 61 DHCP snooping 61 Two Rate Three Color Marker TRTCM 300 Two Rate Three Color Marker see TRTCM 300 Type of Service ToS 299 U UDLD 266 UniDirectional Link Detection see UDLD untrusted ports ARP inspection 235 DHCP snooping 232 user profiles 216 V Vendor Specific Attribute See VSA ventilation holes 32 VID 88 95 99 100 193 number of possible VI Ds 95 priority frame 95 VID VLAN Identifier 95 virtual links 288 virtual links and OSPF 279 Virtual Router status 319 Virtual Router VR 317 Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol VRRP 317 VLAN 82 95 398 acceptable frame type 103 automatic registration 96 ID 95 ingress filtering 103 introduction 82 number of VLANs 99 port number 100 port settings 102 port based VLAN 110 port based all connected 113 port based isolation 113 port based wizard 113 static VLAN 100 status 99 100 tagged 95 trunking 97 103 type 84 98 VLAN Virtual Local Area Network 82 XGS 4728F User s Guide Index
58. ARF TASC CVS c 234 Ge Pte regc M c oan 235 26 0 IF Source Guard Statie Binding i ssictacoiccsetaecizccdivasdaisacniaaeiadevtsectudageceeialeen late ladeebesetneegutbers 236 204 DHCP MOONY m 238 255 DHCP Shospihg Configure sssrinin aa ei aaa a A dada dace pea 241 26 5 1 EPSP Snooping Pait oHnflguiS uo cest perte air brioni inea enii iiiaae 243 26 5 2 DHGP Snooping VLAN Configure uisi pen th is an prc ntc da ada s Hed 244 ES ARP SD SR niiina ibd acta Oe Ema rta COR D d POR adu 246 255 1 ARP Inspection VLAN SIUS sssrinds aiaa oeni siaaa 247 206 2 ARP Inspection Loo AAS donira apa T E 248 20 7 ARF Inspeccion OOmliguEe rrrainis eere 249 25 7 T ARP Ingpecion Port CONIOUEE ceci iere caer ente Eel or enne iaaa 251 25 7 2 ARP Inspection VLAN Configure uisexdssecdx ee aki en Ecran iious senda aae 253 Chapter 27 Loop Guard 255 EW Loop GURI VBP ec oae ieia aae EO aE ia E O E M 255 2ra LS SAR Se a RN AN R 257 Chapter 28 VLAN Mapping O M 259 Zei VLAN re TEES LUCI ET 259 25 1 1 FLAW Mappe Exaile uuisasaenasisapeonai xa epp a oncle a bong da ad o a 259 20 28 Engbling VLAN MOPPING quud esub dasce to cert ns ink risk e ium bx dus de co x dude AE ENE da Rud aus AREE 260 28 3 Contigunng VLAN Mapping C m 261 Chapter 29 Layer 2 Protocol TUNNENO usen saa aa rtl itia SR MAR AER RAXAE GR RAE AR MER AE AA KRIMI UG t MA
59. ARP Inspection VLAN Configure LABEL DESCRIPTION VLAN Use this section to specify the VLANs you want to manage in the section below Start VID Enter the lowest VLAN ID you want to manage in the section below End VID Enter the highest VLAN ID you want to manage in the section below XGS 4728F User s Guide 253 Chapter 26 IP Source Guard Table 85 ARP Inspection VLAN Configure continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply VID Click this to display the specified range of VLANs in the section below This field displays the VLAN ID of each VLAN in the range specified above If you configure the VLAN the settings are applied to all VLANs Enabled Select Yes to enable ARP inspection on the VLAN Select No to disable ARP inspection on the VLAN Log Specify when the Switch generates log messages for receiving ARP packets from the VLAN None The Switch does not generate any log messages when it receives an ARP packet from the VLAN Deny The Switch generates log messages when it discards an ARP packet from the VLAN Permit The Switch generates log messages when it forwards an ARP packet from the VLAN All The Switch generates log messages every time it receives an ARP packet from the VLAN Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top naviga
60. DHCP Snooping URL Renew C Cancel 5 Click the Port link at the top right corner m XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials 6 The DHCP Snooping Port Configure screen appears Select Trusted in the Server Trusted state field for port 5 because the DHCP server is connected to port 5 Keep ports 6 and 7 Untrusted because they are connected to DHCP clients Click Apply Figure 28 Tutorial Set the DHCP Server Port to Trusted DHCP Snooping Port Configure eed Configure Port Server Trusted state Rate pps Untrusted Dd 1 Untrusted pre 4 Untrusted o 5 p 6 Untrusted rm 7 p Cancel 7 Goto Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt DHCP snooping gt Configure gt VLAN show VLAN 100 by entering 100 in the Start VID and End VI D fields and click Apply Then select Yes in the Enabled field of the VLAN 100 entry shown at the bottom section of the screen If you want to add more information in the DHCP request packets such as source VLAN ID or system name you can also select the Option82 and I nformation fields in the entry See Section 26 1 1 3 on page 233 Figure 29 Tutorial Enable DHCP Snooping on this VLAN A Snooping onfigure Configure Start vip 100 End vip 100 Show VLAN VID Enabled No Option82 Information ri r 100 8 Click Save at the top right corner of the web configurator to save
61. DR or BDR The router with the highest priority becomes the DR while a router with a priority of O does not participate in router elections In Figure 149 on page 279 you can assign a priority of O to routers B and C thereby ensuring they do not become DR or BDR and assign a priority of 1 to router A to make sure that it does become the DR Configuring OSPF To configure OSPF on the Switch do the following tasks Enable OSPF Create OSPF areas XGS 4728F User s Guide 279 Chapter 33 OSPF 3 Create and associate interface s to an area 4 Create virtual links to maintain backbone connectivity 33 2 OSPF Status Use this screen to view current OSPF status Click IP Application gt OSPF in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown next See Section 33 1 on page 277 for more information on OSPF Figure 150 IP Application gt OSPF Status Interface Neighbor Neighbor ID 192 168 1 1 4 ERI 3 Link State Database Link ID J Poll Interval s X4 EN NND Configuration VLINKO0 is down line protocol is down OSPF is enabled but not running on this interface swif2 is up line protocol is up Internet Address 192 168 1 10 24 Area 192 168 1 1 Router ID 192 168 1 10 Network Type BROADCAST Cost 15 Transmit Delay is 1 sec State Backup Priority 1 x 4 OSPF Router with ID 192 168 1 10 Pri State Dead Time Address Interface 1 Full DR 00 00 34 192 168 1 1 swif2 192 168
62. E m Koj e n eo A o w This trap is sent when the voltage goes above or below the normal operating range VoltageEventClear en N Ww NO A m Co ito e Hd Un o0 A D UJ This trap is sent when the voltage returns to the normal operating range reset UncontrolledResetEventOn 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 46 3 This trap is sent when the Switch automatically resets ControlledResetEventOn 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 46 3 FPO rR oO This trap is sent when the Switch resets by an administrator through a management interface RebootEvent 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 1 1 2 This trap is sent when the Switch reboots by an administrator through a management interface XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 40 Access Control Table 124 SNMP System Traps continued OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION timesync RTCNotUpdatedEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 46 3 This trap is sent when the 1 2 1 Switch fails to get the time and date from a time server 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 46 3 This trap is sent when the Switch gets the time and date from a time server RTCNotUpdatedEventClear 1 3 2 No intrusionlo IntrusionLockEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 46 3 This trap is sent when intrusion ck 1 2 1 lock occurs on a port loopguard LoopguardEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 46 3 This trap is sent when loopguard 1 2 1 shuts down a port Table 125 SNM
63. PIR values are based on the guaranteed and maximum bandwidth respectively as negotiated between a service provider and client Two Rate Three Color Marker evaluates incoming packets and marks them with one of three colors which refer to packet loss priority levels High packet loss priority level is referred to as red medium is referred to as yellow and low is referred to as green After TRTCM is configured and DiffServ is enabled the following actions are performed on the colored packets Red high loss priority level packets are dropped Yellow medium loss priority level packets are dropped if there is congestion on the network Green low loss priority level packets are forwarded TRTCM operates in one of two modes color blind or color aware In color blind mode packets are marked based on evaluating against the PIR and CIR regardless of if they have previously been marked or not In the color aware mode packets are marked based on both existing color and evaluation against the PIR and CIR If the packets do not match any of colors then the packets proceed unchanged 36 2 1 TRTCM Color blind Mode All packets are evaluated against the PIR If a packet exceeds the PIR it is marked red Otherwise it is evaluated against the CIR If it exceeds the CIR then it is marked yellow Finally if it is below the CIR then it is marked green Figure 169 TRTCM Color blind Mode 36 2 2 TRTCM Color aware Mode In color a
64. Port The default port of a RADIUS accounting server for accounting is 1813 You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 25 AAA Table 66 Advanced Application AAA RADIUS Server Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Shared Secret Specify a password up to 32 alphanumeric characters as the key to be shared between the external RADIUS accounting server and the Switch This key is not sent over the network This key must be the same on the external RADIUS accounting server and the Switch Delete Check this box if you want to remove an existing RADIUS accounting server entry from the Switch This entry is deleted when you click Apply Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 25 2 2 TACACS Server Setup Use this screen to configure your TACACS server settings See Section 25 1 2 on page 216 for more information on TACACS servers Click on the TACACS Server Setup link in the Authentication and Accounting screen to view the screen as shown UBDGLUCUEDUDDEDST NNNNNNEP Authentication Server Auth and Acct Mo
65. QUE E f bcc op jako amen aD Ue ERR 77 Advanced 93 LIE 1 EE E E E E I ean e EET A 95 Siate MAC Foward SEUD m N N 115 Saue Multicast Parward DOUP uidet pri sS pera AAN DLE cays 119 PU EET uico ctm be t eee tert rent rer dte hn De ob tt cer tua bore tree entre tence renter oU 123 Spanning Troe Prologi e 125 c r peragi emt TEC 145 Broadcast SOM OCONTOL ter legs caie a mauniema pani ddeman ita ete 149 VIDIT eer TEE 181 Nip eie ps MP D LL DOLUS EL 153 Pori Authentication et 163 Gib MN UU T T MM 169 b ESSI O 173 amr koai a aasehiardanadetintyaddoaarinaaed 179 Cuenta A imt OE here ree ere ot rere ener eaenrn et ere 187 DE Ecc ptt eT 191 IPC SE opis ipi bib eyebra dr HE p ERR Hp bagage Pro pU gd ad go Latet PO pe apad a aL PRG p 199 MUR enh ee aora T sce Fin A eio Pop arde pO S RED UR pn asia Pasa D xd amen d ee TA T 215 gets e LET ie eR 231 Hop t vic nE A 255 SEAN DODIG NT RES 259 Layer 2 Protocol TUNNEN siccin S 263 ERE ER X Tcv PW 267 XGS 4728F User s Guide 9 Contents Overview iu 271 rez lg ET I T T 273 E NR TETTE EESTI I T 275 acl E 277 Ej m TH 291 Ridr n Tr ne 295 Direroniiated SONICO m m 299 DEI nisus usa discat on ee
66. Router 278 authentication 284 and OSPF 283 and RADIUS 216 Index setup 221 authorization privilege levels 223 setup 221 automatic VLAN registration 96 Autonomous System and OSPF 277 Autonomous System AS 277 295 back up configuration file 333 Backbone Router BR 278 backbone routing 277 Backup Designated Router BDR and OSPF 279 bandwidth control 398 basic settings 77 basic setup tutorial 61 BDR Backup Designated Router 279 binding 231 binding table 231 building 231 BPDUs Bridge Protocol Data Units 126 Bridge Protocol Data Units BPDUs 126 bridging 398 C CDP 266 certifications 409 notices 410 viewing 411 CFI Canonical Format Indicator 95 changing the password 51 Cisco Discovery Protocol see CDP CIST 130 XGS 4728F User s Guide Index CIST Common and Internal Spanning Tree 128 Class of Service CoS 299 classifier 173 175 and QoS 173 editing 176 example 178 overview 173 setup 173 175 176 viewing 176 cloning a port See port cloning cluster management 363 and switch passwords 369 cluster manager 363 368 cluster member 363 369 cluster member firmware upgrade 367 network example 364 setup 368 specification 363 status 364 switch models 363 VID 368 web configurator 365 cluster manager 363 cluster member 363 command interface 28 Common and Internal Spanning Tree CIST 128 Common and Internal Spanning Tree See CIST 130 configuration 274 change running con
67. S DESCRIPTION ESP User Defined 50 The IPSEC ESP Encapsulation IPSEC TUNNEL Security Protocol tunneling protocol uses this service FINGER TCP 79 Finger is a UNIX or Internet related command that can be used to find out if a user is logged on FTP TCP 20 File Transfer Program a program to enable fast transfer of files including TCP 21 large files that may not be possible by e mail H 323 TCP 1720 NetMeeting uses this protocol HTTP TCP 80 Hyper Text Transfer Protocol a client server protocol for the world wide web HTTPS TCP 443 HTTPS is a secured http session often used in e commerce ICMP User Defined 1 Internet Control Message Protocol is often used for diagnostic or routing purposes ICQ UDP 4000 This is a popular Internet chat program IGMP User Defined 2 Internet Group Multicast Protocol is MULTI CAST used when sending packets to a specific group of hosts IKE UDP 500 The Internet Key Exchange algorithm is used for key distribution and management IRC TCP UDP 6667 This is another popular Internet chat program MSN Messenger TCP 1863 Microsoft Networks messenger service uses this protocol NEW ICQ TCP 5190 An Internet chat program NEWS TCP 144 A protocol for news groups NFS UDP 2049 Network File System NFS is a client server distributed file service that provides transparent file sharing for network environments NNTP TCP 119 Network News Transport Protocol is the delivery mechanism for the U
68. Switch examines a received frame and learns the port from which this source MAC address came The Switch checks to see if the frame s destination MAC address matches a source MAC address already learned in the MAC Table f the Switch has already learned the port for this MAC address then it forwards the frame to that port f the Switch has not already learned the port for this MAC address then the frame is flooded to all ports Too much port flooding leads to network congestion XGS 4728F User s Guide 371 372 Chapter 44 MAC Table f the Switch has already learned the port for this MAC address but the destination port is the same as the port it came in on then it filters the frame Figure 225 MAC Table Flowchart E Is destination MAC address in the MAC Table Yes Forward to all ports Is the outgoing port different from the incoming port Filter this Forward to frame outgoing port 44 2 Viewing the MAC Table Click Management gt MAC Table in the navigation panel to display the following screen Use this screen to search specific MAC addresses You can also directly add dynamic MAC address es into the static MAC forwarding table or MAC filtering table from the MAC table using this screen Figure 226 Management MAC Table ED MAC table C all C Static C vip C Port Sort by MAC J OI Dynamic to MAC forwarding C Dynamic to MAC filtering Search Transfer
69. TeL LOR and PIR sararan E TT 145 Tia Bandwidih COORG SED T AAR S EE HMX n 146 Chapter 15 Broadcast Stormi COMMON 149 19 1 Broadcast Sam Control Saup 5 cccdasevenzescoseadesdntesuadsacbensvacaendceaxagentsedsdem e RR etn 149 Chapter 16 ee 151 Diu Pon eec RE A EEE 151 Chapter 17 Nu goo i 7 M 153 XGS 4728F User s Guide Table of Contents T2 LINK Aggregation COUBEVIIME subsistit tado adt ae Dee aac o sera gp HR 153 ER dui ur Lok Agregati c s 153 17 21 Link Aggregation BP 154 HESSE PANG TS D TE 155 1AA Link Aggregato SB n sianie AE E DUREE GF ROR E SeUE 157 Tho Link Pre ATO Control ues MT 159 14 89 806 EKN EAN siina aSa nahea ASE dl bra du Rd 160 Chapter 18 Port lui oO 163 191 Fot Authenticalon OVE 163 jp SEIZE Uso up ues s TT 163 1E T2 NAC PSU CHIRON synnin 164 18 2 Por Authentication Lone I susce ice eue o ie aA 165 18 2 1 Activate IEEE BUZ TX Bey tities tncisscs Mase Ye tepida Ga E aod 166 18 2 2 Aclivate MAL AUG NCSU uq cocci ccsdauss oeivtea ir bebm nS E prdda kb ber on b REY au ES meatier 167 Chapter 19 PONT SQ CUNY T 169 VS T ADMI est S EOHEDE den a P Rx ca abba buie us mr rer reer uar dea rere rte RR 169 D auo stipE rice 170 QR EE tiem haup AE c
70. VLAN Click the VLAN Port Setting link in the VLAN Status screen Figure 49 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting e wini e Port Ingress Check Hu Hu Ho Hu EOT Subnet Based Vian Protocol Based Vlan VLAN Status r PVID GVRP Acceptable Frame Type VLAN Trunking Isolation C All E O 1 C All Y Li 1 ri All bd O 1 Li All X C B 1 Li All z n rH 5 1 All T Ci Apply Cancel XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 18 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION GVRP GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol is a registration protocol that defines a way for switches to register necessary VLAN members on ports across the network Select this check box to permit VLAN groups beyond the local Switch Port This field displays the port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Ingress Check If this check box is selected for a port the Switch discards incoming frames for VLANs that do not include this port in its member set Clear this check box to disable ingress filtering PVID Enter a number between land 40
71. VR1 as the default gateway Figure 187 VRRP Configuration Example One Virtual Router Network 172 21 1 1 m 192 168 1 1 Default Gateway 192 168 1 20 192 168 1 20 192 168 1 10 172 21 1 10 B You want to set switch A as the master router Configure the VRRP parameters in the VRRP Configuration screens on the switches as shown in the figures below Figure 188 VRRP Example 1 VRRP Parameter Settings on Switch A Active iv Name Example Network 192 168 1 1 24 J Virtual Router ID 1 Advertisement Interval 1 Preempt Mode iv Priority no Uplink Gateway 172 21 1 100 Primary Virtual IP 32168120 Secondary Virtual IP noon Figure 189 VRRP Example 1 VRRP Parameter Settings on Switch B Active Iv Name Example1 Network 192 168 1 10 24 Virtual Router ID 1 Advertisement Interval 1 Preempt Mode Iv Priority hoo Uplink Gateway z22113100 Primary Virtual IP 321681120 Secondary Virtual IP booo XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 38 VRRP After configuring and saving the VRRP configuration the VRRP Status screens for both switches are shown next Figure 190 VRRP Example 1 VRRP Status on Switch A Aug C NND Configuration Index Active Network VRID VR Status Uplink Status 1 Yes 192 168 1 1 24 1 Master Alive Figure 191 VRRP Example 1 VRRP Status on Switch B OSE Configuration Index Active Network VRID VR Status Upl
72. XGS 4728F User s Guide 277 Chapter 33 OSPF 33 1 2 33 1 3 The following table describes the four classes of OSPF routers Table 94 OSPF Router Types TYPE DESCRIPTION Internal Router IR An Internal or intra area router is a router in an area Area Border Router An Area Border Router connects two or more areas ABR Backbone Router BR A backbone router has an interface to the backbone AS Boundary Router An AS boundary router exchanges routing information with routers in other ASs The following figure depicts an OSPF network example The backbone is area 0 with a backbone router The internal routers are in area 1 and 2 The area border routers connect area 1 and 2 to the backbone Figure 148 OSPF Network Example How OSPF Works Layer 3 devices exchange routing information to build a synchronized link state database within the same AS or area The link state database contains records of router IDs their associated links and path costs Each device can then use the link state database and Dijkstra algorithm to compute the least cost paths to network destinations Layer 3 devices build a synchronized link state database by exchanging Hello messages to confirm which neighbor layer 3 devices exist and then they exchange database descriptions DDs to create the link state database The link state database is constantly updated through LSAs Link State Advertisements Interfaces an
73. access to a data server and the Internet The uplink module supports a fiber optic connection which alleviates the distance limitations of copper cabling In this example all computers can share high speed applications on the server and access the Internet To expand the network simply add more networking devices such as switches routers computers print servers and so on Figure 3 Gigabit to the Desktop pu Internet J ho 1 1 4 IEEE 802 10 VLAN Application Example A VLAN Virtual Local Area Network allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical networks Stations on a logical network belong to one or more groups With VLAN a station cannot directly talk to or hear from stations that are not in the same group s unless such traffic first goes through a router For more information on VLANs refer to Chapter 9 on page 95 1 1 4 1 Tag based VLAN Example Ports in the same VLAN group share the same frame broadcast domain thus increasing network performance by reducing broadcast traffic VLAN groups can be modified at any time by adding moving or changing ports without any re cabling XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch Shared resources such as a server can be used by all ports in the same VLAN as the server In the following figure only ports that need access to the server need to be part of VLAN 1 Ports can belong to other VLAN groups too Figure 4 Shared Server Usin
74. accounting IP D ping traceroute Switch stp mactable rmon cfm The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 130 Management gt Access Control gt SNMP gt Trap Group LABEL DESCRIPTION Trap Destination IP Select one of your configured trap destination IP addresses These are the IP addresses of the SNMP managers You must first configure a trap destination IP address in the SNMP Setting screen Use the rest of the screen to select which traps the Switch sends to that SNMP manager Type Select the categories of SNMP traps that the Switch is to send to the SNMP manager XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 40 Access Control Table 130 Management gt Access Control gt SNMP gt Trap Group continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Options Select the individual SNMP traps that the Switch is to send to the SNMP station See Section 40 3 3 on page 340 for individual trap descriptions The traps are grouped by category Selecting a category automatically selects all of the category s traps Clear the check boxes for individual traps that you do not want the Switch to send to the SNMP station Clearing a category s check box automatically clears all of the category s trap check boxes the Switch only sends traps from selected categories Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes i
75. address of the subnet for this subnet based VLAN Mask Bits This field shows the subnet mask in bit number format for this subnet based VLAN VID This field shows the VLAN ID of the frames which belong to this subnet based VLAN Priority This field shows the priority which is assigned to frames belonging to this subnet based VLAN Delete Click this to delete the subnet based VLANs which you marked for deletion Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 9 8 Protocol Based VLANs Protocol based VLANs allow you to group traffic into logical VLANs based on the protocol you specify When an upstream frame is received on a port configured for a protocol based VLAN the Switch checks if a tag is added already and its protocol The untagged packets of the same protocol are then placed in the same protocol based VLAN One advantage of using protocol based VLANs is that priority can be assigned to traffic of the same protocol Note Protocol based VLAN applies to un tagged packets and is applicable only when you use IEEE 802 1Q tagged VLAN For example ports 1 2 3 and 4 belong to static VLAN 100 and ports 4 5 6 7 belong to static VLAN 120 You can configure a protocol based VLAN A with priority 3 for ARP traffic received on port 1 2 and 3 You can also have a protocol based VLAN B with priority 2 for Apple Talk traffic received on port 6 and 7 All upstream ARP traffic from port 1 2 and 3 will be grouped toge
76. allowed range is between 0 and 255 and the default value is 128 Path Cost Path cost is the cost of transmitting a frame on to a LAN through that port It is recommended to assign this value according to the speed of the bridge The slower the media the higher the cost see Table 25 on page 126 for more information Add Click Add to save this MST instance to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses this change if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Instance This field displays the ID of an MST instance VLAN This field displays the VID or VID ranges to which the MST instance is mapped Active Port This field display the ports configured to participate in the MST instance XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol Table 32 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MSTP continued Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh LABEL DESCRIPTION Delete Check the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete column and then click the Delete button Cancel 13 9 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Status Click Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol in the navigation panel to display the status screen as shown next See Sectio
77. are then placed in the same subnet based VLAN One advantage of using subnet based VLANs is that priority can be assigned to traffic from the same IP subnet For example an ISP Internet Service Provider may divide different types of services it provides to customers into different IP subnets Traffic for voice services is designated for IP subnet 172 16 1 0 24 video for 192 168 1 0 24 and data for 10 1 1 0 24 The Switch can then be configured to group incoming traffic based on the source IP subnet of incoming frames You can then configure a subnet based VLAN with priority 6 and VID of 100 for traffic received from IP subnet 172 16 1 0 24 voice services You can also have a subnet based VLAN with priority 5 and VID of 200 for traffic received from IP subnet 192 168 1 0 24 video services Lastly you can configure VLAN with priority 3 and VID of 300 for traffic received from IP subnet 10 1 1 0 24 data services All untagged incoming frames will be classified based on their source IP subnet and prioritized accordingly That is video services receive the highest priority and data the lowest Figure 50 Subnet Based VLAN i Example T Internet gt e Untagged Frames v m SEEN MI 10 1 1 0 24 VID 300 9 7 Configuring Subnet Based VLAN Click Subnet Based VLAN in the VLAN Port Setting screen to display the configuration screen as shown XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN Note Subnet based VL
78. been reconfigured Time Since Last Change This is the time since the spanning tree was last reconfigured Instance These fields display the MSTI to VLAN mapping In other words which VLANs run on each spanning tree instance Instance This field displays the MSTI ID VLAN This field displays which VLANs are mapped to an MSTI MSTI Select the MST instance settings you want to view Bridge Root refers to the base of the MST instance Our Bridge is this Switch This Switch may also be the root bridge Bridge ID This is the unique identifier for this bridge consisting of bridge priority plus MAC address This ID is the same for Root and Our Bridge if the Switch is the root switch Internal Cost This is the path cost from the root port in this MST instance to the regional root switch Port ID This is the priority and number of the port on the Switch through which this Switch must communicate with the root of the MST instance XGS 4728F User s Guide 14 1 14 1 1 Bandwidth Control This chapter shows you how you can cap the maximum bandwidth using the Bandwidth Control screen Bandwidth Control Overview Bandwidth control means defining a maximum allowable bandwidth for incoming and or out going traffic flows on a port CIR and PIR The Committed Information Rate CIR is the guaranteed bandwidth for the incoming traffic flow on a port The Peak Information Rate PIR is the m
79. begin configuring this screen afresh XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 17 Link Aggregation 17 5 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Click in the Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting gt LACP to display the screen shown next See Section 17 2 on page 153 for more information on dynamic link aggregation Figure 81 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting gt LACP Link Aggregation Control Protocol g Link Aggregation Setting Active 1 System Priority 65535 Group ID LACP Active T1 r T2 1 T3 O T4 1 T5 D T6 3 Port LACP Timeout z 30 7 seconds 1 30 seconds 2 30 seconds 3 30 7 seconds 4 30 seconds 5 30 v seconds 6 30 v seconds de uus unu wx Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 41 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting gt LACP LABEL DESCRIPTION ris Note Do not configure this screen unless you want to enable ggregation Rint Control dynamic link aggregation Protocol Active Select this checkbox to enable Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 17 Link Aggregation Table 41 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting gt LACP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION System LACP system priority is a number
80. between 1 and 65 535 The switch with Priority the lowest system priority and lowest port number if system priority is the same becomes the LACP server The LACP server controls the operation of LACP setup Enter a number to set the priority of an active port using Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP The smaller the number the higher the priority level Group ID The field identifies the link aggregation group that is one logical link containing multiple ports LACP Active Select this option to enable LACP for a trunk Port This field displays the port number 3 Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them LACP Timeout is the time interval between the individual port exchanges of LACP Timeout packets in order to check that the peer port in the trunk group is still up If a port does not respond after three tries then it is deemed to be down and is removed from the trunk Set a short timeout one second for busy trunked links to ensure that disabled ports are removed from the trunk group as soon as possible Select either 1 second or 30 seconds Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power
81. by detecting the signal on the cable and using half duplex mode When the Switch s auto negotiation is turned off a port uses the pre configured speed and duplex mode when making a connection thus requiring you to make sure that the settings of the peer port are the same in order to connect Flow Control A concentration of traffic on a port decreases port bandwidth and overflows buffer memory causing packet discards and frame losses Flow Control is used to regulate transmission of signals to match the bandwidth of the receiving port The Switch uses IEEE 802 3x flow control in full duplex mode and backpressure flow control in half duplex mode IEEE 802 3x flow control is used in full duplex mode to send a pause signal to the sending port causing it to temporarily stop sending signals when the receiving port memory buffers fill Back Pressure flow control is typically used in half duplex mode to send a collision signal to the sending port mimicking a state of packet collision causing the sending port to temporarily stop sending signals and resend later Select Flow Control to enable it 802 1p Priority This priority value is added to incoming frames without a 802 1p priority queue tag See Priority Queue Assignment in Table 11 on page 84 for more information BPDU Control Configure the way to treat BPDUs received on this port You must activate bridging control protocol transparency in the Switch Setup screen f
82. by others However there is a problem with the site s security certificate The security certificate was issued by a company you have not chosen to trust View the certificate to determine whether you want to trust the certifying authority The security certificate date is valid The name on the security certificate is invalid or does not match the name of the site Do you want to proceed Yes No View Certificate x When you attempt to access the Switch HTTPS server a Website Certified by an Unknown Authority screen pops up asking if you trust the server certificate Click Examine Certificate if you want to verify that the certificate is from the Switch If Accept this certificate temporarily for this session is selected then click OK to c ontinue in Netscape XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 40 Access Control Select Accept this certificate permanently to import the Switch s certificate into the SSL client Figure 212 Security Certificate 1 Netscape Website Certified by an Unknown Authority Unable to verify the idei A Possible reasons for this erf Your browser does not recognize the Certificate Authority that issued the site s certificate The site s certificate is incomplete d You are connected to a site prete your confidential information Please notify the site s webmaster about this problem Before accepting this certificate you should examine this site s willing to to
83. cause electrocution f the power adaptor or cord is damaged remove it from the device and the power source Do NOT attempt to repair the power adaptor or cord Contact your local vendor to order a new one Do not use the device outside and make sure all the connections are indoors There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning Do NOT obstruct the device ventilation slots as insufficient airflow may harm your device stands for Waste Electronics and Electrical Equipment It means that used electrical and electronic products should not be mixed with general waste Used electrical Your product is marked with this symbol which is known as the WEEE mark WEEE and electronic equipment should be treated separately XGS 4728F User s Guide Safety Warnings XGS 4728F User s Guide Contents Overview Contents Overview no 23 Getma Co TRO Yor SWE h antn a poaae ois ebbe Ra Pob volat ue bob Up aano E 25 Hardware installation and CORSI suisia perennes dau dead tnus Fase qna dada kd 31 ae segs cea Bsc Dro e pierre trete sary T etree rare ee ener en rete E T rere 35 Basic Configuration r AA 43 Hi 7 f ppUrio LE 45 minarete mp ripis OPNS E T 55 Blu S e TE 61 System Situs and Pert Statislie Lie oec prc dana dca Pese bd ud a anni da 71 Eus OBITU E EETA AAE PO A ab uc CD DR GE fut en
84. changing states This delay is required because every switch must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a blocking state otherwise temporary data loops might result The allowed range is 4 to 30 seconds As a general rule Note 2 Forward Delay 1 gt Max Age gt 2 Hello Time 1 Port This field displays the port number e Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them XGS 4728F User s Guide 133 Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol Table 28 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt RSTP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to activate RSTP on this port Priority Configure the priority for each port here Priority decides which port should be disabled when more than one port forms a loop in a switch Ports with a higher priority numeric value are disabled first The allowed range is between 0 and 255 and the default value is 128 Path Cost Path cost is the cost of transmitting a frame on to a LAN through that port It is recommended to assign this v
85. configure the packet classifier on the Switch 20 1 About the Classifier and QoS Quality of Service QoS refers to both a network s ability to deliver data with minimum delay and the networking methods used to control the use of bandwidth Without QoS all traffic data is equally likely to be dropped when the network is congested This can cause a reduction in network performance and make the network inadequate for time critical application such as video on demand A classifier groups traffic into data flows according to specific criteria such as the Source address destination address source port number destination port number or incoming port number For example you can configure a classifier to select traffic from the same protocol port such as Telnet to form a flow Configure QoS on the Switch to group and prioritize application traffic and fine tune network performance Setting up QoS involves two separate steps Configure classifiers to sort traffic into different flows Configure policy rules to define actions to be performed for a classified traffic flow refer to Chapter 21 on page 179 to configure policy rules 20 2 Configuring the Classifier Use the Classifier screen to define the classifiers After you define the classifier you can specify actions or policy to act upon the traffic that matches the rules To configure policy rules refer to Chapter 21 on page 179 XGS 4728F User s Guide 1 73 Chapter 20 Cla
86. dra 354 40 9 Service Port Access OCOIMMEBI isssctesxs br aae phe Uta Ind aeo tobess eR Ebr a aetE Ordi dG PE etu t 354 40 10 Romolo Monagement e 355 XGS 4728F User s Guide Table of Contents Chapter 41 n s 357 SI ENDE SIS eH eun E ur seis eld Hi sd uS PU Et obe 357 Chapter 42 Fe e E T E E E E A E AA 359 QAI wn osainen S EA ea Ar R 359 A a EOE E N 360 42 3 Syslog Server SEUD eR eean aaa aae Ea DOE S Eaka 361 Chapter 43 Cluster ManagmM M ssn EEEE 363 43 1 Clustering Management Status Overview ssssssssssssss eene 363 43 2 Ghiister Management Statis eU 364 43 2 1 Cluster Member Switch Management sss 365 43 3 Clustering Management Configuration sesssssssesseseeseseeenene enne 368 Chapter 44 MAG o 371 Ba MAC Table OV CIVIBWE e ecaa an aaen aaee Ea a eE Ren EEES EEES 371 4 2 Viewing die MAG TADIG aussa iain naaa a SaS NASAS 372 Chapter 45 IP TMG e M HM 375 25 T IP Table OVES eani cito acto ted ideato te baro Ron pt i A aano Race 375 35 2 Mieyvg Is JP TOES ss occu arii as baa ek Haga x EET SO p YER E buYYEE Ea YE 0 aX bx 110 SR ox 376 Chapter 46 ARP TADIG eet KNEE 379 D NF MEL Re n Rm P T 379 45 1 1 Moy ADIP TONE outussonbnadienoagY vica aa eon apnd ge depnaba heater AY o phan aet 379 45
87. entry from the summary table Note Deleting all IP subnets locks you out of the Switch Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting 8 7 Port Setup Use this screen to configure Switch port settings Click Basic Setting gt Port Setup in the navigation panel to display the configuration screen Figure 43 Basic Setting Port Setup Portsetup Port Active Name 1 a i 2 xl N n ks 26 x Ilii 27 lt a 28 a Type 10 100 1000M 10 100 1000M 106 10G 106 126 106 126 Speed Duplex Auto Auto Auto 4 4 0 10G Full Duplex 10G Full Duplex 12G Full Duplex J 12G Full Duplex How Control Priority c Pe I osm r ez Peer s co pa fe a r 0 om Pee E r es Pe sz 0 o gt Peer 0 5m m joz Pee 05mm Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 13 Basic Setting gt Port Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This is the port index number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this check box to enable
88. format for an untagged Ethernet frame a single tagged 802 1Q frame customer and a double tagged 802 1Q frame service provider is shown next XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 23 VLAN Stacking Configure the fields as highlighted in the Switch VLAN Stacking screen Table 54 Single and Double Tagged 802 11Q Frame Format DA SA Len Dat FCS Untagged Etype a Ethernet frame DA SA TPI Priorit VI Len Dat FCS IEEE 802 1Q D y D Etype a customer tagged frame D SA SPTPI Priori VI TPI Priorit VI Len Dat FCS Double A D ty D D y D Etype a tagged frame Table 55 802 1Q Frame DA Destination Address Priority 802 1p Priority SA Source Address Len Length and type of Ethernet Etype frame SP TPI Service Provider Tag Protocol Data Frame data D Dentifier VID VLAN ID FCS Frame Check Sequence 23 4 Configuring VLAN Stacking Click Advanced Applications gt VLAN Stacking to display the screen as shown Figure 99 Advanced Application gt VLAN Stacking Active Port Role Normal s Normal s Normal s Normal s Normal s Normal s OREINEN r Port based QinQ Selective QinQ Tunnel TPID Apply Cancel XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 23 VLAN Stacking The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 56 Advanced Application VLAN Stacking LAB
89. from 0 to 16384 0 means this feature is disabled Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 19 3 VLAN MAC Address Limit Use this screen to set the MAC address learning limit on per port and per VLAN basis Click VLAN MAC Address Limit in the Advanced Application Port Security screen to display the screen as shown Figure 90 Advanced Application gt Port Security gt VLAN MAC Address Limit OD VLAN MAC Address Limit J Port Security Active n Port VID Limit Number Add Cancel Clear Index Active Port VID Limit Number Delete r Delete Cancel XGS 4728F User s Guide 1 71 Chapter 19 Port Security 172 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 45 Advanced Application gt Port Security gt VLAN MAC Address Limit LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this option to activate this rule Port Enter the number of the port to which this rule is applied VID Enter the VLAN identification number Limit Number Use this field to limit the number of dynamic MAC addresses that may be learned on a port in a specified VLAN For example if you set this field to 5 on
90. if you do not want the Switch to send log messages generated by ARP packets to the syslog server The relationship between Syslog rate and Log interval is illustrated in the following examples e 4 invalid ARP packets per second Syslog rate is 5 Log interval is 1 the Switch sends 4 syslog messages every second e 6 invalid ARP packets per second Syslog rate is 5 Log ns is 2 the Switch sends 5 syslog messages every 2 seconds Log interval Type how often 1 86400 seconds the Switch sends a batch of syslog messages to the syslog server Enter 0 if you want the Switch to send syslog messages immediately See Syslog rate for an example of the relationship between Syslog rate and Log interval Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last saved values 26 7 1 ARP Inspection Port Configure Use this screen to specify whether ports are trusted or untrusted ports for ARP inspection You can also specify the maximum rate at which the Switch receives XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 26 IP Source Guard ARP packets on each untrusted port To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP In
91. in the Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Configuration screen to enable MRSTP on the Switch XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol Table 30 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MRSTP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Bridge Priority Bridge priority is used in determining the root switch root port and designated port The switch with the highest priority lowest numeric value becomes the STP root switch If all switches have the same priority the switch with the lowest MAC address will then become the root switch Select a value from the drop down list box The lower the numeric value you assign the higher the priority for this bridge Bridge Priority determines the root bridge which in turn determines Hello Time Max Age and Forwarding Delay Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds between BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Units configuration message generations by the root switch The allowed range is 1 to 10 seconds Max Age This is the maximum time in seconds a switch can wait without receiving a BPDU before attempting to reconfigure All switch ports except for designated ports should receive BPDUs at regular intervals Any port that ages out STP information provided in the last BPDU becomes the designated port for the attached LAN If it is a root port a new root port is selected from among the Switch ports attached to the ne
92. in the following way t will receive broadcast messages sent out from the switch in loop state XGS 4728F User s Guide 255 Chapter 27 Loop Guard t will receive its own broadcast messages that it sends out as they loop back It will then re broadcast those messages again The following figure shows port N on switch A connected to switch B Switch B is in loop state When broadcast or multicast packets leave port N and reach switch B they are sent back to port N on A as they are rebroadcast from B Figure 134 Switch in Loop State The loop guard feature checks to see if a loop guard enabled port is connected to a switch in loop state This is accomplished by periodically sending a probe packet and seeing if the packet returns on the same port If this is the case the Switch will shut down the port connected to the switch in loop state The following figure shows a loop guard enabled port N on switch A sending a probe packet P to switch B Since switch B is in loop state the probe packet P returns to port N on A The Switch then shuts down port N to ensure that the rest of the network is not affected by the switch in loop state Figure 135 Loop Guard Probe Packet ONG w The Switch also shuts down port N if the probe packet returns to switch A on any other port In other words loop guard also protects against standard network loops The following figure illustrates three switches forming a loop A samp
93. into any language or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical magnetic optical chemical photocopying manual or otherwise without the prior written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation Published by ZyXEL Communications Corporation All rights reserved Disclaimer ZyXEL does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products or software described herein Neither does it convey any license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of others ZyXEL further reserves the right to make changes in any products described herein without notice This publication is subject to change without notice Trademarks ZyNOS ZyXEL Network Operating System is a registered trademark of ZyXEL Communications Inc Other trademarks mentioned in this publication are used for identification purposes only and may be properties of their respective owners Certifications Federal Communications Commission FCC Interference Statement This device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions This device may not cause harmful interference XGS 4728F User s Guide Appendix B Legal Information This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operations FCC Warning This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital switch pursuant to Part 15 of
94. is 2 for Q2 is 3 and so on The weights range from 1 to 15 and the actual guaranteed bandwidth is calculated as follows XGS 4728F User s Guide 1 87 Chapter 22 Queuing Method 2 Weight 1 x 10 KB If the weight setting is 5 the actual quantum guaranteed to the associated queue would be as follows 2 x 10KB 160 KB 22 1 3 Weighted Round Robin Scheduling WRR 188 Round Robin Scheduling services queues on a rotating basis and is activated only when a port has more traffic than it can handle A queue is given an amount of bandwidth irrespective of the incoming traffic on that port This queue then moves to the back of the list The next queue is given an equal amount of bandwidth and then moves to the end of the list and so on depending on the number of queues being used This works in a looping fashion until a queue is empty Weighted Round Robin Scheduling WRR uses the same algorithm as round robin scheduling but services queues based on their priority and queue weight the number you configure in the queue Weight field rather than a fixed amount of bandwidth WRR is activated only when a port has more traffic than it can handle Queues with larger weights get more service than queues with smaller weights This queuing mechanism is highly efficient in that it divides any available bandwidth across the different traffic queues and returns to queues that have not yet emptied XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 2
95. it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 8 4 Introduction to VLANs A VLAN Virtual Local Area Network allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical networks Devices on a logical network belong to one group A device can belong to more than one group With VLAN a device cannot directly talk to or hear from devices that are not in the same group s the traffic must first go through a router In MTU Multi Tenant Unit applications VLAN is vital in providing isolation and security among the subscribers When properly configured VLAN prevents one subscriber from accessing the network resources of another on the same LAN thus a user will not see the printers and hard disks of another user on the same network VLAN also increases network performance by limiting broadcasts to a smaller and more manageable logical broadcast domain In traditional switched environments all broadcast packets go to each and every individual port With VLAN all broadcasts are confined to a specific broadcast domain Note VLAN is unidirectional it only governs outgoing traffic See Chapter 9 on page 95 for information on port based and 802 1Q tagged VLANs XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting 8 4 1 Smart Isolation T
96. loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 33 OSPF 33 4 Configure OSPF Areas To ensure that the Switch receives only routing information from a trusted layer 3 devices activate authentication The OSPF supports three levels of authentication None no authentication is used Simple authenticate link state updates using an 8 printable ASCII character password MD5 authenticate link state updates using a 16 printable ASCII character password To configure an area set the related fields in the OSPF Configuration screen Figure 152 IP Application gt OSPF Configuration Area Setup eEudecnurucrn Redistribute Interface Virtual Link Status Active Ci Router ID 0 0 0 0 Apply Cancel Name name UN Area ID 0 0 0 0 Authentication None Stub Network n No Summary O Default route cost 15 W Add Cancel Clear P Index Name Area ID Authentication Stub Network Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the related labels in this screen Table 98 IP Application gt OSPF Configuration Area Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Name Enter a descriptive name up to 32 printable ASCII characters for identification purposes
97. may need to install 802 1x client software XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 18 Port Authentication request to a RADIUS server The RADIUS server validates whether this client is allowed access to the port Figure 84 IEEE 802 1x Authentication Process m N New Connection Login Info Request Login Credentials Q Authentication Request Authentication Reply Session Granted Denied 18 1 2 MAC Authentication MAC authentication works in a very similar way to IEEE 802 1x authentication The main difference is that the Switch does not prompt the client for login credentials The login credentials are based on the source MAC address of the XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 18 Port Authentication client connecting to a port on the Switch along with a password configured specifically for MAC authentication on the Switch Figure 85 MAC Authentication Process m C a a m N New Connection Authentication Request Authentication Reply Session Granted Denied 18 2 Port Authentication Configuration To enable port authentication first activate the port authentication method s you want to use both on the Switch and the port s then configure the RADIUS server settings in the AAA Radius Server Setup screen To activate a port authentication method click Advanced Application gt Port Authentication in the navigation panel Select a port authentication
98. only send and receive traffic from the port s you specify here Add Click Add to insert the entry in the summary table below and save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration Clear Click Clear to clear the fields to the factory defaults Index This is the index number of the rule Active This shows whether this rule is activated or not Name This is the descriptive name for this rule VLAN This is the VLAN to which this rule is applied Promiscuous Ports This shows the port s that can communicate with any ports in the same VLAN XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 30 Private VLAN Table 90 Advanced Application Private VLAN continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Delete Check the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete column and then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 30 Private VLAN 270 XGS 4728F User s Guide PART IV IP Application Static Route 273 RIP 275 OSPF 277 IGMP 291 DVMRP 295 Differentiated Services 299 DHCP 307 VRRP 317 271 272 Static Route This chap
99. pool configured for this DHCP server instance This field displays the subnet mask value sent to clients from this DHCP server instance Server DHCP server instance Default This field displays the default gateway value sent to clients from this Gateway DHCP server instance Primary DNS This field displays the primary DNS server value sent to clients from this Secondary DNS This field displays the secondary DNS server value sent to clients from Server this DHCP server instance Address Leases This section displays information about the IP addresses this DHCP server issued to clients IP Address Index This field displays a sequential number for each DHCP request handled by the Switch This is the IP address issued to a DHCP client Timer This field displays the time remaining before the DHCP client has to renew its IP address Hardware This field displays the MAC address of the DHCP client Address It may also display SELF OCCUPIED ADDRESS if the IP address cannot be used for DHCP because it is already assigned to the Switch itself Hostname This field displays the system name of the client XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 37 DHCP 37 4 DHCP Relay 37 4 1 Configure DHCP relay on the Switch if the DHCP clients and the DHCP server are not in the same broadcast domain During the initial IP address leasing the Switch helps to relay network information such as the IP address and subn
100. process of recording what a user is doing The Switch can use an external server to track when users log in log out execute commands and so on Accounting can also record system related actions such as boot up and shut down times of the Switch The external servers that perform authentication authorization and accounting functions are known as AAA servers The Switch supports RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service see Section 25 1 2 on page 216 and TACACS Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus see Section XGS 4728F User s Guide 215 Chapter 25 AAA 25 1 1 25 1 2 25 1 2 on page 216 as external authentication authorization and accounting servers Figure 114 AAA Server Local User Accounts By storing user profiles locally on the Switch your Switch is able to authenticate and authorize users without interacting with a network AAA server However there is a limit on the number of users you may authenticate in this way See Chapter 40 on page 337 RADIUS and TACACS RADIUS and TACACS are security protocols used to authenticate users by means of an external server instead of or in addition to an internal device user database that is limited to the memory capacity of the device In essence RADIUS and TACACS authentication both allow you to validate an unlimited number of users from a central location The following table describes some key differences between RADIUS and TACACS
101. s vendor ID is 890 Vendor Type A vendor specified attribute identifying the setting you want to modify Vendor data A value you want to assign to the setting Note Refer to the documentation that comes with your RADIUS server on how to configure VSAs for users authenticating via the RADIUS server The following table describes the VSAs supported on the Switch Note that these atrributes only work when you enable authorization see Section 25 2 3 on page 221 Table 69 Supported VSAs FUNCTION ATTRIBUTE Ingress Bandwidth vendor Id 890 Assignment Vendor Type 1 Vendor data ingress rate Kbps in decimal format XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 25 AAA Table 69 Supported VSAs FUNCTION ATTRIBUTE Egress Bandwidth vendor Id 890 Assignment Vendor Type 2 Vendor data egress rate Kbps in decimal format Privilege Vendor ID 890 Assignment Vendor Type 3 Vendor Data shell priv 1lvlzN or Vendor ID 9 CISCO Vendor Type 1 CISCO AVPAIR Vendor Data shell priv lvlzN where N is a privilege level from 0 to 14 Note If you set the privilege level of a login account differently on the RADIUS server s and the Switch the user is assigned a privilege level from the database RADIUS or local the Switch uses first for user authentication 25 2 5 Tunnel Protocol Attribute You can configure tunnel protocol attributes on the RADIUS server refer to your
102. section to configure authorization settings on the Switch XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 25 AAA Table 68 Advanced Application gt AAA gt AAA Setup continued Update Period LABEL DESCRIPTION Type Set whether the Switch provides the following services to a user Exec Allow an administrator which logs in the Switch through Telnet or SSH to have different access privilege level assigned via the external server e Dotlx Allow an IEEE 802 1x client to have different bandwidth limit or VLAN ID assigned via the external server Active Select this to activate authorization for a specified event types Method Select whether you want to use RADIUS or TACACS for authorization of specific types of events RADIUS is the only method for IEEE 802 1x authorization Accounting Use this section to configure accounting settings on the Switch This is the amount of time in minutes before the Switch sends an update to the accounting server This is only valid if you select the start stop option for the Exec or Dot1x entries Type The Switch supports the following types of events to be sent to the accounting server s System Configure the Switch to send information when the following system events occur system boots up system shuts down system accounting is enabled system accounting Is disabled Exec Configure the Switch to send information when an administrator logs in and logs out via the con
103. see the message Press any key to enter Debug Mode within 3 seconds press any key to enter debug mode 4 Type atic after the Enter Debug Mode message 5 Wait for the Starting XMODEM upload message before activating XMODEM upload on your terminal 6 After a configuration file upload type atgo to restart the Switch Figure 19 Resetting the Switch Via the Console Port ZyNOS Version V3 90 BBC 0 b1 04 28 2009 09 20 42 Bootbase Version V1 00 10 22 2007 12 48 50 RAM Size 128 Mbytes DRAM POST Testing 131072K OK DRAM Test SUCCESS FLASH Intel 64M ZyNOS Version V3 90 BBC 0 b1 04 28 2009 09 20 42 Press any key to enter debug mode within 3 seconds Enter Debug Mode ras atlc Starting XMODEM upload CRC mode CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC Total 393216 bytes received Erasing ras atgo The Switch is now reinitialized with a default configuration file including the default password of 1234 XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 4 The Web Configurator 4 7 Logging Out of the Web Configurator Click Logout in a screen to exit the web configurator You have to log in with your password again after you log out This is recommended after you finish a management session for security reasons Figure 20 Web Configurator Logout Screen Thank you for using the Web Configurator Please close the browser before next login Goodbye 4 8 Help The web configurator s online h
104. that only one path exists between any two stations on the network Loop Guard Use the loop guard feature to protect against network loops on the edge of your network IP Source Guard Use IP source guard to filter unauthorized DHCP and ARP packets in your network Link Aggregation Link aggregation trunking is the grouping of physical ports into one logical higher capacity link You may want to trunk ports if for example it is cheaper to use multiple lower speed links than to under utilize a high speed but more costly single port link Port Authentication and Security For security the Switch allows authentication using IEEE 802 1x with an external RADIUS server and port security that allows only packets with dynamically learned MAC addresses and or configured static MAC addresses to pass through a port on the Switch Authentication and Accounting The Switch supports authentication and accounting services via RADIUS and TACACS AAA servers Device Management Use the web configurator or commands to easily configure the rich range of features on the Switch Port Cloning Use the port cloning feature to copy the settings you configure on one port to another port or ports Syslog The Switch can generate syslog messages and send it to a syslog server XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 50 Product Specifications Table 148 Firmware Specifications FEATURE DESCRIPTION
105. the MAC table is used MacTableFullEventClear 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 46 3 This trap is sent when less than 1 2 2 9596 of the MAC table is used rmon RmonRisingAlarm 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 1 1 16 This trap is sent when a variable 0 1 goes over the RMON rising threshold RmonFallingAlarm 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 1 1 16 This trap is sent when the 0 2 variable falls below the RMON falling threshold cfm dotlagCfmFaultAlarm 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 0 1 The trap is sent when the Switch detects a connectivity fault XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 40 Access Control 40 3 4 Configuring SNMP From the Access Control screen display the SNMP screen You can click Access Control to go back to the Access Control screen Figure 205 Management gt Access Control gt SNMP SNMP Access Control Trap Group General Setting Version v2c m Get Community public Set Community public Trap Community public Trap Destination Version IP Port Username vec 0 0 0 0 162 vec v o 0 0 0 162 vec 0 0 0 0 162 vec gt o 0 0 0 162 User Information Index Username Security Level Authentication Privacy 1 admin noauth j MD5 v DES z Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 129 Management gt Access Control gt SNMP LABEL DESCRIPTION General Setting Use this section to specify the SNMP version and community password values Version Select the SNMP version for
106. the Rebooting checkbox if you want to reboot the Switch and apply the new firmware immediately Firmware upgrades are only applied after a reboot Click Upgrade to load the new firmware After the firmware upgrade process is complete see the System I nfo screen to verify your current firmware version number 39 6 Restore a Configuration File Restore a previously saved configuration from your computer to the Switch using the Restore Configuration screen Figure 201 Management gt Maintenance gt Restore Configuration Restore Configuration g Maintenance To restore the device s configuration form a file browse to the location ofthe configuration file and click Restore button File Path Browse Restore Type the path and file name of the configuration file you wish to restore in the File Path text box or click Browse to display the Choose File screen from which you can locate it After you have specified the file click Restore config is the name of the configuration file on the Switch so your backup configuration file is automatically renamed when you restore using this screen 332 XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 39 Maintenance 39 7 Backup a Configuration File Backing up your Switch configurations allows you to create various snapshots of your device from which you may restore at a later date Back up your current Switch configuration to a computer using the Backup Configuration screen
107. the Switch adds in the outer VLAN tag of the frames sent on the tunnel port s The Switch also uses this to check if the received frames are double tagged The value of this field is 0x8100 as defined in IEEE 802 1Q If the Switch needs to communicate with other vendors devices they should use the same TPID Note You can define up to four different tunnel TPIDs including 8100 in this screen at a time Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 23 4 1 Port based Q in Q Port based Q in Q lets the Switch treat all frames received on the same port as the same VLAN flows and add the same outer VLAN tag to them even they have different customer VLAN IDs XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 23 VLAN Stacking 23 4 2 Click Port based QinQ in the Advanced Application VLAN Stacking screen to display the screen as shown Figure 100 Advanced Application gt VLAN Stacking gt Port based QinQ Port OO A On AR No ED Port based Qing VLAN Stackin SPVID he s 2 dedi lisdislshicl als al Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 57
108. the configuration permanently XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials 9 Connect your DHCP server to port 5 and a computer as DHCP client to either port 6 or 7 The computer should be able to get an IP address from the DHCP server If you put the DHCP server on port 6 or 7 the computer will not able to get an IP address 10 To check if DHCP snooping works go to Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard you should see an IP assignment with the type dhcp snooping as shown Figure 30 Tutorial Check the Binding If DHCP Snooping Works IP Source Guard J Static Binding DHCP Snooping ARP Inspection index MAC Address IP Address Lease Type VID Port 00 02 00 00 00 1c 10 10 1 16 Bd23hi7m 0s dhcp snooping 100 You can also telnet or log into the Switch s console Use the command show dhcp snooping binding to see the DHCP snooping binding table as shown next sysname show dhcp snooping binding MacAddress IpAddress Lease Type VLAN Port 00 02 00 00 00 1c 10 10 1 16 6d23h59m20s dhcp snooping 100 7 Total number of bindings 1 6 2 How to Use DHCP Relay on the Switch This tutorial describes how to configure your Switch to forward DHCP client requests to a specific DHCP server The DHCP server can then assign a specific IP address based on the information in the DHCP requests 6 2 1 DHCP Relay Tutorial Introduction In this example you have configured your DHCP server 192 168 2 3 and w
109. the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this checkbox to permit 802 1x authentication on this port You must first allow 802 1x authentication on the Switch before configuring it on each port Reauthenticati Specify if a subscriber has to periodically re enter his or her username on and password to stay connected to the port Reauthenticati Specify the length of time required to pass before a client has to re enter on Timer his or her username and password to stay connected to the port XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 18 Port Authentication Table 42 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication gt 802 1x continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 18 2 2 Activate MAC Authentication Use this screen to activate MAC authentication In the Port Authentication screen click MAC Authentication to display the configuration screen as shown Figure 88 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication gt MAC Authentication ED MAC Authentication ng Port Authentication Active D Name Prefix Password zyxel Timeout 0 Port Active 1 1 C 2 Li 3 Dr 4 r 5 C B m ee ee wm Apply
110. the same link within the trunk By default the Switch uses the src dst mac distribution type If the Switch is behind a router the packet s destination or source MAC address will be changed In this case set the Switch to distribute traffic based on its IP address to make sure port trunking can work properly Select src mac to distribute traffic based on the packet s source MAC address Select dst mac to distribute traffic based on the packet s destination MAC address Select src dst mac to distribute traffic based on a combination of the packet s source and destination MAC addresses Select src ip to distribute traffic based on the packet s source IP address Select dst ip to distribute traffic based on the packet s destination IP address Select src dst ip to distribute traffic based on a combination of the packet s source and destination IP addresses Port This field displays the port number Group Select the trunk group to which a port belongs Note When you enable the port security feature on the Switch and configure port security settings for a port you cannot include the port in an active trunk group Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to
111. to load configuration one Config 1 or configuration two Config 2 when you reboot Follow the steps below to reboot the Switch 1 Inthe Maintenance screen click the Config 1 button next to Reboot System to reboot and load configuration one The following screen displays Figure 199 Reboot System Confirmation Microsoft Internet Explorer X 2 Are you sure you want to reboot system i Cancel 2 Click OK again and then wait for the Switch to restart This takes up to two minutes This does not affect the Switch s configuration Click Config 2 and follow steps 1 to 2 to reboot and load configuration two on the Switch 39 5 Firmware Upgrade Make sure you have downloaded and unzipped the correct model firmware and version to your computer before uploading to the device Be sure to upload the correct model firmware as uploading the wrong model firmware may damage your device XGS 4728F User s Guide 331 Chapter 39 Maintenance From the Maintenance screen display the Firmware Upgrade screen as shown next Figure 200 Management Maintenance Firmware Upgrade Firmware Upgrade Maintenance To upgrade the internal switch firmware browse the location of the binary BIN file and click Upgrade button File Path Browse Rebooting Upgrade Type the path and file name of the firmware file you wish to upload to the Switch in the File Path text box or click Browse to locate it Select
112. with the VLAN Address identification number to which the MAC address belongs VID This field displays the VLAN group identification number Delete Check the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete column and then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to clear the selected checkbox es in the Delete column XGS 4728F User s Guide Spanning Tree Protocol The Switch supports Spanning Tree Protocol STP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP and Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP as defined in the following standards EEE 802 1D Spanning Tree Protocol EEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol EEE 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol The Switch also allows you to set up multiple STP configurations or trees Ports can then be assigned to the trees 13 14 STP RSTP Overview R STP detects and breaks network loops and provides backup links between switches bridges or routers It allows a Switch to interact with other R STP compliant switches in your network to ensure that only one path exists between any two stations on the network The Switch uses IEEE 802 1w RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol that allows faster convergence of the spanning tree than STP while also being backwards compatible with STP only aware bridges In RSTP topology change information is directly propagated throughout the network from the device that generates the topology change In STP a longer delay is required as
113. you have an unusual network topology Both RIP 2B and RIP 2M send the routing data in RIP 2 format the difference being that RIP 2B uses subnet broadcasting while RIP 2M uses multicasting 32 2 Configuring RIP Click IP Application gt RIP in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown You cannot manually configure a new entry Each entry in the table is XGS 4728F User s Guide 275 Chapter 32 RIP automatically created when you configure a new IP domain in the IP Setup screen refer to Section 8 6 on page 86 Figure 147 P Application gt RIP Active Index 1 au r Network Direction Version 192 168 1 1 24 None E RIP 1 gt Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 92 IP Application RIP LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to enable RIP on the Switch Index This field displays the index number of an IP interface Network This field displays the IP interface configured on the Switch Refer to the section on IP Setup for more information on configuring IP domains Directio n Version Select the RIP direction from the drop down list box Choices are Outgoing Incoming Both and None Select the RIP version from the drop down list box Choices are RIP 1 RI P 2B and RI P 2M Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is tu
114. 0Mbpsl 1000M for 1000 Mbps and 10G for 10 Gbps and the duplex F for full duplex or H for half duplex It also shows the cable type Copper or Fiber XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 7 System Status and Port Statistics Table8 Status Port Details continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Status If STP Spanning Tree Protocol is enabled this field displays the STP state of the port see Section 13 1 3 on page 127 for more information If STP is disabled this field displays FORWARDING if the link is up otherwise it displays STOP LACP This field shows if LACP is enabled on this port or not TxPkts This field shows the number of transmitted frames on this port RxPkts This field shows the number of received frames on this port Errors This field shows the number of received errors on this port Tx KB s This field shows the transmission speed of data sent on this port in kilobytes per second Rx KB s This field shows the transmission speed of data received on this port in kilobytes per second Up Time This field shows the total amount of time the connection has been up Tx Packet The following fields display detailed information about packets transmitted TX Packets This field shows the number of good packets unicast multicast and broadcast transmitted Multicast This field shows the number of good multicast packets transmitted Broadcast This field shows the number of g
115. 100 IP Application gt OSPF Configuration gt Redistribute continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Type Select 1 for routing protocols such as RIP whose external metrics are directly comparable to the internal OSPF cost When selecting a path the internal OSPF cost is added to the AB boundary router to the external metrics Select 2 for routing protocols whose external metrics are not comparable to the OSPF cost In this case the external cost of the AB boundary router is used in path decision to a destination Metric Value Enter a route cost between 0 and 16777214 The default metric value is 15 Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Summary Enter a network IP address which can cover more than one network in address order to reduce the routing table size For example you can use 192 168 8 0 22 instead of using 192 168 8 0 24 192 168 9 0 24 192 168 10 0 24 and 192 168 11 0 24 The third octet of these four network IP addresses is 00001000 00001001 00001010 00001011 respectively The first 6 digits 000010 are the common part among these IP addresses So 192 168 8 0 22 can represent all of these networks Subnet Ente
116. 11 SNMPv2 MIB for IP RFC 2012 SNMPv2 MIB for TCP RFC 2013 SNMPv2 MIB for UDP XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 40 Access Control 40 3 3 Table 124 SNMP Traps The Switch sends traps to an SNMP manager when an event occurs The following tables outline the SNMP traps by category An OID Object ID that begins with 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 is defined in private MI Bs Otherwise it is a standard MIB OID The OIDs beginning with 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 46 are specific to the XGS 4728F switch SNMP System Traps OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION coldstart coldStart 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 1 This trap is sent when the Switch is turned on warmstart warmsStart 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 2 This trap is sent when the Switch restarts fanspeed FanSpeedEventOn 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 46 3 E N Ww HO This trap is sent when the fan speed goes above or below the normal operating range FanSpeedEventClear 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 46 3 NJ UJ NO This trap is sent when the fan speed returns to the normal operating range temperatur e TemperatureEventOn 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 46 3 N w e O This trap is sent when the temperature goes above or below the normal operating range TemperatureEventClear H Nw NO p co te e m e 9 A eo w This trap is sent when the temperature returns to the normal operating range voltage VoltageEventOn H Nw HO
117. 2 example 185 overview 179 rules 179 180 viewing 183 policy configuration 184 Port Aggregation Protocol see PAgP port authentication 163 and RADIUS 217 EEE802 1x 166 167 219 MAC authentication 164 port based I GMP 293 port based VLAN type 84 port cloning 383 384 advanced settings 383 384 basic settings 383 384 port details 73 port isolation 113 port mirroring 151 152 398 direction 152 egress 152 ingress 152 port redundancy 154 port security 169 address learning 171 limit MAC address learning 171 MAC address learning 169 overview 169 setup 170 257 265 port setup 89 port status 71 port VLAN trunking 97 XGS 4728F User s Guide Index port based VLAN 110 all connected 113 port isolation 113 settings wizard 113 ports standby 154 diagnostics 358 mirroring 151 speed duplex 90 power voltage 79 power module current rating 40 power wire 40 power specification 393 power status 79 power wires 40 priority level 85 priority and OSPF 279 priority queue assignment 85 private VLAN 267 configuration 268 isolated port 267 overview 267 promiscuous port 267 product registration 411 protocol based VLAN 106 and IEEE 802 1Q tagging 106 example 109 hexadecimal notation for protocols 105 108 isolate traffic 106 priority 105 108 PVI D 96 103 PVID Priority Frame 96 Q QoS 398 and classifier 173 queue weight 188 queuing 187 SPQ 188 WFQ 188 WRR 188 queuing method 187 190 R RADIUS 216
118. 2 Queuing Method 22 2 Configuring Queuing Click Advanced Application gt Queuing Method in the navigation panel Figure 97 Advanced Application Queuing Method Queuing Method NN Weight Hybrid SPQ Port Method Q0 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Lowest Queue spa 1 C wra p s 4 5 6 7 8 None C WRR spa 2 C WFO h p 3 4 5 6 7 8 None C WRR spa 3 C WFO h n s 4 5 6 7 8 None C WRR amp spa 4 C WFO f 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 None C WRR spa 5 C wra f 2 B 4 5 6 7 8 None C WRR SPA 6 C wra f n 3 4 5 6 7 8 None C WRR spa 7 C wraQ p 3 4 5 6 7 8 None C WRR Eo AMT uo a o x SEIT WRR Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 52 Advanced Application gt Queuing Method LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This label shows the port you are configuring i Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 22 Queuing Method Table 52 Advanced Application Queuing Method continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Method Select SPQ Strictly Priority Queuing WFQ Weighted Fair Queuing or WRR Weighted Round Robin Strictly Priority services queues based on pri
119. 2 Viewing dg AIIP TOO siriasi eina Edom ribera OE sta xd Eaa RARE 380 Chapter 47 Routing Table Y AX O E C X A M O a 381 CERE T 381 47 2 Vienna the Routing Table SIUS auos ende rond cosi E rua dread 381 Chapter 48 Configure CONE 383 40 1 Comoe GONE amman N 383 XGS 4728F User s Guide 2 Table of Contents Part VI Troubleshooting amp Product Specifications 385 Chapter 49 Bc pere itte MITT RR 387 49 1 Power Hardware Connections and LEDS rre nete nata ke nha ahh nnd agen nias 387 282 SW Access and LOGIN ucc awiie cores chav REo Pai bpex niet t apace eae tU ur Td tB Reais 388 H2 witch Cong sus echa npn pop addo a a c ERR aaa Ga e peape Ea gd agp Ra 391 Chapter 50 LEis e Ope MICANON T 393 Part VII Appendices and Index eeeeeeeeee 403 Appendix A Common SS VIBOS rerasan e HM MM oL R DUd pbud tb bod ub QU Ad Vir eae 405 Appendix B Legal norme iuosesrnidepe ie Ue rep EbEaId bleib rte os Dad db dt bei ta pU EO rb Rmi nM 409 j e x ita secrccnad E E A E veut 413 22 XGS 4728F User s Guide PART I Introduction Getting to Know Your Switch 25 Hardware Installation and Connection 31 Hardware Overview 35 Getting
120. 28F 6 Click the Save link in the upper right corner of the web configurator to save your configuration permanently 7 The DHCP server can then assign a specific IP address based on the DHCP request 6 2 4 Troubleshooting Check the client A s IP address If it did not receive the IP address 172 16 1 18 make sure 1 Client A is connected to the Switch s port 2 in VLAN 102 2 You configured the correct VLAN ID port number and system name for DHCP relay on both the DHCP server and the Switch XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials 3 You clicked the Save link on the Switch to have your settings take effect XGS 4728F User s Guide System Status and Port Statistics This chapter describes the system status web configurator home page and port details screens 7 1 Overview The home screen of the web configurator displays a port statistical summary with links to each port showing statistical details 7 2 Port Status Summary To view the port statistics click Status in all web configurator screens to display the Status screen as shown next Figure 37 Status e ED Por Status Port Name Link State LACP TxPkts RxPkts Errors TxXKB s RxKB s Up Time 1 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 2 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 3 100M F Copper FORWARDING Disabled 0 79 D 0 0 0 594 0 03 54 4 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 5 STOP 0 00 l c o eo Any Clear Counter P
121. 41 MST region 129 network example 128 path cost 142 port priority 142 revision level 141 MSTP Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol 125 MTU Multi Tenant Unit 82 multicast 199 802 1 priority 201 and IGMP 199 IGMP throttling 203 IP addresses 199 overview 199 setup 201 multicast delivery tree 296 multicast group 205 XGS 4728F User s Guide 417 Index multicast router mrouter 296 multicast VLAN 211 Multiple Spanning Tree Instance See MSTI 128 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol 127 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol See MSTP 125 Multiple STP 127 Multiple STP see MSTP 128 MVR 207 configuration 209 group configuration 211 network example 207 MVR Multicast VLAN Registration 207 N network management system NMS 338 NTP RFC 1305 81 O OSPF 277 advantages 277 area 277 283 Area 0 277 area ID 283 authentication 283 284 autonomous system 277 backbone 277 configuration steps 279 general settings 282 how it works 278 interface 278 280 286 link state database 278 280 network example 278 priority 279 redistribute route 285 route cost 284 router elections 279 router ID 282 router types 278 status 280 stub area 277 284 virtual link 279 virtual links 288 vs RIP 277 OSPF Open Shortest Path First 277 OSPF redistribution 285 P PAGP 266 password 51 administrator 348 PHB Per Hop Behavior 299 ping test connection 358 policy 182 184 and classifier 182 and DiffServ 179 configuration 18
122. 46 received OK 262144 bytes sent in 0 63Seconds 415 44Kbytes sec The following table explains some of the FTP parameters Table 140 FTP Upload to Cluster Member Example FTP PARAMETER DESCRIPTION User Enter admin Password The web configurator password default is 1234 ls Enter this command to list the name of cluster member switch s firmware and configuration file 3701t0 bin This is the name of the firmware file you want to upload to the cluster member switch fw 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 This is the cluster member switch s firmware name as seen in the cluster manager switch config 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 This is the cluster member switch s configuration file name as seen in the cluster manager switch XGS 4728F User s Guide 367 Chapter 43 Cluster Management 43 3 Clustering Management Configuration Use this screen to configure clustering management Click Configuration from the Cluster Management screen to display the next screen Figure 224 Management Clustering Management Configuration DISS oir ile ene Status Clustering Manager Active Iv Name Master VID 1 Apply Cancel Clustering Candidate 00 13 49 00 00 01 ES 2108 G ES 2108 G 00 13 49 00 00 02 GS 3012 GS 3012 List Password Add Cancel Refresh Index MacAddr Name Model Remove 1 00 13 49 ae fb 7a ES 2024PWR ES 2024PWR G The following table descri
123. 8F User s Guide 117 Chapter 10 Static MAC Forward Setup XGS 4728F User s Guide Static Multicast Forward Setup Use these screens to configure static multicast address forwarding 11 1 Static Multicast Forwarding Overview A multicast MAC address is the MAC address of a member of a multicast group A static multicast address is a multicast MAC address that has been manually entered in the multicast table Static multicast addresses do not age out Static multicast forwarding allows you the administrator to forward multicast frames to a member without the member having to join the group first If a multicast group has no members then the switch will either flood the multicast frames to all ports or drop them You can configure this in the Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting screen see Section 24 3 on page 201 Figure 58 shows such unknown multicast frames flooded to all ports With static multicast forwarding you can forward these multicasts to port s within a VLAN group Figure 59 shows frames being forwarded to devices XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 11 Static Multicast Forward Setup connected to port 3 Figure 60 shows frames being forwarded to ports 2 and 3 within VLAN group 4 Figure 58 No Static Multicast Forwarding Figure 59 Static Multicast Forwarding to A Single Port 11 2 Configuring Static Multicast Forwarding Use this screen to configure rules to forward specif
124. 94 as the port VLAN ID GVRP Select this check box to allow GVRP on this port Acceptable Specify the type of frames allowed on a port Choices are All and Tag Frame Type Only Select All from the drop down list box to accept all untagged or tagged frames on this port This is the default setting Select Tag Only to accept only tagged frames on this port All untagged frames will be dropped VLAN Trunking Enable VLAN Trunking on ports connected to other switches or routers but not ports directly connected to end users to allow frames belonging to unknown VLAN groups to pass through the Switch Isolation Select this to allows this port to communicate only with the CPU management port and the ports on which the isolation feature is not enabled Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 9 6 Subnet Based VLANs Subnet based VLANs allow you to group traffic into logical VLANs based on the source IP subnet you specify When a frame is received on a port the Switch checks if a tag is added already and the IP subnet it came from The untagged XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN packets from the same IP subnet
125. AN applies to un tagged packets and is applicable only when you use IEEE 802 1Q tagged VLAN Figure 51 Advanced Application VLAN VLAN Port Setting Subnet Based Subnet Based VLAN J Vlan Port Setting Active Ci DHCP Vlan Override r1 Apply Active O Name IP Mask Bits VID Priority Add Cancel Index Active Name IP Mask Bits VID Priority Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 19 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting gt Subnet Based VLAN Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Check this box to activate this subnet based VLANs on the Switch DHCP Vlan When DHCP snooping is enabled DHCP clients can renew their IP address Override through the DHCP VLAN or via another DHCP server on the subnet based VLAN Select this checkbox to force the DHCP clients in this IP subnet to obtain their IP addresses through the DHCP VLAN Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Active Check this box to activate the IP subnet VLAN you are creating or editing Name Enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters to identify this subnet based VLAN IP Enter the IP address of the subnet for which you want to configure this subnet based
126. Advanced Application gt VLAN Stacking gt Port based QinQ LABEL DESCRIPTION Port The port number identifies the port you are configuring SPVID SPVID is the service provider s VLAN ID the outer VLAN tag Enter the service provider ID from 1 to 4094 for frames received on this port See Chapter 9 on page 95 for more background information on VLAN ID Priority Select a priority level from O to 7 This is the service provider s priority level that adds to the frames received on this port 0 is the lowest priority level and 7 is the highest Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Selective Q in Q Selective Q in Q is VLAN based It allows the Switch to add different outer VLAN tags to the incoming frames received on one port according to their inner VLAN tags Note Selective Q in Q rules are only applied to single tagged frames received on the access ports If the incoming frames are untagged or single tagged but received on a tunnel port or cannot match any selective Q in Q rules the Switch applies the port based Q in Q rules to them XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 23 VLAN Stacking Click Selective QinQ in the Adva
127. BPDUs are received and processed Information frames are submitted to the learning process but not forwarded Forwarding All BPDUs are received and processed All information frames are received and forwarded Multiple RSTP MRSTP Multiple RSTP is ZyXEL s proprietary feature that is compatible with RSTP and STP With MRSTP you can have more than one spanning tree on your Switch and assign port s to each tree Each spanning tree operates independently with its own bridge information In the following example there are two RSTP instances MRSTP 1 and MRSTP2 on switch A Figure 63 MRSTP Network Example To set up MRSTP activate MRSTP on the Switch and specify which port s belong to which spanning tree XGS 4728F User s Guide 127 Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol 13 1 5 13 1 5 1 Note Each port can belong to one STP tree only Multiple STP Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1s is backwards compatible with STP RSTP and addresses the limitations of existing spanning tree protocols STP and RSTP in networks to include the following features One Common and Internal Spanning Tree CIST that represents the entire network s connectivity Grouping of multiple bridges or switching devices into regions that appear as one single bridge on the network A VLAN can be mapped to a specific Multiple Spanning Tree Instance MSTI MSTI allows multiple VLANs to use the same spanning tree
128. CLINE packet and the source MAC address and source port do not match any of the current bindings The rate at which DHCP packets arrive is too high 26 1 1 2 DHCP Snooping Database The Switch stores the binding table in volatile memory If the Switch restarts it loads static bindings from permanent memory but loses the dynamic bindings in which case the devices in the network have to send DHCP requests again As a result it is recommended you configure the DHCP snooping database The DHCP snooping database maintains the dynamic bindings for DHCP snooping and ARP inspection in a file on an external TFTP server If you set up the DHCP snooping database the Switch can reload the dynamic bindings from the DHCP snooping database after the Switch restarts 232 XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 26 IP Source Guard You can configure the name and location of the file on the external TFTP server The file has the following format Figure 119 DHCP Snooping Database File Format initial checksum TYPE DHCP SNOOPING VERSION 1 BEGIN binding 1 checksum 1 binding 2 lt checksum 1 2 gt lt binding n gt checksum 1 2 n END The lt initial checksum gt helps distinguish between the bindings in the latest update and the bindings from previous updates Each binding consists of 72 bytes a space and another checksum that is used to validate the binding when it is read If the ca
129. Delete To delete a multicast VLAN s select the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete column then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 24 Multicast 24 8 MVR Group Configuration All source ports and receiver ports belonging to a multicast group can receive multicast data sent to this multicast group Configure MVR IP multicast group address es in the Group Configuration screen Click Group Configuration in the MVR screen Note A port can belong to more than one multicast VLAN However IP multicast group addresses in different multicast VLANs cannot overlap Figure 109 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR Group Configuration OFT AVR Multicast VLAN ID Name Start Address End Address 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Add Cancel MVLAN Name Start Address End Address Delete All Delete Group Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 64 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR Group Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Multicast Select a multicast VLAN ID that you configured in the MVR screen from VLAN ID the drop down list box Name Enter a descriptive name for identification purposes Start Enter the starting IP multicast address of the multicast group in dotted Address decimal notation Refer to Section 24 1 1 on page 199 fo
130. E Access 9 O Ci E i Li Access 10 LH Ci E Li E ri Access z 11 C O O E LE C Access 12 n D D C r rH Access Ce m Jp Ww Ww np I c PNE erm wg Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 89 Advanced Application gt Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this to enable layer 2 protocol tunneling on the Switch Destination Specify an MAC address with which the Switch uses to encapsulate the MAC Address layer 2 protocol packets by replacing the destination MAC address in the packets Note The MAC address can be either a unicast MAC address or multicast MAC address If you use a unicast MAC address make sure the MAC address does not exist in the address table of a switch on the service provider s network Note All the edge switches in the service provider s network should be set to use the same MAC address for encapsulation Port This field displays the port number XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 29 Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling Table 89 Advanced Application gt Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Use this row to make the setting the same for all ports Use this row first and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them CDP Select this option to have the Switch tunnel CDP Cisco Discov
131. EL DESCRIPTION Active Select this checkbox to enable VLAN stacking on the Switch Port The port number identifies the port you are configuring Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Role Select Normal to have the Switch ignore frames received or transmitted on this port with VLAN stacking tags Anything you configure in SPVID and Priority of the Port based QinQ or the Selective QinQ screen are ignored Select Access Port to have the Switch add the SP TPID tag to all incoming frames received on this port Select Access Port for ingress ports at the edge of the service provider s network Select Tunnel Port available for Gigabit ports only for egress ports at the edge of the service provider s network Select Tunnel Port to have the Switch add the Tunnel TPID tag to all outgoing frames sent on this port In order to support VLAN stacking on a port the port must be able to allow frames of 1526 Bytes 1522 Bytes 4 Bytes for the second tag to pass through it Tunnel TPID is a standard Ethernet type code identifying the frame and indicates TPID whether the frame carries IEEE 802 1Q tag information Enter a four digit hexadecimal number from 0000 to FFFF that
132. F User s Guide Chapter 7 System Status and Port Statistics Table8 Status Port Details continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Error Packet The following fields display detailed information about packets received that were in error RX CRC This field shows the number of packets received with CRC Cyclic Redundant Check error s Length This field shows the number of packets received with a length that was out of range Runt This field shows the number of packets received that were too short shorter than 64 octets including the ones with CRC errors Distribution 64 This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received that were 64 octets in length 65 127 This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received that were between 65 and 127 octets in length 128 255 This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received that were between 128 and 255 octets in length 256 511 This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received that were between 256 and 511 octets in length 512 1023 This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in length 1024 This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received 1518 that were between 1024 and 1518 octets in length Giant This field shows the number of packets dropped because they were bigger than the maximum frame
133. ION VID This field displays the VLAN ID of each VLAN in the range specified above Received This field displays the total number of ARP packets received from the VLAN since the Switch last restarted Request This field displays the total number of ARP Request packets received from the VLAN since the Switch last restarted Reply This field displays the total number of ARP Reply packets received from the VLAN since the Switch last restarted Forwarded This field displays the total number of ARP packets the Switch forwarded for the VLAN since the Switch last restarted Dropped This field displays the total number of ARP packets the Switch discarded for the VLAN since the Switch last restarted 26 6 2 ARP Inspection Log Status Use this screen to look at log messages that were generated by ARP packets and that have not been sent to the syslog server yet To open this screen click Advanced Application IP Source Guard ARP Inspection Log Status Figure 129 ARP Inspection Log Status Total number of logs 0 Index Port VID ARP Inspection Log Status Status Clearing log status table Sender Mac Apply Sender IP NumPkts Reason Time The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 82 ARP Inspection Log Status LABEL Clearing log status table DESCRIPTION Click Apply to remove all the log messages that were generated by ARP packets and that have not been sent to the syslog serve
134. Igle uocat sondage vies MAUI BE NRI QUUM Lp P ea 191 20 4 VLAN Siackhng POT ROES acadridialtsos d ead N od Prod Rabe ad nf a D a 192 BJ 3 VLAM TOS FAIL usce tad DoD La Erico aestus XR AE ERE Fas eccle DO a ESSE Lab dni Enc 193 29 30 SC dispo e 193 224 GComiguriag VLAN SACKING assxtxrebtrxboaderiasrciei a pep dae rtg aoc Da bon doa caf 194 m NE uDect RR EE 195 x Et e Rl aq Soe ccite ued ccccisabin Ea ocd caeven ey a T N 196 Chapter 24 Multicast sasesiesncsassaarsianneisetsassacnanadaasansasaaieanaasesansmaidisadsaneinestassasnanaansAsdessereinandaiansasrduddaanassaianie 199 20 T MURGAS CIVEM anipun ase ian aasa aai N aS aaa OSE NS TaS 199 OWNED m M 199 e MP PANG uacositientbadqe pide cn Debes aen pr tr te OI RM ER SR TEE Rhe 199 zweier especie m E 200 Zacka IGMP Snooping and ELI 5 cosnisce snes dears cadeaatunegectecnsetteasnantegd ubedeanpeauannnee Ear 200 eaea D iee aas te T le coe ep TN 200 A MRC ORRO eena e 201 dtu Spoo RNE SLAN Ariinae aa ae 203 245 OMP Fiering RGN sirere a a Cou 205 PO NN uie ui siroma oona E E a 207 245 1 Types or MVR PONS siri A bien qnaa doas eai a n c pa vas aed dade 207 zac NE MESE oues actos cai ec papier QUUM Lec db ddlepM erc d M QUEM DM UU MO 208 2405 3 How MVP WOKS aux tescconc deccm Force pur escono toes er ecccc en ped LE E esae cde pen ee eRUE 208 24 7 Genedl MYR COnMOUIAUON TE oL caatiugiatees 209 248 MYR Grop CSgcurdiiafi xisuxdueisosunet t pape
135. LAN screen select a scri WAS ACTI VE enter a descriptive name ACTIVE 2 in the Name field and enter 2 in Sonos VLAN Group ID 2 the VLAN Group ID field for the VLAN2 network Port Control Tagging 3 c Nd C Fixed C Forbidden iv eosin 4 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M Tx Tagging 5 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M TxTagging 6 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden 7 Normal C Fixed Forbidden 8 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden Note The VLAN Group ID field in this screen and the VID field in the IP Setup screen refer to the same VLAN ID XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 5 Initial Setup Example 3 Since the VLAN2 network is connected to port 1 on the Switch select Fixed to configure port 1 to be a permanent member of the VLAN only To ensure that VLAN unaware devices such as computers and hubs can receive frames properly clear the TX Tagging check box to set the Switch to remove VLAN tags before sending Click Add to save the settings to the run time memory Settings in the run time memory are lost when the Switch s power is turned off 5 1 4 Setting Port VID Use PVID to add a tag to incoming untagged frames received on that port so that the frames are forwarded to the VLAN group that the tag defines In the example network configure 2 as the port VID on port 1 so that any untagged frames received on that port get sent to VLAN 2 Figure 23 Initial Setup Network Example Port VID N gt Internet WY
136. Management Protocol Version 3 RFC 3414 User based Security Model USM for version 3 of the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP v3 RFC 3580 RADIUS Tunnel Protocol Attribute IEEE 802 1ab Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP IEEE 802 1ag Connectivity Fault Management CFM IEEE 802 1x Port Based Network Access Control IEEE 802 1D MAC Bridges IEEE 802 1p Traffic Types Packet Priority IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP IEEE 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP IEEE 802 3 Packet Format IEEE 802 3ad Link Aggregation IEEE 802 3ah Ethernet OAM Operations Administration and Maintenance XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 50 Product Specifications Table 150 Standards Supported continued STANDARD DESCRIPTION IEEE 802 3x Flow Control IEEE 802 3z 1000BASE X For optical fiber link 1000BASE SX LX XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 50 Product Specifications XGS 4728F User s Guide PART VII Appendices and Index Common Services The following table lists some commonly used services and their associated protocols and port numbers For a comprehensive list of port numbers ICMP type code numbers and services visit the IANA Internet Assigned Number Authority web site Name This is a short descriptive name for the service You can use this one or create a different one if you like Protocol This is the typ
137. N IP Subnet Enter the subnet mask for this destination Mask Gateway IP Enter the IP address of the gateway The gateway is an immediate Address neighbor of your Switch that will forward the packet to the destination The gateway must be a router on the same segment as your Switch Metric The metric represents the cost of transmission for routing purposes IP routing uses hop count as the measurement of cost with a minimum of 1 for directly connected networks Enter a number that approximates the cost for this link The number need not be precise but it must be between 1 and 15 In practice 2 or 3 is usually a good number Add Click Add to insert a new static route to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Clear Click Clear to set the above fields back to the factory defaults Index This field displays the index number of the route Click a number to edit the static route entry Active This field displays Yes when the static route is activated and NO when it is deactivated Name This field displays the descriptive name for this route This is for identification purposes only Destination This field displays the IP network address of the final destination Address Subnet Mask Thi
138. P InterfaceTraps OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION linkup linkUp 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 4 This trap is sent when the Ethernet link is up LinkDownEventClear 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 46 31 This trap is sent when the 2 2 Ethernet link is up linkdown linkDown 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 3 This trap is sent when the Ethernet link is down LinkDownEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 46 31 This trap is sent when the 2 1 Ethernet link is down autonegotiati AutonegotiationFailedEven 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 46 31 This trap is sent when an on tOn 2 1 Ethernet interface fails to auto negotiate with the peer Ethernet interface AutonegotiationFailedEven 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 46 31 This trap is sent when an tClear 2 2 Ethernet interface auto negotiates with the peer Ethernet interface Ildp Ildp 1 0 8802 1 1 2 0 0 1 The trap is sent when entries in the remote database have any updates Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP defined as IEEE 802 1ab enables LAN devices that support LLDP to exchange their configured settings This helps eliminate configuration mismatch issues XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 40 Access Control Table 125 SNMP InterfaceTraps continued DDMI TemperatureEventO n DDMITxBiasEventOn DDMI TxPowerEventOn DDMI VoltageEventOn OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION transceiver DDMI RxPowerEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 46 31 This trap is sent when one o
139. P Works After a bridge determines the lowest cost spanning tree with STP it enables the root port and the ports that are the designated ports for connected LANs and disables all other ports that participate in STP Network packets are therefore only forwarded between enabled ports eliminating any possible network loops STP aware switches exchange Bridge Protocol Data Units BPDUs periodically When the bridged LAN topology changes a new spanning tree is constructed Once a stable network topology has been established all bridges listen for Hello BPDUs Bridge Protocol Data Units transmitted from the root bridge If a bridge does not get a Hello BPDU after a predefined interval Max Age the bridge assumes that the link to the root bridge is down This bridge then initiates negotiations with other bridges to reconfigure the network to re establish a valid network topology XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol 13 1 3 13 1 4 STP Port States STP assigns five port states to eliminate packet looping A bridge port is not allowed to go directly from blocking state to forwarding state so as to eliminate transient loops Table 26 STP Port States EO DESCRIPTION Disabled STP is disabled default Blocking Only configuration and management BPDUs are received and processed Listening All BPDUs are received and processed Note The listening state does not exist in RSTP Learning All
140. PS TCP UDP 162 Traps for use with the SNMP RFC 1215 SQL NET TCP 1521 Structured Query Language is an interface to access data on many different types of database systems including mainframes midrange systems UNIX systems and network servers SSH TCP UDP 22 Secure Shell Remote Login Program STRM WORKS UDP 1558 Stream Works Protocol SYSLOG UDP 514 Syslog allows you to send system logs to a UNIX server TACACS UDP 49 Login Host Protocol used for Terminal Access Controller Access Control System XGS 4728F User s Guide 407 Appendix A Common Services 408 Table 151 Commonly Used Services continued NAME PROTOCOL PORT S DESCRIPTION TELNET TCP 23 Telnet is the login and terminal emulation protocol common on the Internet and in UNIX environments It operates over TCP IP networks Its primary function is to allow users to log into remote host systems TFTP UDP 69 Trivial File Transfer Protocol is an Internet file transfer protocol similar to FTP but uses the UDP User Datagram Protocol rather than TCP Transmission Control Protocol VDOLIVE TCP 7000 Another videoconferencing solution XGS 4728F User s Guide Legal Information Copyright Copyright 2010 by ZyXEL Communications Corporation The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole transcribed stored in a retrieval system translated
141. Port Aggregation Protocol LACP or UDLD UniDirectional Link Detection Figure 142 L2PT Network Example A ee D Service Provider s Network C 29 1 1 Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling Mode Each port can have two layer 2 protocol tunneling modes Access and Tunnel The Access port is an ingress port on the service provider s edge device 1 or 2 in Figure 142 on page 264 and connected to a customer switch A or B Incoming layer 2 protocol packets received on an access port are encapsulated and forwarded to the tunnel ports The Tunnel port is an egress port at the edge of the service provider s network and connected to another service provider s switch Incoming encapsulated layer 2 protocol packets received on a tunnel port are decapsulated and sent to an access port XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 29 Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling 29 2 Configuring Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling Click Advanced Application gt Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 143 Advanced Application gt Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling IDSA Active O Destination MAC Address foo foo foo foo d NN foo Port cpp STP VIP Point to Point Mode PAGP LACP UDLD n 0 D r r3 rH Access 1 n D O rJ n m Access 2 Li C Li Li E T Access 3 Li r E m L1 Access 4 m O ri ri r Lr Access 5 LH O Li E Access 6 DH C O ri O Access j 7 I Fi O ri LH Access 8 rH i O
142. RADIUS server documentation to assign a port on the Switch to a VLAN based on EEE 802 1x authentication The port VLAN settings are fixed and untagged This will also set the port s VID The following table describes the values you need to configure Note that these atrributes only work when you enable authorization see Section 25 2 3 on page 221 Table 70 Supported Tunnel Protocol Attribute FUNCTION ATTRIBUTE VLAN Assignment Tunnel Type VLAN 13 Tunnel Medium Typ 802 6 Tunnel Private Group ID VLAN ID Note You must also create a VLAN with the specified VID on the Switch Note The bolded values in this table are fixed values as defined in RFC 3580 XGS 4728F User s Guide 225 Chapter 25 AAA 25 3 Supported RADIUS Attributes 25 3 1 Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RADIUS attributes are data used to define specific authentication and accounting elements in a user profile which is stored on the RADIUS server This section lists the RADIUS attributes supported by the Switch Refer to RFC 2865 for more information about RADIUS attributes used for authentication Refer to RFC 2866 and RFC 2869 for RADIUS attributes used for accounting This section lists the attributes used by authentication and accounting functions on the Switch In cases where the attribute has a specific format associated with it the format is specified Attributes Used for Authentication The fo
143. S 4728F User s Guide Chapter 36 Differentiated Services 36 4 1 Configuring DSCP Settings To change the DSCP IEEE 802 1p mapping click the DSCP Setting link in the DiffServ screen to display the screen as shown next Figure 173 IP Application gt DiffServ gt DSCP Setting ojo v rz 16 2 v 24 3 v 32 4 v 40 5 v 48 6 v se 1 0 fi zl 17 2 v 25 3 v 33 4 415 7 49 B gt 57 7 v OWES aD DSCP to 802 1p Mapping ifo tft HAE ae 3 afar 42 5 so 6 gt se v a o ft gt 19 2 gt a 3z as 4 v 43 5 gt si 6 v se v o 12 20 2 gt 2e 3 ae 4 MEE s2 6 gt 60 7 s o 13 1 z niz 2e 3 37 4 45 5 53 6 gi e 0 iai 22 2 30 3 ae 4 v 46 5 v safe v e2 7 Diffserv 7 0 sii gt 23 2 v 31 3 gt ae 4 v 47 5 gt 55 6 v 63 7 The following table describes the labels in this screen Apply Cancel Table 109 P Application gt DiffServ gt DSCP Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION 0 63 This is the DSCP classification identification number To set the IEEE 802 1p priority mapping select the priority level from the drop down list box Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done con
144. S ME iR R1 d 263 29 1 Layer 2 Protocol TUNIS CIVOISIEIM au conisctas eno uddduee bui esabr ad curia ba aai nire 263 23 1 1 Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling IOUS iussetun odisse ceuUe t beet Qi OE D REFDTOUEE EH Oto dU bre br QURR REDE E DN 264 29 2 Contiguring Layer z Protocol Tur delie amp cisci o aet rig Dade Reb E Reed 265 Chapter 30 Private VLAN 267 XGS 4728F User s Guide Table of Contents 20 1 Private VLAN COSI asas skr aao eda adus eb db E ue aul 267 02 da riis Private VLAN M 268 Fart IV IF edic e 271 Chapter 31 cono 9 273 old Congo Sb EBENE cnnexecaciecamb adis nte E obe uae ede SURE ERE 273 Chapter 32 ip Me E 275 32 1 RUP OVONION qaiverns ERR a VERO RERR MI REF HIR REC rd VERI RI HAAN Kid REEF RITE RR ada Ra S 275 ue Cauna UD ases ec ee VAb EE OLEI E HH MEEE UM EEpu EH OTRA EH CPM ER EORR HEC E HORA TUA 275 Chapter 33 OSPF 277 23 1 OSPF NONION Los eer TERE OU VER ERR d TA UPPER e TT Teer rrr reer ree 277 33 1 1 OSPF Autonomous Systems and Areas ssssssssssseeenee entren 277 eka PON OSPF N OS aiioa beGdannecicaaiureasaabantbicas 278 2 3 1 3 merces and Virtual LOKS usssasesu cro en Greca ca uL chat cac a ra nad 278 de L4 O
145. S la S a amp amp VM vw wr c r nip 23 p pp 24 r1 pn pip rip 2310 00 0 9 10 11 124 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 F20 21 22 23 F24 25 26 XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 21 Advanced Application VLAN Port Based VLAN Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Setting Choose All connected or Port isolation Wizard All connected means all ports can communicate with each other that is there are no virtual LANs All incoming and outgoing ports are selected This option is the most flexible but also the least secure Port isolation means that each port can only communicate with the CPU management port and cannot communicate with each other All incoming ports are selected while only the CPU outgoing port is selected This option is the most limiting but also the most secure After you make your selection click Apply top right of screen to display the screens as mentioned above You can still customize these settings by adding deleting incoming or outgoing ports but you must also click Apply at the bottom of the screen Incoming These are the ingress ports an ingress port is an incoming port that is a port through which a data packet enters If you wish to allow two subscriber ports to talk to each other you must define the ingress port for both ports The numbers in the top row denote the incoming port for the
146. SENET newsgroup service PING User Defined 1 Packet I Nternet Groper is a protocol that sends out ICMP echo requests to test whether or not a remote host is reachable XGS 4728F User s Guide Appendix A Common Services Table 151 Commonly Used Services continued NAME PROTOCOL PORT S DESCRIPTION POP3 TCP 110 Post Office Protocol version 3 lets a client computer get e mail from a POP3 server through a temporary connection TCP IP or other PPTP TCP 1723 Point to Point Tunneling Protocol enables secure transfer of data over public networks This is the control channel PPTP_TUNNEL User Defined 47 PPTP Point to Point Tunneling GRE Protocol enables secure transfer of data over public networks This is the data channel RCMD TCP 512 Remote Command Service REAL_AUDIO TCP 7070 A streaming audio service that enables real time sound over the web REXEC TCP 514 Remote Execution Daemon RLOGI N TCP 513 Remote Login RTELNET TCP 107 Remote Telnet RTSP TCP UDP 554 The Real Time Streaming media control Protocol RTSP is a remote control for multimedia on the Internet SFTP TCP 115 Simple File Transfer Protocol SMTP TCP 25 Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is the message exchange standard for the Internet SMTP enables you to move messages from one e mail server to another SNMP TCP UDP 161 Simple Network Management Program SNMP TRA
147. SPF and Router Elections uisi abbr uidi hee nid d Beer ied Reb aeta dis Lupe Su dab bro tid d ip Ones 279 21 5 Cond OSPF ciiao E ue ERR ecco iiS pi te esc E obesse peus 279 dd CPP SS dosxuixncsiiueetupbiciubesEi Paadrbt Frbe n UEM erREUE Darf SEE I DO EI UI RUE EHI URL KR 280 sos Or FC REI ON se nscabt tuc tiit D Det esp EM e rx dea Pee tas tees at ope dre iat bor dta bres q ams 282 ww eset peu c T 283 3341 1 View OSPF Area Information Table Luise cce tide annann kara aka cas 284 29 5 Configuring QSPP BeOIIODREDIE uice iei eei abuse Em reete ct operc p tu aa olere RE PEDE 285 23 B Comigummig OSPF Ini Sl Sees 1e oe bete baa rere UO ert Kid t ebbe a euge abb ad ad 286 JT OSPF VNUKE snap 288 Chapter 34 IGMP RR I a Aaa 291 LCNNIENILEAS I TT 291 291 3 IHE OMAP VUES cuaudkkxkiixitekr enu odia E E EE 292 Jd42 Pan based R3 uictor tectte E eet ros P cx C KpPE OL ed E ears E cuc rap IN ep ecn nid ordnen dee 293 Ce Sn UI Er MERE T TT 294 Chapter 35 DOV rim EET LIC LIT 295 2T DVMBP OVON IN cuoco natu p ADEM QURE OH QUE EDI Dra UD pov eda nada IHE OR aR LEN 295 na Pos DYME PF OBS cosines soba agp dura a ER ORDER Ptr aac a d var abb 295 XGS 4728F User s Guide Table of Contents 358 1 DVIMSRP Teton auusasetrtedtodan dodi danda aacra iar doa adt 296 tocius Folge DYNIA se RR TR t vH TEN 296 35 3 1 DVMRP Configuration Error Messages erkennt iter reto p n eren oa 297 25 4 Detail DYMRP Timer Yalessa 298 Chapter 36 Differe
148. Settings Use this screen to configure your DHCP settings based on the VLAN domain of the DHCP clients Click IP Application gt DHCP in the navigation panel then click the VLAN link In the DHCP Status screen that displays Note You must set up a management IP address for each VLAN that you want to configure DHCP settings for on the Switch See Section 8 6 on page 86 for information on how to do this Figure 179 IP Application gt DHCP gt VLAN VID ORTEN VID DHCP Status Server Client IP Pool Starting Address Size of Client IP Pool IP Subnet Mask Default Gateway Primary DNS Server Secondary DNS Server Relay Remote DHCP Server 1 Remote DHCP Server 2 Remote DHCP Server 3 Relay Agent Information Information Server Type Server C Relay 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 9 0 0 0 0 E Option 82 n Add Cancel Clear DHCP Status 192 168 2 100 66 Delete Cancel Status The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 114 P Application gt DHCP gt VLAN LABEL DESCRIPTION VID Enter the ID number of the VLAN to which these DHCP settings apply DHCP Status Select whether the Switch should function as a DHCP Server or Relay for the specified VID If you select Server then fields related to DHCP relay configuration are grayed out and vice versa XGS 4728F User s Guide
149. Status Common Output Fields continued FIELD DESCRIPTION Seq This field displays the link sequence number of the LSA Checksum This field displays the checksum value of the LSA Link Count This field displays the number of links in the LSA 33 3 OSPF Configuration Use this screen to activate OSPF and set general settings Click IP Application gt OSPF and the Configuration link to display the OSPF Configuration screen See Section 33 1 on page 277 for more information on OSPF Figure 151 amp OSPF Configuration Redistribute Interface Virtual Link Status Name name Area ID 0 0 0 0 Authentication None Stub Network C No Summary O Default route cost 15 Add Cancel Clear Index Name Area ID Authentication Stub Network Delete Delete Cancel IP Application gt OSPF Configuration Activating and General Settings Active E Router ID 0 0 0 0 Apply Cancel The follow table describes the related labels in this screen Table 97 P Application gt OSPF Configuration Activating and General Settings LABEL Active DESCRIPTION OSPF is disabled by default Select this option to enable it Router ID Router ID uniquely identifies the Switch in an OSPF Enter a unique ID that uses the format of an IP address in dotted decimal notation for the Switch Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch
150. TAN 333 398 2 FIF Command Line Procede senrima aa a i 334 spo GUpassd FTP GHI eR ren Revert eetn denar dard o P D S ndi dd 335 cci wadlud uper etc E 335 Chapter 40 i Le Un 337 MGT ers uie 7 ale 337 40 2 The Access Control Main Sereen iuisssususucuisuaa iunc eiat ua ida Kr seu anion Fab g d dad 337 ans Abo SMNIP segama ER 338 DL TAM P5 and SECUN aussi anb pto cnra o a dac a ebore poa dana 339 SOS Ad MIB auxctatissscipodanitdetknsd A oni Pisa denk lona tuas ba E ORDRE bls 339 eI REC LIMITI c eec 340 4005 4 OTN SNMP aseo oC ea Rt a A LEER ep a e cH RO ub ua Rid 344 403 5 Coniguing SNMP Trap Group sc caccscauesnsseandeicnaneiacance PET REPE Erai ED Fev 346 20 3 8 Setincg Ub Lodi ACCOUN aita eeccecc con eo eap Ere be Re er Sc ae ben a E 347 SR atl OPUS MNT ET 348 ZUS HIWwOSB NOIRE casu qudsiceitddpibec i be pate denna Qd Ee ein daret hddi ste M ede Laub dubi cet e UNE 349 40 B SSH Implementaligm ep tle Stel uidi e eg rac a d e ike Rabe a ERR A ERR Rt 350 20 6 1 Requirements Tor Using SSH uisuususced se extr ooa cidu a a a aaa 350 ELF UOC 10 HT TPE 350 AO FUT Pe ESIE TELE 351 40 8 1 Internet Explorer Warning Messages sic ciccoisccctsncsaastcsesdolansedeeudiancteeadalecsntenninaaeeneda 351 40 8 2 Netscape Navigator Warning Messages eeeesseeeeseeeeeeeenenneneee 352 OU The Mam CI aise aera sustain cient tig haat a tutu ap ut Dk ad REA D
151. Table 17 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt Static VLAN continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Control Select Normal for the port to dynamically join this VLAN group using GVRP This is the default selection Select Fixed for the port to be a permanent member of this VLAN group Select Forbidden if you want to prohibit the port from joining this VLAN group Tagging Select TX Tagging if you want the port to tag all outgoing frames transmitted with this VLAN Group ID Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Clear Click Clear to start configuring the screen again VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group Click the number to edit the VLAN settings Active This field indicates whether the VLAN settings are enabled Yes or disabled No Name This field displays the descriptive name for this VLAN group Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes 9 5 4 Configure VLAN Port Settings Use the VLAN Port Setting screen to configure the static VLAN IEEE 802 1Q settings on a port See Section 9 1 on page 95 for more information on static
152. Tagging id None a a gt 9 Q 0 0 0 0 0 O O 0 95 9 9 9 0 9 a aa 9 FE DECEHBELDECECI Add Cancel VLAN Active Name Mode Source Port Receiver Port 802 1p Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the related labels in this screen Table 63 Advanced Application Multicast Multicast Setting MVR LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to enable MVR to allow one single multicast VLAN to be shared among different subscriber VLANs on the network Name Enter a descriptive name up to 32 printable ASCII characters for identification purposes XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 24 Multicast Table 63 Advanced Application Multicast Multicast Setting MVR continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Multicast VLAN ID 802 1p Priority Enter the VLAN ID 1 to 4094 of the multicast VLAN Select a priority level 0 7 with which the Switch replaces the priority in outgoing IGMP control packets belonging to this multicast VLAN Mode Specify the MVR mode on the Switch Choices are Dynamic and Compatible Select Dynamic to send IGMP reports to all MVR source ports in the multicast VLAN Select Compatible to set the Switch not to send IGMP reports Port This field displays the port number on the Switch Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row fi
153. Tree Protocol gt MSTP LABEL DESCRIPTION Status Click Status to display the MSTP Status screen see Figure 75 on page 143 Active Select this check box to activate MSTP on the Switch Clear this checkbox to disable MSTP on the Switch Note You must also activate Multiple Spanning Tree in the Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Configuration screen to enable MSTP on the Switch Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds between BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Units configuration message generations by the root switch The allowed range is 1 to 10 seconds MaxAge This is the maximum time in seconds a switch can wait without receiving a BPDU before attempting to reconfigure All switch ports except for designated ports should receive BPDUs at regular intervals Any port that ages out STP information provided in the last BPDU becomes the designated port for the attached LAN If it is a root port a new root port is selected from among the Switch ports attached to the network The allowed range is 6 to 40 seconds Forwarding Delay This is the maximum time in seconds a switch will wait before changing states This delay is required because every switch must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a blocking state otherwise temporary data l
154. User s Guide Warnings tell you about things that could harm you or your device Note Notes tell you other important information for example other things you may need to configure or helpful tips or recommendations Syntax Conventions The XGS 4728F may be referred to as the Switch the device the system or the product in this User s Guide Product labels screen names field labels and field choices are all in bold font A key stroke is denoted by square brackets and uppercase text for example ENTER means the enter or return key on your keyboard Enter means for you to type one or more characters and then press the ENTER key Select or choose means for you to use one of the predefined choices A right angle bracket gt within a screen name denotes a mouse click For example Maintenance gt Log gt Log Setting means you first click Maintenance in the navigation panel then the Log sub menu and finally the Log Setting tab to get to that screen Units of measurement may denote the metric value or the scientific value For example k for kilo may denote 1000 or 1024 M for mega may denote 1000000 or 1048576 and so on XGS 4728F User s Guide 5 Document Conventions Icons Used in Figures Figures in this User s Guide may use the following generic icons The Switch icon is not an exact representation of your device The Switch Computer Notebook compute
155. VLAN Mask Bits Enter the bit number of the subnet mask To find the bit number convert the subnet mask to binary format and add all the 1 s together Take 255 255 255 0 for example 255 converts to eight 1s in binary There are three 255s so add three eights together and you get the bit number 24 XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN Table 19 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting gt Subnet Based VLAN Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION VID Enter the ID of a VLAN with which the untagged frames from the IP subnet specified in this subnet based VLAN are tagged This must be an existing VLAN which you defined in the Advanced Applications gt VLAN screens Priority Select the priority level that the Switch assigns to frames belonging to this VLAN Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Index This is the index number identifying this subnet based VLAN Click on any of these numbers to edit an existing subnet based VLAN Active This field shows whether the subnet based VLAN is active or not Name This field shows the name the subnet based VLAN IP This field shows the IP
156. VLAN Detail aD VLAN Status Por Number VID 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 428 Elapsed Time Status 1 3 5 7 g 11 432 15 47 19 24 23 25 2f Uu Uu Uu Uu Uu Uu Uu Uu Uu Uu Uu U u U 1 3 22 07 Static Uu Uu Uu Uu U Uu Uu Uu U Uu Uu Uu Uu Uu The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 16 Advanced Application VLAN VLAN Detail LABEL DESCRIPTION VLAN Status Click this to go to the VLAN Status screen VID This is the VLAN identification number that was configured in the Static VLAN screen Port Number This column displays the ports that are participating in a VLAN A tagged port is marked as T an untagged port is marked as U and ports not participating in a VLAN are marked as Elapsed Time Status This field shows how long it has been since a normal VLAN was registered or a static VLAN was set up This field shows how this VLAN was added to the Switch dynamic using GVRP static added as a permanent entry or other added in another way such as via Multicast VLAN Registration MVR 9 5 3 Configure a Static VLAN Use this screen to configure and view 802 1Q VLAN parameters for the Switch See Section 9 1 on page 95 for more information on static VLAN To configure a XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN static VLAN click Static VLAN in the VLAN Status screen to display the screen as shown next Figure 48 Advanced Application gt VLAN
157. XGS 4728F Intelligent Layer 3 Switch Default Login Details IP Address http 192 168 0 1 Out of band MGMT port http 192 168 1 1 In band ports User Name admin Password 1234 Firmware Version 3 90 Edition 2 04 2010 www zyxel com Copyright 2010 ZyXEL Communications Corporation About This User s Guide About This User s Guide Intended Audience This manual is intended for people who want to configure the Switch using the web configurator Related Documentation Web Configurator Online Help The embedded Web Help contains descriptions of individual screens and supplementary information Command Reference Guide The Command Reference Guide explains how to use the Command Line Interface CLI and CLI commands to configure the Switch Note It is recommended you use the web configurator to configure the Switch Support Disc Refer to the included CD for support documents Documentation Feedback Send your comments questions or suggestions to techwriters zyxel com tw Thank you The Technical Writing Team ZyXEL Communications Corp 6 Innovation Road Il Science Based Industrial Park Hsinchu 30099 Taiwan Need More Help More help is available at www zyxel com EET c sammen s Download Library gt Firmware Knowledge Base Software Glossary Driver Support amp Feedback Datasheet Warranty Information Tech Doc Overview ZyXEL Windows Vista Support User s Gui
158. a port The factory default for all ports is enabled A port must be enabled for data transmission to occur Name Type a descriptive name that identifies this port You can enter up to 64 alpha numerical characters Note Due to space limitations the port name may be truncated in some web configurator screens Type This field displays 10 100 1000M for a 1000Base T connection 10G for a 10 Gigabit Ethernet connection and 12G for a 10GBase CX4 connection XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting Table 13 Basic Setting gt Port Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Speed Duplex Select the speed and the duplex mode of the Ethernet connection on this port The choices are Auto 10M Half Duplex 10M Full Duplex 100M Half Duplex and 100M Full Duplex for a 1000Base T connection 1000M Full Duplex is supported by both 1000Base T and 1000Base X connections 10G Full Duplex is supported by the 10 Gigabit Ethernet connections 12G Full Duplex is supported by the 10GBase CX4 connections Selecting Auto auto negotiation allows one port to negotiate with a peer port automatically to obtain the connection speed and duplex mode that both ends support When auto negotiation is turned on a port on the Switch negotiates with the peer automatically to determine the connection speed and duplex mode If the peer port does not support auto negotiation or turns off this feature the Switch determines the connection speed
159. able RSTP Note You must also activate Rapid Spanning Tree in the Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Configuration screen to enable RSTP on the Switch Bridge Priority Bridge priority is used in determining the root switch root port and designated port The switch with the highest priority lowest numeric value becomes the STP root switch If all switches have the same priority the switch with the lowest MAC address will then become the root switch Select a value from the drop down list box The lower the numeric value you assign the higher the priority for this bridge Bridge Priority determines the root bridge which in turn determines Hello Time Max Age and Forwarding Delay Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds between BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Units configuration message generations by the root switch The allowed range is 1 to 10 seconds Max Age This is the maximum time in seconds a switch can wait without receiving a BPDU before attempting to reconfigure All switch ports except for designated ports should receive BPDUs at regular intervals Any port that ages out STP information provided in the last BPDU becomes the designated port for the attached LAN If it is a root port a new root port is selected from among the switch ports attached to the network The allowed range is 6 to 40 seconds Forwarding This is the maximum time in seconds a switch will wait before Delay
160. able that is used to build source trees and also perform Reverse Path Forwarding RPF checks on incoming multicast packets RPF checks prevent duplicate packets being filtered when loops exist in the network topology DVMRP prunes trim the multicast delivery tree s DVMRP grafts attach a branch back onto the multicast delivery tree 35 3 Configuring DVMRP Configure DVMRP on the Switch when you wish it to act as a multicast router mrouter Click IP Application gt DVMRP in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 163 IP Application gt DVMRP nuu A D Active n Threshold 255 Index Network VID Active 1 10 10 10 1 24 2 m 2 192 158 1 1 24 1 n Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 35 DVMRP Table 104 IP Application gt DVMRP LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select Active to enable DVMRP on the Switch You should do this if you want the Switch to act as a multicast router Threshol d Threshold is the maximum time to live TTL value TTL is used to limit the scope of multicasting You should reduce this value if you do not wish to flood Layer 3 devices many hops away with multicast traffic This applies only to multicast traffic this Switch sends out Index Network Index is the DVMRP configuration for the IP routing domain defined under Network The maximum number of DVMRP configura
161. abled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 L3 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 I Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 8 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 8 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 10 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 11 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 12 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 13 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 14 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 15 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 16 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 ar Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 18 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 19 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 a ris Sor pat oa area on ee E c Clear Counter 40 9 Service Port Access Control Service Access Control allows you to decide what services you may use to access the Switch You may also change the default service port and configure trusted XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 40 Access Control computer s for each service in the Remote Management screen discussed later Click Access Control to go back to the main Access Control screen Figure 215 Management gt Access Control gt Service Access Control L Service Access Control Access Control Services Active Service Port Timeout ks TIE Telnet SSH xl FTP HTTP Iv 3 Minutes HTTPS iv 443 ICMP Vv SNMP Vv Apply Cancel The following table describes the fields in this screen
162. accept this certificate for the purpose of identifyir 00a0c5012345 Accept this certificate permanently Accept this certificate temporarily For this session Do not accept this certificate and do not connect to this Web site ee m Figure 213 Security Certificate 2 Netscape Security Error Domain Name Mismatch 0x ave attemoted to establish a connection with Artificate presented It if possible though 23 If you suspect the certificate shown does not belong to 192 168 1 1 please cancel the connection and notify the site administrator View Certificate Cancel Help XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 40 Access Control 40 8 3 The Main Screen After you accept the certificate and enter the login username and password the Switch main screen appears The lock displayed in the bottom right of the browser status bar denotes a secure connection Figure 214 Example Lock Denoting a Secure Connection E lel x Ele Edit View Favorites Tools Help EJ e 0913 890 9d i 3 m i Address ja https 192 168 0 1 rpSys html eGo DELIO Status El Logout H Help ced Application Port Name Link State LACP TxPkts RxPkts Errors TxKB s RxKB s Up Time T Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 z Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 Management 3 Down STOP Disabled o 0 a 0 0 00 0 00 00 4 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 5 Down STOP Dis
163. ace Area ID Select the area ID in an IP address format with dotted decimal notation of an area to associate the interface to that area Authenticati on Note OSPF Interface s must use the same authentication method within the same area Select an authentication method The choices are Same as Area None default Simple and MD5 To participate in an OSPF network you must make the authentication method and or password settings the same as the associated area Select Same as Area to use the same authentication method within the area and set the related fields when necessary Select None to disable authentication This is the default setting Select Simple and set the Key field to authenticate OSPF packets transmitted through this interface using simple password authentication Select MD5 and set the Key ID and Key fields to authenticate OSPF packets transmitted through this interface using MD5 authentication Key ID When you select MD5 in the Authentication field specify the identification number of the authentication you want to use XGS 4728F User s Guide 287 Chapter 33 OSPF Table 101 IP Application gt OSPF Configuration gt OSPF Interface continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Key When you select Simple in the Authentication field enter a password eight character long Characters after the eighth character will be ignored When you select MD5 in the Authent
164. action s you configure in the Action field General Egress Type the number of an outgoing port Port Priority Specify a priority level DSCP Specify a DSCP DiffServ Code Point number between 0 and 63 TOS Specify the type of service TOS priority level Metering You can configure the desired bandwidth available to a traffic flow Traffic that exceeds the maximum bandwidth allocated in cases where the network is congested is called out of profile traffic Bandwidth Specify the bandwidth in kilobit per second Kbps Enter a number between 1 and 1000000 Out of Specify a new DSCP number between 0 and 63 if you want to replace or Es remark the DSCP number for out of profile traffic Action Specify the action s the Switch takes on the associated classified traffic flow Forwarding Select No change to forward the packets Select Discard the packet to drop the packets Select Do not drop the matching frame previously marked for dropping to retain the frames that were marked to be dropped before Priority Select No change to keep the priority setting of the frames Select Set the packet s 802 1 priority to replace the packet s 802 1 priority field with the value you set in the Priority field Select Send the packet to priority queue to put the packets in the designated queue Select Replace the 802 1 priority field with the IP TOS value to replace the packet s 802 1 priority field with t
165. ad standard for static and dynamic LACP port trunking The Switch supports the link aggregation I EEE802 3ad standard This standard describes the Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP which is a protocol that dynamically creates and manages trunk groups XGS 4728F User s Guide 153 Chapter 17 Link Aggregation 17 2 1 When you enable LACP link aggregation on a port the port can automatically negotiate with the ports at the remote end of a link to establish trunk groups LACP also allows port redundancy that is if an operational port fails then one of the standby ports become operational without user intervention Please note that You must connect all ports point to point to the same Ethernet switch and configure the ports for LACP trunking LACP only works on full duplex links All ports in the same trunk group must have the same media type speed duplex mode and flow control settings Configure trunk groups or LACP before you connect the Ethernet switch to avoid causing network topology loops Link Aggregation ID LACP aggregation ID consists of the following information Table 37 Link Aggregation ID Local Switch SYSTEM PORT PORT PRIORITY MAC ADDRESS KEY PRIORITY NUMBER 0000 00 00 00 00 0000 00 0000 00 00 Table 38 Link Aggregation ID Peer Switch SYSTEM PORT PORT PRIORITY MAC ADDRESS KEY PRIORITY NUMBER 0000 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 0000
166. alled a priority frame meaning that only the priority level is significant and the default VID of the ingress port is given as the VID of the frame Of the 4096 possible VIDs a VID of 0 is used to identify priority frames and the value 4095 FFF is reserved so the maximum possible number of VLAN configurations is 4 094 TPID User Priority CFI VLAN ID 2 Bytes 3 Bits 1Bit 12 bits 9 1 1 Forwarding Tagged and Untagged Frames Each port on the Switch is capable of passing tagged or untagged frames To forward a frame from an 802 1Q VLAN aware switch to an 802 1Q VLAN unaware XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN switch the Switch first decides where to forward the frame and then strips off the VLAN tag To forward a frame from an 802 1Q VLAN unaware switch to an 802 1Q VLAN aware switch the Switch first decides where to forward the frame and then inserts a VLAN tag reflecting the ingress port s default VID The default PVID is VLAN 1 for all ports but this can be changed A broadcast frame or a multicast frame for a multicast group that is known by the system is duplicated only on ports that are members of the VID except the ingress port itself thus confining the broadcast to a specific domain 9 2 Automatic VLAN Registration GARP and GVRP are the protocols used to automatically register VLAN membership across switches 9 2 1 GARP GARP Generic Attribute Registration Protocol allows network swi
167. alue according to the speed of the bridge The slower the media the higher the cost see Table 25 on page 126 for more information Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 13 5 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status Click Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol in the navigation panel to display the status screen as shown next See Section 13 1 on page 125 for more information on RSTP Note This screen is only available after you activate RSTP on the Switch Figure 71 Advanced Application Spanning Tree Protocol Status RSTP amp Spanning Tree Protocol Status Configuration RSTP MRSTP MSTP Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP Bridge Root Our Bridge Bridge ID 0000 000000000000 0000 000000000000 Hello Time second 0 0 Max Age second 0 0 Forwarding Delay second 0 Cost to Bridge D Port ID 0x0000 Topology Changed Times 0 Time Since Last Change 0 00 00 XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 29 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status RSTP LABEL DESCRIPTION Configuration Click Configur
168. anced Application gt VLAN gt Port Based VLAN Setup All Connected Setting Wizard All connected v Apply Incoming 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 E e r vo e 98 z 8 39 3 3 8 5 8 8 8 R8 bb gt gt gt BIRIBIRIB gt gt gt gt epee e e e e bbbbbblblblblbls o e e e HEDDE e 5 gt Ele b bbbbblblblblbls gt gt e gt blblblblb l5 5 b p B bbb bblblblblbl blblblblbls e e e eble B bbbbblblblblbls gt gt blblblblbls e e eple iv v CPU 9 10 131 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 191 20 21 22 234 24 25 26 VE Wm o REEE gt gt gt e HERBE gt e e e BEREE gt e EREDE gt gt e e BIBIBIBIB gt e gt e BEERE gt bibibJblb gt gt gt blblb blbls e bibiblblb bibJbJblb gt gt gt e blblb blb gt e e e pelkk e e BELEE gt gt gt gt e BEEBE 2 e e KEELE gt B bbbbblblblBlbls gt o gt e ORERE gt e e e eke Bbbbbblblblblbl s gt e gt blblblblbls e 5 5 eke bb gt gt gt BIRR gt gt o blblblblb s e e e eke Bbbbbblblblblbls gt gt blblblblb s e e eke 22 e c liblblblbls gt 2 Blblblblbl gt gt gt o blo bIblblblb s gt gt gt RERE gt gt gt BEREE o 2 BIGIEIBIE gt gt gt gt gt BIBJBIBIBI gt gt gt gt SEIS biblblblbl gt blblblblb e gt BEBEBE gt biblbl
169. anel to display the Mirroring screen Use this screen to select a monitor port and specify the traffic flow to be copied to the monitor port Figure 78 Advanced Application gt Mirroring Lit Active r Monitor Port 1 Port Mirrored Direction n ngress ngress ngress ngress Ingress v ngress Ingress THEE Ingress v Apply Cancel XGS 4728F User s Guide 151 Chapter 16 Mirroring The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 36 Advanced Application Mirroring LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to activate port mirroring on the Switch Clear this check box to disable the feature Monitor The monitor port is the port you copy the traffic to in order to examine it in Port more detail without interfering with the traffic flow on the original port s Type the port number of the monitor port Port This field displays the port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Mirrored Select this option to mirror the traffic on a port Direction Specify the direction of the traffic to mirror by selecting from the drop down list box Choices are Egress outgoing In
170. ange 224 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 A multicast server sends packets addressed to a particular multicast group multicast IP address XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 34 IGMP 34 1 1 IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol is used by multicast hosts to indicate their multicast group membership to multicast routers Multicast routers can also use IGMP to periodically check if multicast hosts still want to receive transmission from a multicast server In other words multicast routers check if any hosts on their network are still members of a specific multicast group The Switch supports IGMP version 1 IGMP v1 version 2 IGMP v2 and IGMP version 3 I GMP v3 Refer to RFC 1112 RFC 2236 and RFC 3376 for information on IGMP versions 1 2 and 3 respectively At start up the Switch queries all directly connected networks to gather group membership After that the Switch periodically updates this information How IGMP Works This section describes how I GMP works and the changes it has gone through from version 1 to version 3 IGMP version 1 defines how a multicast router checks to see if any multicast hosts are part of a multicast group It checks for group membership by sending out an IGMP Query packet Hosts that are members of a multicast group reply with an IGMP Report packet This is also referred to as a join group request The multicast router then keeps a list of all networks that have members of this multicast group and for
171. anning tree was last reconfigured XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol 13 6 Configure Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol To configure MRSTP click MRSTP in the Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol screen See Section 13 1 on page 125 for more information on MRSTP Port D PAC EON I Re ees Poke NEN EN 06 0 ple R Figure 72 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MRSTP pid Active mA aaa T EEE Bridge Priority Hello Time MAX Age Forwarding Delay 32768 J 2 seconds 20 seconds 15 32768 v gm seconds po seconds 5 32768 2 seconds 20 seconds 15 32768 x 2 seconds 20 seconds 15 Priority Path Cost Tree ee nd 28 NN a 28 E esu Mz 28 B ml 28 E ss E 20 NEN 1 28 is 20 B m 20 Hm m DU pe B x ON ee CI A bs e NM bass tiis 2 zl 2 m 2 zl dq Status Tu ply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 30 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MRSTP LABEL DESCRIPTION Status Click Status to display the MRSTP Status screen see Figure 71 on page 134 Tree This is a read only index number of the STP trees Active Select this check box to activate an STP tree Clear this checkbox to disable an STP tree Note You must also activate Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree
172. ant to have it assign a specific IP address say 172 16 1 18 and gateway information to XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials DHCP client A based on the system name VLAN ID and port number in the DHCP request Client A connects to the Switch s port 2 in VLAN 102 Figure 31 Tutorial DHCP Relay Scenario Li MW 7 NI DHCP Se rver 192 168 2 3 Port 2 PVID 102 lt gt Om 172 16 1 18 6 2 2 Creating a VLAN Follow the steps below to configure port 2 as a member of VLAN 102 1 Access the web configurator through the Switch s management port 2 Goto Basic Setting gt Switch Setup and set the VLAN type to 802 1Q Click Apply to save the settings to the run time memory Figure 32 Tutorial Set VLAN Type to 802 1Q xXucDn NN 80210 C Port Based Bridge Control Protocol Transparency Active VLAN Type r MAC Address Learning Aging Time s00 seconds Join Timer 0n milliseconds GARP Timer Leave Timer pon milliseconds Leave All Timer 10000 milliseconds Priority Queue Assignment level 7 level e gt level5 5 gt level4 4 level3 3 level2 ERES level joz level 2 Apply Cancel 3 Click Advanced Application gt VLAN gt Static VLAN XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials 4 In the Static VLAN screen select ACTIVE enter a descriptive name VALN 102 for example in the Name field and enter 102 in the VLAN Group ID f
173. applies to all ports select Any Add Click this to create the specified static binding or to update an existing one Cancel Click this to reset the values above based on the last selected static binding or if not applicable to clear the fields above Clear Click this to clear the fields above Index This field displays a sequential number for each binding MAC Address This field displays the source MAC address in the binding IP Address This field displays the IP address assigned to the MAC address in the binding Lease This field displays how long the binding is valid Type This field displays how the Switch learned the binding static This binding was learned from information provided manually by an administrator VLAN This field displays the source VLAN ID in the binding Port This field displays the port number in the binding If this field is blank the binding applies to all ports XGS 4728F User s Guide 237 Chapter 26 IP Source Guard Table 75 IP Source Guard Static Binding continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Delete Select this and click Delete to remove the specified entry Cancel Click this to clear the Delete check boxes above 26 4 DHCP Snooping Use this screen to look at various statistics about the DHCP snooping database To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt DHCP Snooping Figure 123 DHCP Snooping OW ping Database Status Descri
174. are Specifications FEATURE DESCRIPTION IP Multicast With IP multicast the Switch delivers IP packets to a group of hosts on the network not everybody In addition the Switch can send packets to Ethernet devices that are not VLAN aware by untagging removing the VLAN tags IP multicast packets RIP RIP Routing Information Protocol allows a routing device to exchange routing information with other routers OSPF DVMRP VRRP OSPF Open Shortest Path First is a link state protocol designed to distribute routing information within an autonomous system AS An autonomous system is a collection of networks using a common routing protocol to exchange routing information OSPF is best suited for large networks DVMRP Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol is a protocol used for routing multicast data within an autonomous system AS DVMRP provides multicast forwarding capability to a layer 3 switch that runs both the IPv4 protocol with IP Multicast support and the IGMP protocol Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol VRRP defined in RFC 2338 allows you to create redundant backup gateways to ensure that the default gateway of a host is always available STP Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP Rapid STP R STP detects and breaks network loops and provides backup links between switches bridges or routers It allows a Switch to interact with other R STP compliant switches in your network to ensure
175. are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Refresh Click Refresh to perform auto discovery again to list potential cluster members The next summary table shows the information for the clustering members configured Index This is the index number of a cluster member switch MacAddr This is the cluster member switch s hardware MAC address Name This is the cluster member switch s System Name Model This is the cluster member switch s model name Remove Select this checkbox and then click the Remove button to remove a cluster member switch from the cluster Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 43 Cluster Management 370 XGS 4728F User s Guide 44 1 MAC Table This chapter introduces the MAC Table screen MAC Table Overview The MAC Table screen a MAC table is also known as a filtering database shows how frames are forwarded or filtered across the Switch s ports When a device which may belong to a VLAN group sends a packet which is forwarded to a port on the Switch the MAC address of the device is shown on the Switch s MAC Table It also shows whether the MAC address is dynamic learned by the Switch or static manually entered in the Static MAC Forwarding screen The Switch uses the MAC Table to determine how to forward frames See the following figure The
176. ation Port Security Queuing Method Multicast Auth and Acct IP Source Guard Loop Guard Management Access Control Diagnostic aysiog MAC Table ARP Table Configure Clone Port Status In Save Status O Logout B Help Member Menu XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 43 Cluster Management 43 2 1 1 Uploading Firmware to a Cluster Member Switch You can use FTP to upload firmware to a cluster member switch through the cluster manager switch as shown in the following example Figure 223 Example Uploading Firmware to a Cluster Member Switch User 331 230 ftp ls 200 Port 226 File ftp 297 ftp bin 00 Type ftp put 00 Port N N N 26 File tp ftp h rW rIW IW W W W rW rIW IW C gt ftp 192 168 1 1 Connected to 192 168 1 1 220 Switch FTP version 1 0 ready at Thu Jan 1 192 168 0 1 none Enter PASS command Password admin Logged in command okay 150 Opening data connection for LIST W W Ww 1 owner 1 owner 1 owner 1 owner sent OK group group group group bytes received in 0 00Seconds 297000 00Kbytes sec I OK 3701t0 bin fw 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 00 58 46 1970 3042210 Jul 393216 Jul 0 Jul 0 Jul 01 01 01 01 125 1235 12 1 23 00 00 00 00 ras config fw 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 config 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 command okay 150 Opening data connection for STOR fw 00 a0 c5 01 23
177. ation Type Exec Dotlx Accounting Update Period Type System Exec Dotix Commands Pe A Setu Privilege Enable AAA Method 1 Method 2 Method 3 local x hd local x Active Method DH radius O radius pooo minutes Active Broadcast Mode Method Privilege DH T radius Dn m start stop radius v C m start stop radius v O DH stop only tacacs Apply Cancel XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 25 AAA The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 68 Advanced Application AAA AAA Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Authentication Use this section to specify the methods used to authenticate users accessing the Switch Privilege Enable These fields specify which database the Switch should use first second and third to authenticate access privilege level for administrator accounts users for Switch management Configure the access privilege of accounts via commands See the Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide for local authentication The TACACS and RADIUS are external servers Before you specify the priority make sure you have set up the corresponding database correctly first You can specify up to three methods for the Switch to authenticate the access privilege level of administrators The Switch checks the methods in the order you configure them first Method 1 then Method 2 and finally Method 3 You must configure the settings in
178. ation to specify which STP mode you want to activate Click RSTP to edit RSTP settings on the Switch Delay second Bridge Root refers to the base of the spanning tree the root bridge Our Bridge is this Switch This Switch may also be the root bridge Bridge ID This is the unique identifier for this bridge consisting of the bridge priority plus the MAC address This ID is the same for Root and Our Bridge if the Switch is the root switch Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds at which the root switch transmits second a configuration message The root bridge determines Hello Time Max Age and Forwarding Delay Max Age This is the maximum time in seconds a switch can wait without second receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure Forwarding This is the time in seconds the root switch will wait before changing states that is listening to learning to forwarding See Section 13 1 3 on page 127 for information on port states Note The listening state does not exist in RSTP Cost to Bridge This is the path cost from the root port on this Switch to the root switch Changed Times Port ID This is the priority and number of the port on the Switch through which this Switch must communicate with the root of the Spanning Tree Topology This is the number of times the spanning tree has been reconfigured Time Since Last Change This is the time since the sp
179. avigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Index This is the number of the selective VLAN stacking rule Active This shows whether this rule is activated or not Name This is the descriptive name for this rule Port This is the port number to which this rule is applied VID This is the customer VLAN ID in the incoming packets SPVID This is the service provider s VLAN ID that adds to the packets from the subscribers XGS 4728F User s Guide 197 Chapter 23 VLAN Stacking Table 58 Advanced Application VLAN Stacking Selective QinQ continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Priority This is the service provider s priority level in the packets Delete Check the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete column and then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes XGS 4728F User s Guide 24 1 24 1 1 24 1 2 Multicast This chapter shows you how to configure various multicast features Multicast Overview Traditionally IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways Unicast 1 sender to 1 recipient or Broadcast 1 sender to everybody on the network Multicast delivers IP packets to just a group of hosts on the network IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol is a network layer p
180. aximum bandwidth allowed for the incoming traffic flow on a port when there is no network congestion The CIR and PIR should be set for all ports that use the same uplink bandwidth If the CIR is reached packets are sent at the rate up to the PIR When network congestion occurs packets through the ingress port exceeding the CIR will be marked for drop Note The CIR should be less than the PIR Note The sum of CIRs cannot be greater than or equal to the uplink bandwidth XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 14 Bandwidth Control 14 2 Bandwidth Control Setup Click Advanced Application Bandwidth Control in the navigation panel to bring up the screen as shown next Figure 76 Advanced Application gt Bandwidth Control CE Bandwidth Control NN Active ri Active Commit Rate spire Peak Rate ives ical ii m Kbps O Kbps n Kbps 1 n 1 Kbps 1 Kbps ri 1 Kbps 2 rH 1 Kbps n 1 Kbps ri 1 Kbps 3 Oo 1 Kbps C 1 Kbps ri 1 Kbps 4 1 Kbps 1 Kbps ri 1 Kbps 5 O 1 Kbps O 1 Kbps L 1 Kbps 8 m 1 Kbps 1 Kbps o ji Kbps 7 D 1 Kbps s 1 Kbps r pn Kbps s Apply Cancel The following table describes the related labels in this screen Table 34 Advanced Application gt Bandwidth Control LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to enable bandwidth control on the Switch Port This field displays the port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make
181. bes the labels in this screen Table 141 Management gt Clustering Management gt Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Clustering Manager Active Select Active to have this Switch become the cluster manager switch A cluster can only have one manager Other directly connected switches that are set to be cluster managers will not be visible in the Clustering Candidates list If a switch that was previously a cluster member is later set to become a cluster manager then its Status is displayed as Error in the Cluster Management Status screen and a warning icon A appears in the member summary list below Name Type a name to identify the Clustering Manager You may use up to 32 printable characters spaces are allowed VID This is the VLAN ID and is only applicable if the Switch is set to 802 1Q VLAN All switches must be directly connected and in the same VLAN group to belong to the same cluster Switches that are not in the same VLAN group are not visible in the Clustering Candidates list This field is ignored if the Clustering Manager is using Port based VLAN XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 43 Cluster Management Table 141 Management Clustering Management Configuration continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top
182. bit uplink port When VLAN mapping is enabled the Switch discards the tagged packets that do not match an entry in the VLAN mapping table If the incoming packets are untagged the Switch adds a PVID based on the VLAN setting Note You can not enable VLAN mapping and VLAN stacking at the same time 28 1 1 VLAN Mapping Example In the following example figure packets that carry VLAN ID 12 and are received on port 3 match a pre configured VLAN mapping rule The Switch translates the VLAN ID from 12 into 123 before forwarding the packets Any packets carrying a VLAN tag other than 12 such as 10 and received on port 3 will be dropped Figure 138 VLAN mapping example Service Provider Network XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 28 VLAN Mapping 28 2 Enabling VLAN Mapping Click Advanced Application and then VLAN Mapping in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 139 VLAN Mapping VLAN Mapping VLAN Mapping Configure Active E Port Active LEDEDHEDPEDEDEDEDECELDEU m UP S D gp Rr SP SQ QUE c0 SP Caps INS Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 87 VLAN Mapping LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this option to enable VLAN mapping on the Switch Port This field displays the port number Use this row to make the setting the same for all ports Use this row first and then make adjustments on a port by port basis
183. blbl gt gt gt blblblb b e gt BEBEBE gt bibiblblb e blbjblblb 5 e e KEBBE o e eee e BIBIRIBIB gt e e e BIBIBIBIB gt e e e eRe Bbbbbblblblblbl blblblblb s 5 e 2 Ble Bbbbbbxblblblblbls e e e e RERE e e e e eke B bbbb5blblblblbls 5e5blblblblb las5n55bl5 e e e e BIBIBIBIB gt gt gt gt e BIp Biblblo gt gt gt e Ble ama con oS9uu uzh 5297 599958mHmRHS5 3HASISE o Outgoing 8 Apply Cancel XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN The following screen shows users on a port based port isolated VLAN configuration Figure 56 Advanced Application gt VLAN Port Based VLAN Setup Port Isolation LI c E o E t S a Setting Wizard Incoming 8 eir ic ic ic AAP 2 p e r ir ic EET 3 n n e o EH 4 H B EB e e v e ns e e s z s ni3 2 s s S 9 R 2 23 24 a8 DOCG 6c UDO e c pp Lou OBE oc oD Coc ce Be Lou ORDER Coc oR Co co ec Be Hi maaa DDDBE cEDEDE ODDONE s pigg gt DOCE R a a a E a aa a ooo co uc ge ELE o oe DELE cc ooo e DRM a m m c C a a a a aE OOHH EBIEILILILI C EIEILTEILI LLLI BR c De Die RR c a aa a a E e DODDA oc o DADAN ccc c ES EILIEILILI EILIEILILIC clo LER EIBIEIEILI c Els mjam mm EIEIEILILI C che Gjamma a a ee a 2 wede e on S a SSS a S e S e
184. ble LABEL DESCRIPTION Sort by Click one of the following buttons to display and arrange the data according to that button type The information is then displayed in the summary table below IP Click this button to display and arrange the data according to IP address VID Click this button to display and arrange the data according to VLAN group Port Click this button to display and arrange the data according to port number Index IP Address This field displays the index number This is the IP address of the device from which the incoming packets came 376 XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 45 IP Table Table 143 Management IP Table continued LABEL DESCRIPTION VID This is the VLAN group to which the packet belongs Port This is the port from which the above IP address was learned This field displays CPU to indicate the IP address belongs to the Switch Type This shows whether the IP address is dynamic learned by the Switch static belonging to the Switch or XGS 4728F User s Guide 377 Chapter 45 IP Table 378 XGS 4728F User s Guide ARP Table This chapter introduces ARP Table 46 1 ARP Table Overview Address Resolution Protocol ARP is a protocol for mapping an Internet Protocol address IP address to a physical machine address also known as a Media Access Control or MAC address on the l
185. bscriber changes the channel or turns off the computer an IGMP leave message is sent to the Switch to leave the multicast group The Switch sends a query to VLAN 1 on the receiver port in this case an uplink port on the Switch If there is another subscriber device connected to this port in the same subscriber VLAN the receiving port will still be on the list of forwarding destination for the multicast traffic Otherwise the Switch removes the receiver port from the forwarding table Figure 107 MVR Multicast Television Example VLAN 1 Multicast VLAN S H L j gt LI Ss N A r s u u u mm mm om AJ x XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 24 Multicast 24 7 General MVR Configuration Use the MVR screen to create multicast VLANs and select the receiver port s and a source port for each multicast VLAN Click Advanced Applications gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR link to display the screen as shown next Note You can create up to five multicast VLANs and up to 256 multicast rules on the Switch Note Your Switch automatically creates a static VLAN with the same VID when you create a multicast VLAN in this screen Figure 108 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR LD Multicast Setting Group Configuration Active C Name Multicast VLAN ID 802 1p Priority lo Mode Dynamic C Compatible Port Source Port Receiver Port None
186. c 171 Chapter 20 Mei a T 173 20 1 Absit the Classifier and GooS asneira aai anaia Maur a Ra LU aad 173 20 2 Cooigunng the 2er M 173 20 3 Viewing and Editing Classifier Configuration ssssssssseseeeeeeennn 176 Gu A AAS Uc EAMG Het uta eieaniaeiaaceeinani aloes ace adetbreindaineaes 178 Chapter 21 a ne eee 179 EL Pooler Robs CUBPUIBU iocis deuda dax amnion epp a Latet aa pen cet Aduana pend 179 2 11 ELO BEP sias ternis donna Came rcc E OU arcc edil cw OR UD Ku 179 21 1 2 DSCP amd Per Hop Bea viel eec ona ai cet a 179 2152 Comoro Foley POUES isses eost bn ma leid A 180 21 3 Viewing and Editing Policy Configuration cesar reddet portta Fees agas ed aie tu eR een 183 MAP Mina cj c Mem 185 Chapter 22 egi d i em 187 22 1 Queuing Method CIBISIB sos uode obe ARE Eri r rovc Ras iE ent UL D Rud qt EUR 187 mih ipai C E 187 XGS 4728F User s Guide 15 Table of Contents 2228 neh Fair USUI marnas i a e bcp ra aged pod od o Ra a LR 187 22 1 3 Weighted Round Robin Scheduling WRR 1 access ies ten nn brk kabet cercanas 188 cscsdres e ek cr m 189 Chapter 23 VLAN Eo ilu q H 191 25 1 VLAN ORM VEIEN La Ga ooaaeidatidabcidas cn cia Penis an anes an pd ad emer RU aud 191 es LUN AN SUcIddg EXS
187. cation gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection Figure 127 ARP Inspection Status Total number of filters 0 ORS VLAN Status Log Status Configure IPSG Index MAC Address VID Port Expiry sec Reason Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 80 ARP Inspection Status LABEL Total number of filters DESCRIPTION This field displays the current number of MAC address filters that were created because the Switch identified unauthorized ARP packets Index This field displays a sequential number for each MAC address filter MAC Address This field displays the source MAC address in the MAC address filter VID Port This field displays the source VLAN ID in the MAC address filter This field displays the source port of the discarded ARP packet Expiry sec This field displays how long in seconds the MAC address filter remains in the Switch You can also delete the record manually Delete XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 26 IP Source Guard Table 80 ARP Inspection Status continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Reason This field displays the reason the ARP packet was discarded MAC VLAN The MAC address and VLAN ID were not in the binding table I P The MAC address and VLAN ID were in the binding table but the IP address was not valid Port The MAC address VLAN ID and IP address were in the b
188. ccessfully This section displays historical information about the number of times the Switch successfully or unsuccessfully read or updated the DHCP snooping database Total attempts This field displays the number of times the Switch has tried to access the DHCP snooping database for any reason Startup failures This field displays the number of times the Switch could not create or read the DHCP snooping database when the Switch started up or a new URL is configured for the DHCP snooping XGS 4728F User s Guide database Chapter 26 IP Source Guard Table 76 DHCP Snooping continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Successful transfers This field displays the number of times the Switch read bindings from or updated the bindings in the DHCP snooping database successfully Failed transfers This field displays the number of times the Switch was unable to read bindings from or update the bindings in the DHCP snooping database Successful reads This field displays the number of times the Switch read bindings from the DHCP snooping database successfully Failed reads This field displays the number of times the Switch was unable to read bindings from the DHCP snooping database Successful writes This field displays the number of times the Switch updated the bindings in the DHCP snooping database successfully Failed writes This field displays the number of times the Swi
189. ch the Switch has not recorded any group members Select Drop to discard the frame s Select Flooding to send the frame s to all ports Index This field displays an index number of an entry Network This field displays the IP domain configured on the Switch Refer to Section 8 6 on page 86 for more information on configuring IP domains Version Select an IGMP version from the drop down list box The choices are I GMP v1 IGMP v2 IGMP v3 and None Generally if you want to enable IGMP on the Switch you should choose I GMP v3 as it is compatible with older versions Choose an earlier version of IGMP IGMP v2 or IGMP v1 if the multicast hosts on your network can not recognize IGMP version 3 or version 2 Query messages Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XGS 4728F User s Guide DVMRP This chapter introduces DVMRP and tells you how to configure it 35 1 DVMRP Overview DVMRP Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol is a protocol used for routing multicast data within an autonomous system AS This DVMRP implementation is based on draft ietf idmr dvmrp v3 10 DVMRP provides multicast forwardin
190. ches Port ID 1 byte This is the port that the DHCP client is connected to VLAN ID 2 bytes This is the VLAN that the port belongs to Information up to 64 bytes This optional read only field is set according to system name set in Basic Settings gt General Setup XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 37 DHCP 37 4 2 Configuring DHCP Global Relay Configure global DHCP relay in the DHCP Relay screen Click IP Application gt DHCP in the navigation panel and click the Global link to display the screen as shown Figure 176 IP Application gt DHCP gt Global C DHCP Relay Status Active O Remote DHCP Server 1 0 0 0 0 Remote DHCP Server 2 0 0 0 0 Remote DHCP Server 3 0 0 0 0 Relay Agent Information Option 82 Information O Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 113 IP Application gt DHCP gt Global LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to enable DHCP relay Remote Enter the IP address of a DHCP server in dotted decimal notation DHCP Server 1 3 Relay Agent Select the Option 82 check box to have the Switch add information slot Information number port number and VLAN ID to client DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server Information This read only field displays the system name you configure in the General Setup screen Select the check box for the Switch to add the system name to the client DHCP re
191. ckets Acct Terminate Cause XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 25 AAA Table 73 RADIUS Attributes Exec Events via Console ATTRIBUTE START INTERIM UPDATE STOP Acct Input Gigawords v Acct Output Gigawords v XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 25 AAA XGS 4728F User s Guide IP Source Guard Use IP source guard to filter unauthorized DHCP and ARP packets in your network 26 1 IP Source Guard Overview IP source guard uses a binding table to distinguish between authorized and unauthorized DHCP and ARP packets in your network A binding contains these key attributes MAC address VLAN ID P address Port number When the Switch receives a DHCP or ARP packet it looks up the appropriate MAC address VLAN ID IP address and port number in the binding table If there is a binding the Switch forwards the packet If there is not a binding the Switch discards the packet The Switch builds the binding table by snooping DHCP packets dynamic bindings and from information provided manually by administrators static bindings IP source guard consists of the following features Static bindings Use this to create static bindings in the binding table DHCP snooping Use this to filter unauthorized DHCP packets on the network and to build the binding table dynamically ARP inspection Use this to filter unauthorized ARP packets on th
192. closed rack installations 2 2 Mounting the Switch on a Rack This section lists the rack mounting requirements and precautions and describes the installation steps 2 2 1 Rack mounted Installation Requirements Two mounting brackets Eight M3 flat head screws and a 2 Philips screwdriver Four M5 flat head screws and a 2 Philips screwdriver Failure to use the proper screws may damage the unit 2 2 1 4 Precautions Make sure the rack will safely support the combined weight of all the equipment it contains Make sure the position of the Switch does not make the rack unstable or top heavy Take all necessary precautions to anchor the rack securely before installing the unit 2 2 2 Attaching the Mounting Brackets to the Switch 1 Position a mounting bracket on one side of the Switch lining up the four screw holes on the bracket with the screw holes on the side of the Switch Figure 6 Attaching the Mounting Brackets 32 XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection 2 Using a 2 Philips screwdriver install the M3 flat head screws through the mounting bracket holes into the Switch 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to install the second mounting bracket on the other side of the Switch 4 You may now mount the Switch on a rack Proceed to the next section 2 2 3 Mounting the Switch on a Rack 1 Position a mounting bracket that is already attached to the Switch on one side of
193. cost from the root port on this Switch to the root switch Changed Times Port ID This is the priority and number of the port on the Switch through which this Switch must communicate with the root of the Spanning Tree Topology This is the number of times the spanning tree has been reconfigured Time Since Last Change This is the time since the spanning tree was last reconfigured XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol 13 8 Configure Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol To configure MSTP click MSTP in the Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol screen See Section 13 1 5 on page 128 for more information on MSTP Figure 74 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MSTP c DION Serer Bridge Active Hello Time E seconds MAX Age 20 seconds Forwarding Delay j 5 seconds Maximum hops 128 Configuration Name 001 349011fb0 Revision Number Apply Cancel Instance Bridge Priority 32768 i Instance NVN N Binion Ooo VLAN Range Start End Clear Enabled VLAN s Port Active Priority Path Cost r a aT r m e 3 r m5 pe 3 r m NN r fe pe s r ae r ie pe r m5 S 8 Status Add Remove I uii Add Cancel XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 32 Advanced Application gt Spanning
194. ctory default IP address is 192 168 1 1 The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address The factory default subnet mask is 255 255 255 0 On the Switch as a layer 3 device an IP address is not bound to any physical ports Since each IP address on the Switch must be in a separate subnet the configured IP address is also known as IP interface or routing domain In addition this allows routing between subnets based on the IP address without additional routers You can configure multiple routing domains on the same VLAN as long as the IP address ranges for the domains do not overlap To change the IP address of the XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting Switch in a routing domain simply add a new routing domain entry with a different IP address in the same subnet Figure 42 Basic Setting gt IP Setup CIP Setup Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 Domain Name Server 0 0 0 0 Default Management in band Outof band Management IP Address IP Address 192 168 0 1 IP Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 Apply Cancel IP Interface IP Address 0 0 0 0 IP Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 VID Add Cancel Index IP Address IP Subnet Mask VID Delete 1 192 168 1 12 255 255 255 0 1 B Delete The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 12 Basic Setting gt IP Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Default Type the IP address of the default outgoing gateway in dotted dec
195. cts ato tout des Dad use eR Roo ac cx citta atin Pate ura 307 TERE U Er cerca ects t ETE EE 317 Lun 9 iIA VX9 OO O 327 ibigu inlje mc qm 329 PROS COTE MT 337 BOSE ETE M TM M 357 rr v E E 359 Se a AIS MIG E E A dato A bb n E T AEA N E 363 Aa TADE a E N meniedenema a enti ese em atone 371 lus m PTS I I rere reer Try 375 dci TOO ENNIO S D 379 am as e 381 Gnau AONE MP abated P c H 383 Troubleshooting amp Product Specifications eese 385 TOUREN TU 387 usc fuere epe no Re ML 393 Appendices and B 403 XGS 4728F User s Guide Table of Contents Table of Contents About This Users Guide 3 pick li 4 5 c lk i e 7 geri Y 9 Table e E Y 11 Part l rue IN mem 23 Chapter 1 Gelting to Know Bis A A XX 25 E KEE E AAE A T eT 25 LULE OTO EID E a 25 1 1 2 High Performa
196. d Virtual Links An OSPF interface is a link between a layer 3 device and an OSPF network An interface has state information an IP address and subnet mask associated with it 278 XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 33 OSPF 33 1 4 33 1 5 1 2 When you configure an OSPF interface you first set an interface to transmit OSPF traffic and add the interface to an area You can configure a virtual link to establish maintain connectivity between a non backbone area and the backbone The virtual link must be configured on both layer 3 devices in the non backbone area and the backbone OSPF and Router Elections The OSPF protocol provides for automatic election of Designated Router DR and Backup Designated Router BDR on network segments The DR and BDR keep track of link state updates in their area and make sure LSAs are sent to the rest of the network In most cases the default DR BDR election is fine but in some situations it must be controlled In the following figure only router A has direct connectivity with all the other routers on the network segment Routers B and C do not have a direct connection with each other Therefore they should not be allowed to become DR or BDR Only router A should become the DR Figure 149 OSPF Router Election Example A T J _ B C T F Ta J me gt HR s _ Wu Wu You can assign a priority to an interface which determines whether this router will be elected to be a
197. d click by VID Search to display only the specified VLAN s in the list below Leave this field blank and click Search to display all VLANs configured on the Switch The Number This is the number of VLANs configured on the Switch of VLAN The Number This is the number of VLANs that match the searching criteria and display of Search in the list below Results M This field displays only when you use the Search button to look for certain VLANs Index This is the VLAN index number Click on an index number to view more VLAN details VID This is the VLAN identification number that was configured in the Static VLAN screen Elapsed Time This field shows how long it has been since a normal VLAN was registered or a Static VLAN was set up Status This field shows how this VLAN was added to the Switch dynamic using GVRP static added as a permanent entry or other added in another way such as via Multicast VLAN Registration MVR Change Pages Click Previous or Next to show the previous next screen if all status information cannot be seen in one screen XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN 9 5 2 VLAN Details Use this screen to view detailed port settings and status of the VLAN group See Section 9 1 on page 95 for more information on static VLAN Click on an index number in the VLAN Status screen to display VLAN details Figure 47 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Detail
198. d displays the index number of a port on the Switch Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select Active to enable DiffServ on the port Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 36 3 1 Configuring 2 Rate 3 Color Marker Settings Use this screen to configure TRTCM settings Click the 2 rate 3 Color Marker link in the DiffServ screen to display the screen as shown next XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 36 Differentiated Services Note You cannot enable both TRTCM and Bandwidth Control at the same time Figure 172 IP Application gt DiffServ gt 2 rate 3 Color Marker 2 Rate 3 Color Marker g Diffserv Active m color blind Port Active Commit Rate Peak Rate green yellow red E Kbps Kbps 1 n kbps f1 Kbps 0 0 0 2 oft Kbps f1 kbps O 0 0 3 ri f Kbps h kbps 0 0 0 4 r n Kbps 1 Kbps O 0 0 5 ri f Kbps f kbps 0 0 0 6 0 h Kbps
199. d to specify whether or not the Switch adds DHCP relay agent option 82 information Chapter 37 on page 307 to DHCP requests that the Switch relays to a DHCP server for each VLAN To XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 26 IP Source Guard open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt DHCP Snooping gt Configure gt VLAN Figure 126 DHCP Snooping VLAN Configure L DHCP Snooping VLAN Configure Configure Show VLAN Start VID End VID Apply VID Enabled Option82 Information ui No E O Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 79 DHCP Snooping VLAN Configure LABEL DESCRIPTION Show VLAN Use this section to specify the VLANs you want to manage in the section below Start VID Enter the lowest VLAN ID you want to manage in the section below End VID Enter the highest VLAN ID you want to manage in the section below Apply Click this to display the specified range of VLANs in the section below VID This field displays the VLAN ID of each VLAN in the range specified above If you configure the VLAN the settings are applied to all VLANs Enabled Select Yes to enable DHCP snooping on the VLAN You still have to enable DHCP snooping on the Switch and specify trusted ports Note The Switch will drop all DHCP requests if you enable DHCP snooping and there are no trusted ports Option82 Select this to have the Switch add the slot number por
200. daptor or cord included with the Switch Make sure the power adaptor or cord is connected to the Switch and plugged in to an appropriate power source Make sure the power source is turned on Turn the Switch off and on in DC models or if the DC power supply is connected in AC DC models Disconnect and re connect the power adaptor or cord to the Switch in AC models or if the AC power supply is connected in AC DC models If the problem continues contact the vendor The ALM LED is on XGS 4728F User s Guide 387 Chapter 49 Troubleshooting Turn the Switch off and on in DC models or if the DC power supply is connected in AC DC models Disconnect and re connect the power adaptor or cord to the Switch in AC models or if the AC power supply is connected in AC DC models If the problem continues contact the vendor One of the LEDs does not behave as expected Make sure you understand the normal behavior of the LED See Section 3 3 on page 41 Check the hardware connections See Section 3 1 on page 35 Inspect your cables for damage Contact the vendor to replace any damaged cables Turn the Switch off and on in DC models or if the DC power supply is connected in AC DC models Disconnect and re connect the power adaptor or cord to the Switch in AC models or if the AC power supply is connected in AC DC models If the problem continues contact the vendor 49 2 Switch Access and Login fo
201. de Forum Quick start guide CLI Reference Guide Support note Certification Declaration SNMP MIB File XGS 4728F User s Guide 3 About This User s Guide Download Library Search for the latest product updates and documentation from this link Read the Tech Doc Overview to find out how to efficiently use the User Guide Quick Start Guide and Command Line Interface Reference Guide in order to better understand how to use your product Knowledge Base If you have a specific question about your product the answer may be here This is a collection of answers to previously asked questions about ZyXEL products Forum This contains discussions on ZyXEL products Learn from others who use ZyXEL products and share your experiences as well Customer Support Should problems arise that cannot be solved by the methods listed above you should contact your vendor If you cannot contact your vendor then contact a ZyXEL office for the region in which you bought the device See http www zyxel com web contact us php for contact information Please have the following information ready when you contact an office Product model and serial number Warranty Information Date that you received your device Brief description of the problem and the steps you took to solve it XGS 4728F User s Guide Document Conventions Document Conventions Warnings and Notes These are how warnings and notes are shown in this
202. de index priority Timeout 30 seconds Index IP Address TCP Port Shared Secret Delete 1 0 0 0 0 49 m 2 o 0 0 0 49 rH Apply Cancel Accounting Server Timeout 0 seconds Index IP Address 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 TCP Port Shared Secret Delete E D asses E mus et umm mw er Apply Cancel XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 25 AAA The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 67 Advanced Application gt AAA gt TACACS Server Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Authentication Server Use this section to configure your TACACS authentication settings Mode This field is only valid if you configure multiple TACACS servers Select index priority and the Switch tries to authenticate with the first configured TACACS server if the TACACS server does not respond then the Switch tries to authenticate with the second TACACS server Select round robin to alternate between the TACACS servers that it sends authentication requests to Timeout Specify the amount of time in seconds that the Switch waits for an authentication request response from the TACACS server If you are using index priority for your authentication and you are using two TACACS servers then the timeout value is divided between the two TACACS servers For example if you set the timeout value to 30 seconds then the Switch waits for a response from the first TACACS server for 15 seconds and the
203. devices to handle the packets differently depending on the code points without the need to negotiate paths or remember state information for every flow In addition applications do not have to request a particular service or give advanced notice of where the traffic is going DSCP and Per Hop Behavior DiffServ defines a new DS Differentiated Services field to replace the Type of Service ToS field in the IP header The DS field contains a 6 bit DSCP field which can define up to 64 service levels and the remaining 2 bits are defined as currently unused CU The following figure illustrates the DS field Figure 167 DiffServ Differentiated Service Field DSCP 6 bits CU 2 bits DSCP is backward compatible with the three precedence bits in the ToS octet so that non DiffServ compliant ToS enabled network device will not conflict with the DSCP mapping The DSCP value determines the PHB Per Hop Behavior that each packet gets as it is forwarded across the DiffServ network Based on the marking rule different XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 36 Differentiated Services 36 1 2 kinds of traffic can be marked for different priorities of forwarding Resources can then be allocated according to the DSCP values and the configured policies DiffServ Network Example The following figure depicts a DiffServ network consisting of a group of directly connected DiffServ compliant network devices The boundary node A in Fig
204. e 25 Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch super fast uplink connection by using the optional 10 Gigabit uplink module on the Switch Figure 1 Bridging Application Ix T ui im T e N 1 l i i l amp n zr l Sales e e e O8 d 1 1 2 High Performance Switching Example The Switch is ideal for connecting two geographically dispersed networks that need high bandwidth In the following example a company uses the optional 10 Gigabit uplink modules to connect the headquarters to a branch office network Within the headquarters network a company can use trunking to group several physical ports into one logical higher capacity link Trunking can be used if for example it is cheaper to use multiple lower speed links than to under utilize a high speed but more costly single port link Figure 2 High Performance Switching 10 Gbps S r M l l mie I l Tu Trunk l l l SW l l QE VI EEEEEEH EE HQ INI y e e e e e e e ee XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch 1 1 3 Gigabit Ethernet to the Desktop The Switch is an ideal solution for small networks which demand high bandwidth for a group of heavy traffic users You can connect computers and servers directly to the Switch s port or connect other switches to the Switch Use the optional 10 Gigabit uplink module to provide high speed
205. e master router becomes unavailable a backup router assumes the role of the master router until the master router comes back up and takes over The following figure shows a VRRP network example with the switches A and B implementing one virtual router VR1 to ensure the link between the host X and the uplink gateway G Host X is configured to use VR1 192 168 1 20 as the XGS 4728F User s Guide 31 7 Chapter 38 VRRP default gateway If switch A has a higher priority it is the master router Switch B having a lower priority is the backup router Figure 182 VRRP Example 1 192 168 1 1 i 172 21 1 1 Default Gateway 192 168 1 20 192 168 1 20 192 168 1 10 0 172 21 1 10 B If switch A the master router is unavailable switch B takes over Traffic is then processed by switch B 38 2 VRRP Status Click IP Application gt VRRP in the navigation panel to display the VRRP Status screen as shown next Figure 183 IP Application gt VRRP Status OCD Configuration Index Network VRID VR Status Uplink Status 1 192 168 1 1 24 1 Master Alive Pollintervalis fio Stop The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 115 IP Application gt VRRP Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This field displays the index number of a rule Network This field displays the IP address and the subnet mask bits of an IP routing domain that is associated to a virtual route
206. e 230 1 2 50 230 1 2 60 Add Cancel MVLAN Name Start Address End Address Delete All Delete Group 200 E News 224 1 4 10 224 1 4 50 rH Delete Cancel Figure 113 MVR Group Configuration Example amp Group Configuration D MVR Multicast VLAN ID 200 Name Start Address End Address fo 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ada Cancel MVLAN Name Start Address End Address Delete All Delete Group Movie 230 1 2 50 230 1 2 60 m 224 1 4 10 224 1 4 50 Delete Cancel EXAMPLE 214 XGS 4728F User s Guide AAA This chapter describes how to configure authentication authorization and accounting settings on the Switch 25 1 Authentication Authorization and Accounting AAA Authentication is the process of determining who a user is and validating access to the Switch The Switch can authenticate users who try to log in based on user accounts configured on the Switch itself The Switch can also use an external authentication server to authenticate a large number of users Authorization is the process of determining what a user is allowed to do Different user accounts may have higher or lower privilege levels associated with them For example user A may have the right to create new login accounts on the Switch but user B cannot The Switch can authorize users based on user accounts configured on the Switch itself or it can use an external server to authorize a large number of users Accounting is the
207. e following table describes the labels in this screen Table 31 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status MRSTP LABEL DESCRIPTION Configuration Click Configuration to specify which STP mode you want to activate Click MRSTP to edit MRSTP settings on the Switch Tree Select which STP tree configuration you want to view Bridge Root refers to the base of the spanning tree the root bridge Our Bridge is this Switch This Switch may also be the root bridge Bridge ID This is the unique identifier for this bridge consisting of bridge priority plus MAC address This ID is the same for Root and Our Bridge if the Switch is the root switch XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol Table 31 Advanced Application Spanning Tree Protocol Status MRSTP Delay second LABEL DESCRIPTION Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds at which the root switch transmits second a configuration message The root bridge determines Hello Time Max Age and Forwarding Delay Max Age This is the maximum time in seconds a switch can wait without second receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure Forwarding This is the time in seconds the root switch will wait before changing states that is listening to learning to forwarding Note The listening state does not exist in RSTP Cost to Bridge This is the path
208. e must match an existing account on the Switch configured in Management Access Control Logins screen User Use this section to configure users for authentication with managers Information using SNMP v3 Note Use the username and password of the login accounts you specify in this section to create accounts on the SNMP v3 manager Index This is a read only number identifying a login account on the Switch Username This field displays the username of a login account on the Switch Security Select whether you want to implement authentication and or encryption Level for SNMP communication from this user Choose noauth to use the username as the password string to send to the SNMP manager This is equivalent to the Get Set and Trap Community in SNMP v2c This is the lowest security level auth to implement an authentication algorithm for SNMP messages sent by this user priv to implement authentication and encryption for SNMP messages sent by this user This is the highest security level Note The settings on the SNMP manager must be set at the same security level or higher than the security level settings on the Switch Authenticati on Select an authentication algorithm MD5 Message Digest 5 and SHA Secure Hash Algorithm are hash algorithms used to authenticate SNMP data SHA authentication is generally considered stronger than MD5 but is slower XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 40 Access C
209. e network If you want to use dynamic bindings to filter unauthorized ARP packets typical implementation you have to enable DHCP snooping before you enable ARP inspection XGS 4728F User s Guide 231 Chapter 26 IP Source Guard 26 1 1 DHCP Snooping Overview Use DHCP snooping to filter unauthorized DHCP packets on the network and to build the binding table dynamically This can prevent clients from getting IP addresses from unauthorized DHCP servers 26 1 1 1 Trusted vs Untrusted Ports Every port is either a trusted port or an untrusted port for DHCP snooping This setting is independent of the trusted untrusted setting for ARP inspection You can also specify the maximum number for DHCP packets that each port trusted or untrusted can receive each second Trusted ports are connected to DHCP servers or other switches The Switch discards DHCP packets from trusted ports only if the rate at which DHCP packets arrive is too high The Switch learns dynamic bindings from trusted ports Note The Switch will drop all DHCP requests if you enable DHCP snooping and there are no trusted ports Untrusted ports are connected to subscribers The Switch discards DHCP packets from untrusted ports in the following situations The packet is a DHCP server packet for example OFFER ACK or NACK The source MAC address and source IP address in the packet do not match any of the current bindings The packet is a RELEASE or DE
210. e of IP protocol used by the service If this is TCP UDP then the service uses the same port number with TCP and UDP If this is User Defined the Port s is the IP protocol number not the port number Port s This value depends on the Protocol Please refer to RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers f the Protocol is TCP UDP or TCP UDP this is the IP port number f the Protocol is USER this is the IP protocol number Description This is a brief explanation of the applications that use this service or the situations in which this service is used Table 151 Commonly Used Services NAME PROTOCOL PORT S DESCRIPTION AH User Defined 51 The IPSEC AH Authentication Header IPSEC TUNNEL tunneling protocol uses this service AIM New I CQ TCP 5190 AOL s Internet Messenger service It is also used as a listening port by ICQ AUTH TCP 113 Authentication protocol used by some servers BGP TCP 179 Border Gateway Protocol BOOTP CLIENT UDP 68 DHCP Client BOOTP SERVER UDP 67 DHCP Server CU SEEME TCP 7648 A popular videoconferencing solution from White Pines Software UDP 24032 DNS TCP UDP 53 Domain Name Server a service that matches web names for example www zyxel com to IP numbers XGS 4728F User s Guide Appendix A Common Services Table 151 Commonly Used Services continued NAME PROTOCOL PORT
211. e remaining power supply Use two wires to connect to a single terminal pair one wire for the positive terminal and one wire for the negative terminal Note The current rating of the power wires must be greater than 20 Amps The power supply to which the Switch connects must have a built in circuit breaker or switch to toggle the power Note When installing the power wire push it wire firmly into the terminal as deep as possible and make sure that no exposed bare wire can be seen or touched Exposed power wire is dangerous Use extreme care when connecting a DC power source to the device To connect a power supply Use a screwdriver to loosen the terminal block captive screws Connect one end of a power wire to the Switch s RTN return pin and tighten the captive screw Connect the other end of the power wire to the positive terminal on the power supply Connect one end of a power wire to the Switch s 48V input pin and tighten the captive screw Connect the other end of the power wire to the negative terminal on the power supply Insert the terminal block plug in the Switch s terminal block header XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 3 Hardware Overview 3 2 2 External Backup Power Supply Connector The Switch supports external backup power supply BPS The Switch constantly monitors the status of the internal power supply The backup power supply automatically provides power to the Switch in the event of a powe
212. ear the Delete check boxes XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 21 Policy Rule 21 4 Policy Example The figure below shows an example Policy screen where you configure a policy to limit bandwidth and discard out of profile traffic on a traffic flow classified using the Example classifier refer to Section 20 4 on page 178 Figure 96 Policy Example Policy _ Active iv Test Example Name General C Replace the IP TOS field with the 802 1 priority value C Setthe Diffserv Codepoint field in the frame Outgoing Send the packetto the mirror port Sendthe packetto the egress port Metering M Drop the packet Change the DSCP value Set Out Drop Precedence Out of profile action Parameters Eglises nn 1 Priority o DSCP TOS o Forwarding No change C Discard the packet C Do not drop the matching frame previously marked for dropping Priority No change C Getthe packet s 802 1 priority C Send the packetto priority queue Replace the 802 1 priority field with the IP TOS value Diffserv No change Action C Setthe packet s TOS field Do not drop the matching frame previously marked for dropping Metering 1000 Kbps a Bandwidth Outof Profile DSCP Add Cancel Clear Index Active Name Delete Cancel Classifier s Delete XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 21 Policy Rule XGS 4728F User s Guide Que
213. ed ARP packets on the network This can prevent many kinds of man in the middle attacks such as the one in the following example Figure 120 Example Man in the middle Attack In this example computer B tries to establish a connection with computer A Computer X is in the same broadcast domain as computer A and intercepts the ARP request for computer A Then computer X does the following things t pretends to be computer A and responds to computer B t pretends to be computer B and sends a message to computer A As a result all the communication between computer A and computer B passes through computer X Computer X can read and alter the information passed between them 26 1 2 1 ARP Inspection and MAC Address Filters When the Switch identifies an unauthorized ARP packet it automatically creates a MAC address filter to block traffic from the source MAC address and source VLAN ID of the unauthorized ARP packet You can configure how long the MAC address filter remains in the Switch These MAC address filters are different than regular MAC address filters Chapter 12 on page 123 They are stored only in volatile memory They do not use the same space in memory that regular MAC address filters use XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 26 IP Source Guard They appear only in the ARP Inspection screens and commands not in the MAC Address Filter screens and commands 26 1 2 2 Trusted vs Untrusted Ports Ev
214. ee instance VLANs can be configured to run on a specific MSTI Each created MSTI is identified by a unique number known as an MST ID known internally to a region Thus an MSTI does not span across MST regions XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol The following figure shows an example where there are two MST regions Regions 1 and 2 have 2 spanning tree instances Figure 66 MSTIs in Different Regions Physical Connection Region 2 13 1 5 4 Common and Internal Spanning Tree CIST A CIST represents the connectivity of the entire network and it is equivalent to a spanning tree in an STP RSTP The CIST is the default MST instance MSTID 0 Any VLANs that are not members of an MST instance are members of the CIST In an MSTP enabled network there is only one CIST that runs between MST regions and single spanning tree devices A network may contain multiple MST regions and other network segments running RSTP Figure 67 MSTP and Legacy RSTP Network Example Region 3 Region 2 Physical Connection RSTP on the Link XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol 13 2 Spanning Tree Protocol Status Screen The Spanning Tree Protocol status screen changes depending on what standard you choose to implement on your network Click Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol to see the screen as shown Figure 68 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol
215. efault IP address See Section 4 6 on page 52 6 If the problem continues contact the vendor or try one of the advanced suggestions Advanced Suggestions Try to access the Switch using another service such as Telnet If you can access the Switch check the remote management settings to find out why the Switch does not respond to HTTP can see the Login screen but cannot log in to the Switch XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 49 Troubleshooting 1 Make sure you have entered the user name and password correctly The default user name is admin and the default password is 1234 These fields are case sensitive so make sure Caps Lock is not on 2 You may have exceeded the maximum number of concurrent Telnet sessions Close other Telnet session s or try connecting again later Check that you have enabled logins for HTTP or Telnet If you have configured a secured client IP address your computer s IP address must match it Refer to the chapter on access control for details 3 Disconnect and re connect the cord to the Switch 4 Ifthis does not work you have to reset the device to its factory defaults See Section 4 6 on page 52 Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions In order to use the web configurator you need to allow Web browser pop up windows from your device JavaScripts enabled by default Java permissions enabled by default cannot see some of Advanced Applicatio
216. ege level for which the Switch should send accounting information The Switch will send accounting information when commands at the level you specify and higher are executed on the XGS 4728F User s Guide Switch Chapter 25 AAA Table 68 Advanced Application gt AAA gt AAA Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 25 2 4 Vendor Specific Attribute RFC 2865 standard specifies a method for sending vendor specific information between a RADIUS server and a network access device for example the Switch A company can create Vendor Specific Attributes VSAs to expand the functionality of a RADIUS server The Switch supports VSAs that allow you to perform the following actions based on user authentication Limit bandwidth on incoming or outgoing traffic for the port the user connects to Assign account privilege levels See the CLI Reference Guide for more information on account privilege levels for the authenticated user The VSAs are composed of the following Vendor ID An identification number assigned to the company by the IANA Internet Assigned Numbers Authority ZyXEL
217. egin configuring this screen afresh XGS 4728F User s Guide 147 Chapter 14 Bandwidth Control XGS 4728F User s Guide Broadcast Storm Control This chapter introduces and shows you how to configure the broadcast storm control feature 15 1 Broadcast Storm Control Setup Broadcast storm control limits the number of broadcast multicast and destination lookup failure DLF packets the Switch receives per second on the ports When the maximum number of allowable broadcast multicast and or DLF packets is reached per second the subsequent packets are discarded Enable this feature to reduce broadcast multicast and or DLF packets in your network You can specify limits for each packet type on each port Click Advanced Application gt Broadcast Storm Control in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown next Figure 77 Advanced Application gt Broadcast Storm Control Broadcast Storm Control g Active B Port Broadcast pkt s Multicast pkt s DLF pkt s 3 M RR a CRI NIE RE 2 prb l nb oE j 4 pp ub of 6 a a a a LL henge HH v ML uA SW vA mM A emo WE VES umbra d Apply Cancel XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 15 Broadcast Storm Control The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 35 Advanced Application gt Broadcast Storm Control LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to enable traffic storm control on the Sw
218. elp has descriptions of individual screens and some supplementary information Click the Help link from a web configurator screen to view an online help description of that screen XGS 4728F User s Guide Initial Setup Example This chapter shows how to set up the Switch for an example network 5 1 Overview The following lists the configuration steps for the example network Configure an IP interface Configure DHCP server settings Create a VLAN Set port VLAN ID Enable RIP 5 1 1 Configuring an IP Interface On a layer 3 switch an IP interface also known as an IP routing domain is not bound to a physical port The default IP address of the Switch is 192 168 1 1 with a subnet mask of 255 255 255 0 In the example network since the RD network is already in the same IP interface as the Switch you don t need to create an IP interface for it However if you want to have the Sales network on a different routing domain you need to create a XGS 4728F User s Guide 55 Chapter 5 Initial Setup Example new IP interface This allows the Switch to route traffic between the RD and Sales networks Figure 21 dl V lh Re E 4 Y Initial Setup Network Example IP Interface 1 Connect your computer to the MGMT port that is used only for management Make sure your computer is in the same subnet as the MGMT port 2 Open your web browser and enter 192 168 0 1 the default MGMT port IP addr
219. ementation 350 SSH Secure Shell 348 SSL Secure Socket Layer 350 standby ports 154 static bindings 231 static MAC address 115 static MAC forwarding 104 107 115 static multicast address 119 static multicast forwarding 119 static routes 273 274 static trunking example 160 Static VLAN 100 static VLAN control 102 tagging 102 status 46 71 LED 41 link aggregation 155 OSPF 280 port 71 port details 73 power 79 STP 134 138 143 VLAN 99 VRRP 318 STP 125 266 398 bridge ID 135 138 bridge priority 133 137 configuration 132 136 140 designated bridge 126 forwarding delay 133 137 Hello BPDU 126 Hello Time 133 135 137 139 how it works 126 Max Age 133 135 137 139 path cost 126 134 137 port priority 134 137 port state 127 root port 126 status 134 138 143 terminology 125 vs loop guard 255 stub area 277 284 stub area See also OSPF 284 subnet based VLANs 103 and DHCP VLAN 105 and priority 104 configuration 104 summary address 285 286 switch lockout 52 switch reset 52 switch setup 84 switching 398 syntax conventions 5 syslog 235 359 protocol 359 server setup 361 settings 360 setup 360 severity levels 359 system information 78 XGS 4728F User s Guide Index system log 357 system reboot 331 T TACACS 216 setup 219 TACACS 4 Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus 215 tagged VLAN 95 temperature 394 temperature indicator 78 time current 81 time zone
220. er s Guide Chapter 24 Multicast screen as shown See Section 24 1 4 on page 200 for more information on IGMP Snooping VLAN Figure 104 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Snooping VLAN VLAN Index n Mode Name VID p da Name VID Delete AN Multicast Setting C auto C fixed Apply Cancel Add Cancel Clear Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 61 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Snooping VLAN LABEL DESCRIPTION Mode Select auto to have the Switch learn multicast group membership information of any VLANs automatically Select fixed to have the Switch only learn multicast group membership information of the VLAN s that you specify below In either auto or fixed mode the Switch can learn up to 16 VLANs including up to five VLANs you configured in the MVR screen For example if you have configured one multicast VLAN in the MVR screen you can only specify up to 15 VLANs in this screen The Switch drops any IGMP control messages which do not belong to these 16 VLANs Note You must also enable IGMP snooping in the Multicast Setting screen first Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
221. ery Protocol packets so that other Cisco devices can be discovered through the service provider s network STP VTP Select this option to have the Switch tunnel STP Spanning Tree Protocol packets so that STP can run properly across the service provider s network and spanning trees can be set up based on bridge information from all local and remote networks Select this option to have the Switch tunnel VTP VLAN Trunking Protocol packets so that all customer switches can use consistent VLAN configuration through the service provider s network Point to Point The Switch supports PAgP Port Aggregation Protocol LACP Link Aggregation Control Protocol and UDLD UniDirectional Link Detection tunneling for a point to point topology Both PAgP and UDLD are Cisco s proprietary data link layer protocols PAgP is similar to LACP and used to set up a logical aggregation of Ethernet ports automatically UDLD is to determine the link s physical status and detect a unidirectional link PAGP Select this option to have the Switch send PAgP packets to a peer to automatically negotiate and build a logical port aggregation LACP Select this option to have the Switch send LACP packets to a peer to dynamically creates and manages trunk groups UDLD Select this option to have the Switch send UDLD packets to a peer s port it connected to monitor the physical status of a link Mode Select Access to have the Switc
222. ery port is either a trusted port or an untrusted port for ARP inspection This setting is independent of the trusted untrusted setting for DHCP snooping You can also specify the maximum rate at which the Switch receives ARP packets on untrusted ports The Switch does not discard ARP packets on trusted ports for any reason The Switch discards ARP packets on untrusted ports in the following situations The sender s information in the ARP packet does not match any of the current bindings The rate at which ARP packets arrive is too high 26 1 2 3 Syslog The Switch can send syslog messages to the specified syslog server Chapter 42 on page 359 when it forwards or discards ARP packets The Switch can consolidate log messages and send log messages in batches to make this mechanism more efficient 26 1 2 4 Configuring ARP Inspection Follow these steps to configure ARP inspection on the Switch 1 Configure DHCP snooping See Section 26 1 1 4 on page 233 Note It is recommended you enable DHCP snooping at least one day before you enable ARP inspection so that the Switch has enough time to build the binding table 2 Enable ARP inspection on each VLAN 3 Configure trusted and untrusted ports and specify the maximum number of ARP packets that each port can receive per second 26 2 IP Source Guard Use this screen to look at the current bindings for DHCP snooping and ARP inspection Bindings are used by DHCP snooping and ARP inspec
223. es you make the search here into the static MAC filtering table see Section 12 1 on page 123 The MAC address es will be removed from the MAC table and all traffic sent from the MAC address es will be blocked by the Switch Search Click this to search data in the MAC table according to your input criteria Transfer Click this to perform the MAC address transferring you selected in the Transfer Type field Cancel Click this to begin configuring the search criteria afresh Index This is the incoming frame index number MAC Address This is the MAC address of the device from which this incoming frame came VID This is the VLAN group to which this frame belongs Port This is the port from which the above MAC address was learned Type This shows whether the MAC address is dynamic learned by the Switch or static manually entered in the Static MAC Forwarding screen XGS 4728F User s Guide 373 Chapter 44 MAC Table 374 XGS 4728F User s Guide IP Table This chapter introduces the IP table 45 1 IP Table Overview The IP Table screen shows how packets are forwarded or filtered across the Switch s ports When a device which may belong to a VLAN group sends a packet which is forwarded to a port on the Switch the IP address of the device is shown on the Switch s IP Table The IP Table also shows whether the IP address is dynamic learned by the Switch or static belonging
224. es you to a screen where you can activate MAC address learning and set the maximum number of MAC addresses to learn on a port Classifier This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the Switch to group packets based on the specified criteria Policy Rule This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the Switch to perform special treatment on the grouped packets Queuing This link takes you to a screen where you can configure queuing with Method associated queue weights for each port VLAN Stacking This link takes you to a screen where you can activate and configure VLAN stacking Multicast This link takes you to screen where you can configure various multicast features IGMP snooping and create multicast VLANs AAA This link takes you to a screen where you can configure authentication authorization and accounting services via external servers The external servers can be either RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service or TACACS Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus IP Source This link takes you to screens where you can configure filtering of Guard unauthorized DHCP and ARP packets in your network Loop Guard This link takes you to a screen where you can configure protection against network loops that occur on the edge of your network XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 4 The Web Configurator Table 5 Navigation Panel Links continued
225. ess in the address bar to access the web configurator See Section 4 2 on page 45 for more information 3 Click Basic Setting and I P Setup in the navigation panel 4 Configure the related fields in the I P Setup screen AEn NN Default Gateway Domain Name Server Default Management Management IP Address IP Address IP Subnet Mask Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 in band C Outof band 182 168 0 1 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 Apply Cancel P Interface IP Address IP Subnet Mask VID Index IP Address 1 192 168 1 12 182 168 2 1 255 255 255 0 2 Add Cancel IP Subnet Mask VID 255 255 255 0 1 E Delete Cancel EXAMPLE For the Sales network enter 192 168 2 1 as the IP address and 255 255 255 0 as the subnet mask XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 5 Initial Setup Example 5 Inthe VID field enter the ID of the VLAN group to which you want this IP interface to belong This is the same as the VLAN ID you configure in the Static VLAN screen 6 Click Add to save the settings to the run time memory Settings in the run time memory are lost when the Switch s power is turned off 5 1 2 Configuring DHCP Server Settings You can set the Switch to assign network information such as the IP address DNS server etc to DHCP clients on the network For the example network configure two DHCP client pools on the Switch for the DHCP clients in the RD and Sales networks
226. ess es in the Remote Management screen does not match the client IP address If it does not match the Switch will disconnect the FTP session immediately XGS 4728F User s Guide 335 Chapter 39 Maintenance XGS 4728F User s Guide Access Control This chapter describes how to control access to the Switch 40 1 Access Control Overview A console port and FTP are allowed one session each Telnet and SSH share nine sessions up to five Web sessions five different usernames and passwords and or limitless SNMP access control sessions are allowed Table 122 Access Control Overview Console Port SSH Telnet FTP Web SNMP One session Share up to nine One session Up to five No limit sessions accounts A console port access control session and Telnet access control session cannot coexist when multi login is disabled See the Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide for more information on disabling multi login 40 2 The Access Control Main Screen Click Management Access Control in the navigation panel to display the main screen as shown Figure 208 Management Access Control ED Access Control SNMP Logins Service Access Control Remote Management Click Here Click Here Click Here Click Here XGS 4728F User s Guide 337 Chapter 40 Access Control 40 3 About SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is an application layer protoc
227. estination Gc Any k b C Socket Number c Add Cancel Cleer Layer 2 G Any 1 MAC Address macl 1 9 ps 1 e P 1 T 7 ourc C Any Port n E Destination MAC Address E en After you have configured a classifier you can configure a policy to define action s on the classified traffic flow See Chapter 21 on page 179 for information on configuring a policy rule XGS 4728F User s Guide 21 1 21 1 1 21 1 2 Policy Rule This chapter shows you how to configure policy rules Policy Rules Overview A classifier distinguishes traffic into flows based on the configured criteria refer to Chapter 20 on page 173 for more information A policy rule ensures that a traffic flow gets the requested treatment in the network DiffServ DiffServ Differentiated Services is a class of service CoS model that marks packets so that they receive specific per hop treatment at DiffServ compliant network devices along the route based on the application types and traffic flow Packets are marked with DiffServ Code Points DSCPs indicating the level of service desired This allows the intermediary DiffServ compliant network devices to handle the packets differently depending on the code points without the need to negotiate paths or remember state information for every flow In addition applications do not have to request a particular service or give advanced notice of where the traffic
228. et mask between a DHCP client and a DHCP server Once the DHCP client obtains an P address and can connect to the network network information renewal is done between the DHCP client and the DHCP server without the help of the Switch The Switch can be configured as a global DHCP relay This means that the Switch forwards all DHCP requests from all domains to the same DHCP server You can also configure the Switch to relay DHCP information based on the VLAN membership of the DHCP clients DHCP Relay Agent Information The Switch can add information about the source of client DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server by adding Relay Agent I nformation This helps provide authentication about the source of the requests The DHCP server can then provide an IP address based on this information Please refer to RFC 3046 for more details The DHCP Relay Agent I nformation feature adds an Agent Information field to the Option 82 field The Option 82 field is in the DHCP headers of client DHCP request frames that the Switch relays to a DHCP server Relay Agent I nformation can include the System Name of the Switch if you select this option You can change the System Name in Basic Settings gt General Setup The following describes the DHCP relay information that the Switch sends to the DHCP server Table 112 Relay Agent Information FIELD LABELS DESCRIPTION Slot ID 1 byte This value is always 0 for stand alone swit
229. et the above fields back to the factory defaults Index This field displays an index number of an entry Name This field displays a descriptive name of a virtual link Peer Router ID This field displays the ID that uses the format of an IP address in dotted decimal notation of a peer border router Authenticatio n This field displays the authentication method used Same as Area None Simple or MD5 Key ID When the Authentication field displays MD5 this field displays the identification number of the key used Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes XGS 4728F User s Guide IGMP This chapter shows you how to configure the Switch as a multicast router See also Section 24 4 on page 203 for information on IGMP snooping 34 1 IGMP Overview IP multicast is an IETF standard for distributing data to multiple recipients The following figure shows a multicast session and the relationship between a multicast server multicast routers and multicast hosts A multicast server transmits multicast packets and multicast routers forward multicast packets to multicast hosts Figure 157 IP Multicast Multicast Routers Hosts A host can decide to join or leave a multicast group at any time A host can also be a member of more than one multicast group Multicast groups are identified by IP addresses in the Class D r
230. evel 6 Typically used for voice traffic that is especially sensitive to jitter jitter is the variations in delay Level 5 Typically used for video that consumes high bandwidth and is sensitive to jitter XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting Table 11 Basic Setting Switch Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Level 4 Typically used for controlled load latency sensitive traffic such as SNA Systems Network Architecture transactions Level 3 Typically used for excellent effort or better than best effort and would include important business traffic that can tolerate some delay Level 2 This is for spare bandwidth Level 1 This is typically used for non critical background traffic such as bulk transfers that are allowed but that should not affect other applications and users Level 0 Typically used for best effort traffic Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 8 6 IP Setup Use the IP Setup screen to configure the default gateway device the default domain name server and add IP domains 8 6 1 IP Interfaces The Switch needs an IP address for it to be managed over the network The fa
231. f ddm 2 1 the device operating parameters such as transceiver temperature laser bias current transmitted optical power received optical power and transceiver supply voltage is above or below a factory set normal range DDMI RxPowerEventClear 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 46 31 This trap is sent when all 2 2 device operating parameters DDMI TemperatureEventCl return to the normal ear operating range DDMI TxBiasEventClear DDMI TxPowerEventClear DDMI VoltageEventClear Table 126 AAA Traps OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION authenticatio authenticationFailure 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 5 This trap is sent when n authentication fails due to incorrect user name and or password AuthenticationFailureEven 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 46 3 This trap is sent when tOn 1 2 1 authentication fails due to incorrect user name and or password RADIUSNotReachableEve 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 46 3 This trap is sent when there is ntOn 1 2 1 no response message from the RADIUS server RADIUSNotReachableEve 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 46 3 This trap is sent when the ntClear 1 2 2 RADIUS server can be reached accounting RADI USAcctNotReachable 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 46 3 This trap is sent when there is EventOn 1 2 1 no response message from the RADIUS accounting server RADIUSAcctNotReachable 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 46 3 This trap is sent when the EventClear 1 2 2 RADIUS accounting server can be reached
232. f it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 40 3 6 Setting Up Login Accounts Up to five people one administrator and four non administrators may access the Switch via web configurator at any one time An administrator is someone who can both view and configure Switch changes The username for the Administrator is always admin The default administrator password is 1234 Note It is highly recommended that you change the default administrator password 1234 A non administrator username is something other than admin is someone who can view but not configure Switch settings Click Management gt Access Control gt Logins to view the screen as shown Figure 207 Management gt Access Control gt Logins t Logins Administrator Old Password New Password Retype to confirm Login Please record your new password whenever you change it The system will lock you out if you have forgotten your password Edit Logins User Name Password Retype to confirm deno aS ie M DE EE E Ecl oro REL oL sie d Access Control m MERE i Apply Cancel XGS 4728F User s Guide 347 Chapter 40 Access Control The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 131 Management
233. ffServ gt 2 rate 3 Color Marker continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Commit Rate Peak Rate Specify the Commit Information Rate CIR for this port Specify the Peak Information Rate PIR for this port DSCP Use this section to specify the DSCP values that you want to assign to packets based on the color they are marked via TRTCM green Specify the DSCP value to use for packets with low packet loss priority yellow Specify the DSCP value to use for packets with medium packet loss priority red Specify the DSCP value to use for packets with high packet loss priority Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 36 4 DSCP to IEEE 802 1p Priority Settings You can configure the DSCP to IEEE 802 1p mapping to allow the Switch to prioritize all traffic based on the incoming DSCP value according to the DiffServ to IEEE 802 1p mapping table The following table shows the default DSCP to IEEE802 1p mapping Table 108 Default DSCP IEEE 802 1p Mapping DSCP VALUE 0 7 8 15 16 23 24 31 32 39 40 47 48 55 56 63 IEEE 802 1p 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 XG
234. fig 331 configuration file 52 backup 333 restore 52 332 saving 330 configuration saving 51 console port settings 41 copying port settings See port cloning copyright 409 CPU management port 110 current date 81 current time 81 D Database Description DD 278 daylight saving time 81 default gateway 314 Designated Router DR and OSPF 279 DHCP 307 client IP pool 314 configuration options 307 modes 307 relay agent 307 relay example 315 server 307 setup 313 DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol 307 DHCP relay option 82 233 DHCP snooping 61 231 232 configuring 233 DHCP relay option 82 233 trusted ports 232 untrusted ports 232 DHCP snooping database 232 diagnostics 357 Ethernet port test 358 ping 358 system log 357 Differentiated Service DiffServ 299 DiffServ 299 activate 302 and TRTCM 304 DS field 299 DSCP 299 DSCP to IEEE802 1p mapping 305 network example 300 PHB 299 dimensions 393 disclaimer 409 double tagged frames 191 DR Designated Router 279 DS Differentiated Services 299 DSCP DSCP to IEEE802 1p mapping 305 service level 299 what it does 299 DSCP DiffServ Code Point 299 DVMRP XGS 4728F User s Guide Index Autonomous System 295 default timer setting 298 error message 297 graft 296 how it works 295 implementation 295 probe 296 prune 296 report 296 setup 296 terminology 296 threshold 297 DVMRP Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol 295 dy
235. figuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XGS 4728F User s Guide DHCP This chapter shows you how to configure the DHCP feature 37 1 DHCP Overview 37 1 1 37 1 2 DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol RFC 2131 and RFC 2132 allows individual computers to obtain TCP IP configuration at start up from a server You can configure the Switch as a DHCP server or a DHCP relay agent When configured as a server the Switch provides the TCP IP configuration for the clients If you configure the Switch as a relay agent then the Switch forwards DHCP requests to DHCP server on your network If you don t configure the Switch as a DHCP server or relay agent then you must have a DHCP server in the broadcast domain of the client computers or else the client computers must be configured manually DHCP Modes The Switch can be configured as a DHCP server or DHCP relay agent f you configure the Switch as a DHCP server it will maintain the pool of IP addresses along with subnet masks DNS server and default gateway information and distribute them to your LAN computers f there is already a DHCP server on your network then you can configure the Switch as a DHCP relay agent When the Switch receives a request from a computer on your network it contacts the DHCP server for the necessary IP information and then relays the assigned information back to the computer DHCP Configuratio
236. firmware and configuration file maintenance as well as reboot the system Access Control This link takes you to screens where you can change the system login password and configure SNMP and remote management Diagnostic This link takes you to screens where you can view system logs and can test port s Syslog This link takes you to screens where you can setup system logs and a system log server Cluster This link takes you to a screen where you can configure clustering Management management and view its status MAC Table This link takes you to a screen where you can view the MAC address and VLAN ID of a device attach to a port You can also view what kind of device it is IP Table This link takes you to a screen where you can view the IP addresses and VLAN ID of a device attached to a port You can also view what kind of device it is ARP Table This link takes you to a screen where you can view the MAC address IP address resolution table XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 4 The Web Configurator Table 5 Navigation Panel Links continued LINK DESCRIPTION Routing Table This link takes you to a screen where you can view the routing table Configure This link takes you to a screen where you can copy attributes of one port Clone to an other port s 4 3 1 Change Your Password After you log in for the first time it is recommended you change the default administrato
237. g capability to a layer 3 switch that runs both the IPv4 protocol with IP Multicast support and the IGMP protocol The DVMRP metric is a hop count of 32 IGMP is a protocol used for joining or leaving a multicast group You must have IGMP enabled when you enable DVMRP otherwise you see the screen as in Figure 164 on page 297 35 2 How DVMRP Works DVMRP uses the Reverse Path Multicasting RPM algorithm to generate an IP Multicast delivery tree Multicast packets are forwarded along these multicast tree branches DVMRP dynamically learns host membership information using Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP The trees are updated dynamically to track the membership of individual groups 1 Initially an advertisement multicast packet is broadcast B in the following figure 2 DVMRP enabled Layer 3 devices that do not have any hosts in their networks that belong to this multicast group send back a prune message P 3 If hosts later join the multicast group a graft message G to undo the prune is sent to the parent XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 35 DVMRP 4 The final multicast M after pruning and grafting is shown in the next figure Figure 162 How DVMRP Works Qc e9 CS wu 35 2 1 DVMRP Terminology DVMRP probes are used to discover other DVMRP Neighbors on a network DVMRP reports are used to exchange DVMRP source routing information These packets are used to build the DVMRP multicast routing t
238. g VLAN Example NE 1 VLAN 1 i l i y Ns 3 I I O Qnn d mcm mm i Nie VLAN 1 Niere VLAN 2 AE i E i WI P 3 i HH N M ios Ss a x9 i a 8 I I NmXON 1 1 1 Mex ee Or 4A x J 1 2 Ways to Manage the Switch Use any of the following methods to manage the Switch Web Configurator This is recommended for everyday management of the Switch using a supported web browser See Chapter 4 on page 45 Command Line Interface Line commands offer an alternative to the Web Configurator and may be necessary to configure advanced features See the CLI Reference Guide FTP Use File Transfer Protocol for firmware upgrades and configuration backup restore See Section 39 8 on page 333 SNMP The device can be monitored and or managed by an SNMP manager See Section 40 3 on page 338 1 3 Good Habits for Managing the Switch Do the following things regularly to make the Switch more secure and to manage the Switch more effectively Change the password Use a password that s not easy to guess and that consists of different types of characters such as numbers and letters Write down the password and put it in a safe place XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch Back up the configuration and make sure you know how to restore it Restoring an earlier working configuration may be useful if the device becomes uns
239. ge of ports by using a dash Example e 2 4 6 indicates that ports 2 4 and 6 are the destination ports 2 6 indicates that ports 2 through 6 are the destination ports Basic Setting Select which port settings configured in the Basic Setting menus should be copied to the destination port s Advanced Application Select which port settings configured in the Advanced Application menus should be copied to the destination ports Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XGS 4728F User s Guide PART VI Troubleshootinc Specifications amp Troubleshooting 387 Product Specifications 393 Troubleshooting This chapter offers some suggestions to solve problems you might encounter The potential problems are divided into the following categories Power Hardware Connections and LEDs Switch Access and Login Switch Configuration 49 1 Power Hardware Connections and LEDs The Switch does not turn on None of the LEDs turn on 1 Make sure the Switch is turned on in DC models or if the DC power supply is connected in AC DC models Make sure you are using the power a
240. gress incoming and Both Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 152 XGS 4728F User s Guide Link Aggregation This chapter shows you how to logically aggregate physical links to form one logical higher bandwidth link 17 1 Link Aggregation Overview Link aggregation trunking is the grouping of physical ports into one logical higher capacity link You may want to trunk ports if for example it is cheaper to use multiple lower speed links than to under utilize a high speed but more costly single port link However the more ports you aggregate then the fewer available ports you have A trunk group is one logical link containing multiple ports The beginning port of each trunk group must be physically connected to form a trunk group The Switch supports both static and dynamic link aggregation Note In a properly planned network it is recommended to implement static link aggregation only This ensures increased network stability and control over the trunk groups on your Switch See Section 17 6 on page 160 for a static port trunking example 17 2 Dynamic Link Aggregation The Switch adheres to the IEEE 802 3
241. gt Access Control gt Remote Management Entry Active 1 Vv 2 rH 3 m 4 m Secured Client Setup Remote Management Access Control Start Address End Address Telnet FIP HTTP ICMP SNMP SSH HTTPS o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Iv Iv Iv Iv iv Iv Iv o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ri n r n r n n o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 n m r rH m O r 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D m r r Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 133 Management gt Access Control gt Remote Management End Address LABEL DESCRIPTION Entry This is the client set index number A client set is a group of one or more trusted computers from which an administrator may use a service to manage the Switch Active Select this check box to activate this secured client set Clear the check box if you wish to temporarily disable the set without deleting it Start Configure the IP address range of trusted computers from which you can Address manage this Switch The Switch checks if the client IP address of a computer requesting a service or protocol matches the range set here The Switch immediately disconnects the session if it does not match Telnet FTP Select services that may be used for managing the Switch from the HTTP ICMP specified trusted computers SNMP SSH HTTPS Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so
242. h encapsulate the incoming layer 2 protocol packets and forward them to the tunnel port s Select Access for ingress ports at the edge of the service provider s network Note You can enable L2PT services for STP LACP VTP CDP UDLD and PAGP on the access port s only Select Tunnel for egress ports at the edge of the service provider s network The Switch decapsulates the encapsulated layer 2 protocol packets received on a tunnel port by changing the destination MAC address to the original one and then forward them to an access port If the service s is not enabled on an access port the protocol packets are dropped Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XGS 4728F User s Guide Private VLAN This chapter shows you how to configure the Switch to prevent communications between ports in a VLAN 30 1 Private VLAN Overview Private VLAN allows you to do port isolation within a VLAN in a simple way You specify which port s in a VLAN is not isolated by adding it to the promiscuous port list The Switch automatically adds other ports in this VLAN to the isolated port list and blocks traffic between the isolated ports A prom
243. he IGMP filtering profile to use for this port Otherwise select Default to prohibit the port from joining any multicast group You can create IGMP filtering profiles in the Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Filtering Profile screen IGMP Querier Mode The Switch treats an IGMP query port as being connected to an IGMP multicast router or server The Switch forwards IGMP join or leave packets to an IGMP query port Select Auto to have the Switch use the port as an IGMP query port if the port receives IGMP query packets Select Fixed to have the Switch always use the port as an IGMP query port Select this when you connect an IGMP multicast server to the port Select Edge to stop the Switch from using the port as an IGMP query port The Switch will not keep any record of an IGMP router being connected to this port The Switch does not forward IGMP join or leave packets to this port Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 24 4 IGMP Snooping VLAN Click Advanced Applications Multicast in the navigation panel Click the Multicast Setting link and then the IGMP Snooping VLAN link to display the XGS 4728F Us
244. he firmware on your computer firmware bin to the Switch and renames it to ras Similarly put config cfg config transfers the configuration file on your computer config cfg to the Switch and renames it to config Likewise get config config cfg transfers the configuration file on the Switch to your computer and renames it to config cfg See Table 120 on page 334 for more information on filename conventions 7 Enter quit to exit the ftp prompt 39 8 3 GUl based FTP Clients The following table describes some of the commands that you may see in GUI based FTP clients Table 121 General Commands for GUI based FTP Clients COMMAND DESCRIPTION Host Address Enter the address of the host server Login Type Anonymous This is when a user I D and password is automatically supplied to the server for anonymous access Anonymous logins will work only if your ISP or service administrator has enabled this option Normal The server requires a unique User ID and Password to login Transfer Type Transfer files in either ASCII plain text format or in binary mode Configuration and firmware files should be transferred in binary mode Initial Remote Specify the default remote directory path Directory Initial Local Specify the default local directory path Directory 39 8 4 FTP Restrictions FTP will not work when FTP service is disabled in the Service Access Control screen The IP addr
245. he following figure shows the navigating components of a web configurator screen Figure 17 Web Configurator Home Screen Status E Save Status J Logout Help ED Por Status g ced Application Port Name Link State LACP TxPkts RxPkts e Ka Rx KB s D E Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 oO 00 7 1 ISGSTMELERDN 2 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 00 00000 Management 3 Down STOP Disabled fi 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 4 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 00 00 5 Down STOP Disabled o 0 o 0 0 00 0 00 00 B Down STOP Disabled 0 0 o 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 1 Down STOP Disabled fi 0 o 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 8 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 3 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 10 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 11 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 12 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 13 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 14 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 15 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 o 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 16 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 i Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 18 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 19 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 n Maum ETAD Nieshiad n n n nn nn Annn zl C Any C nU Clear Counter A Click the menu items to open submenu links and then click on a submenu link to open the screen in the main window B C D E These are quick links which allow you to perform certain tasks no matter which screen you are currently working in B Click t
246. he slower the media the higher the cost see Table 25 on page 126 for more information XGS 4728F User s Guide 137 Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol Table 30 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MRSTP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Tree Select which STP tree configuration this port should participate in Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 13 7 Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status Click Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol in the navigation panel to display the status screen as shown next See Section 13 1 on page 125 for more information on MRSTP Note This screen is only available after you activate MRSTP on the Switch Figure 73 Advanced Application Spanning Tree Protocol Status MRSTP Spanning Tree Protocol Status Configuration RSTP MRSTP MSTP Spanning Tree Protocol MRSTP Tree T Bridge Root Our Bridge Bridge ID 8000 001349000002 8000 001349000002 Hello Time second 2 2 Max Age second 20 20 Forwarding Delay second 15 15 Cost to Bridge 0 Port ID 0x0000 Topology Changed Times 0 Time Since Last Change 0 00 00 Th
247. he syslog server No displays if the device is not to send logs to the syslog server P Address This field displays the IP address of the syslog server Log Level This field displays the severity level of the logs that the device is to send to this syslog server Delete Select an entry s Delete check box and click Delete to remove the entry Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 42 Syslog XGS 4728F User s Guide Cluster Management This chapter introduces cluster management 43 1 Clustering Management Status Overview Cluster Management allows you to manage switches through one Switch called the cluster manager The switches must be directly connected and be in the same VLAN group so as to be able to communicate with one another Table 138 ZyXEL Clustering Management Specifications Maximum number of cluster 24 members Cluster Member Models Cluster member models must be compatible with ZyXEL cluster management implementation Cluster Manager The cluster manager is the Switch through which you manage the cluster member switches Cluster Members Cluster members are the switches being managed by the cluster manager switch XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 43 Cluster Management In the following example switch A in the basement is the cluster manager and the other switches on the upper floors of the building are cluster members
248. he value you set in the TOS field XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 21 Policy Rule Table 50 Advanced Application gt Policy Rule continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Diffserv Select No change to keep the TOS and or DSCP fields in the packets Select Set the packet s TOS field to set the TOS field with the value you configure in the TOS field Select Replace the IP TOS with the 802 1 priority value to replace the TOS field with the value you configure in the Priority field Select Set the Diffserv Codepoint field in the frame to set the DSCP field with the value you configure in the DSCP field Outgoing Select Send the packet to the mirror port to send the packet to the mirror port Select Send the packet to the egress port to send the packet to the egress port Metering Select Enable to activate bandwidth limitation on the traffic flow s then set the actions to be taken on out of profile packets Out of profile Select the action s to be performed for out of profile traffic action Select Drop the packet to discard the out of profile traffic Select Change the DSCP value to replace the DSCP field with the value specified in the Out of profile DSCP field Select Set Out Drop Precedence to mark out of profile traffic and drop it when network is congested Select Do not drop the matching frame previously marked for dropping to queue the frames that are marked to be dropped Add Click Add to i
249. hen this entry will not be deleted from the MAC address table Note If the Aging Time in the Switch Setup screen is set to a lower value then it supersedes this setting See Section 8 5 on page 84 Port This field displays a port number m Use this row to make the setting the same for all ports Use this row first and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this checkbox to permit MAC authentication on this port You must first allow MAC authentication on the Switch before configuring it on each port Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XGS 4728F User s Guide m Port Security This chapter shows you how to set up port security 19 1 About Port Security Port security allows only packets with dynamically learned MAC addresses and or configured static MAC addresses to pass through a port on the Switch The Switch can learn up to 16K MAC addresses in total with no limit on individual ports other than the sum cannot exceed 16K For maximum port security enable this feature disable MAC address learning and configure static MAC address e
250. hin the spanning tree instance Enter priority values between 0 and 61440 in increments of 4096 thus valid values are 4096 8192 12288 16384 20480 24576 28672 32768 36864 40960 45056 49152 53248 57344 and 61440 VLAN Range Enabled VLAN s Enter the start of the VLAN ID range that you want to add or remove from the VLAN range edit area in the Start field Enter the end of the VLAN ID range that you want to add or remove from the VLAN range edit area in the End field Next click Add to add this range of VLAN s to be mapped to the MST instance Remove to remove this range of VLAN s from being mapped to the MST instance Clear to remove all VLAN s from being mapped to this MST instance This field displays which VLAN s are mapped to this MST instance Port This field displays the port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this check box to add this port to the MST instance Priority Configure the priority for each port here Priority decides which port should be disabled when more than one port forms a loop in the Switch Ports with a higher priority numeric value are disabled first The
251. his link to save your configuration into the Switch s nonvolatile memory Nonvolatile memory is saved in the configuration file from which the Switch booted from and it stays the same even if the Switch s power is turned off See Section 39 3 on page 330 for information on saving your settings to a specific configuration file C Click this link to go to the status page of the Switch D Click this link to log out of the web configurator E Click this link to display web help pages The help pages provide descriptions for all of the configuration screens XGS 4728F User s Guide 47 Chapter 4 The Web Configurator In the navigation panel click a main link to reveal a list of submenu links Table 4 Navigation Panel Sub links Overview BASIC SETTING ADVANCED APPLICATION IP APPLICATION MANAGEMENT Advanced Application IP Application System Info General Setup Switch Setup IP Setup Port Setup Ir Basic Setting Advanced Application IP Application Management VLAN Static MAC Forwarding Static Multicast Forwarding Filtering Spanning Tree Protocol Bandwidth Control Broadcast Storm Control Mirroring Link Aggregation Port Authentication Port Security Classifier Policy Rule Queuing Method VLAN Stacking Multicast AAA IP Source Guard Loop Guard VLAN Mapping Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling Private VLAN Advanced Application IP Application Management S
252. his section displays the reasons the Switch has ignored bindings any time it read bindings from the DHCP binding database You can clear these counters by restarting the Switch or using CLI commands See the Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide Binding collisions This field displays the number of bindings the Switch has ignored because the Switch already had a binding with the same MAC address and VLAN ID Invalid interfaces This field displays the number of bindings the Switch has ignored because the port number was a trusted interface or does not exist anymore XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 26 IP Source Guard Table 76 DHCP Snooping continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Parse failures This field displays the number of bindings the Switch has ignored because the Switch was unable to understand the binding in the DHCP binding database Expired leases This field displays the number of bindings the Switch has ignored because the lease time had already expired Unsupported vlans This field displays the number of bindings the Switch has ignored because the VLAN ID does not exist anymore 26 5 DHCP Snooping Configure Use this screen to enable DHCP snooping on the Switch not on specific VLAN specify the VLAN where the default DHCP server is located and configure the DHCP snooping database The DHCP snooping database stores the current bindings on a secure external TFTP se
253. ic multicast frames such as streaming or control frames to specific port s XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 11 Static Multicast Forward Setup Click Advanced Application gt Static Multicast Forwarding to display the configuration screen as shown Figure 61 Advanced Application Static Multicast Forwarding Static Multicast m Entra Active C Name e MAC Address IL 5H mw E M Bh VID dl Port I mel Add Cancel Clear Index Active Name MAC Address VID Port Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 23 Advanced Application gt Static Multicast Forwarding LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to activate your rule You may temporarily deactivate a rule without deleting it by clearing this check box Name Type a descriptive name up to 32 printable ASCII characters for this static multicast MAC address forwarding rule This is for identification only MAC Address Enter a multicast MAC address which identifies the multicast group The last binary bit of the first octet pair in a multicast MAC address must be 1 For example the first octet pair 00000001 is 01 and 00000011 is 03 in hexadecimal so 01 00 5e 00 00 0A and 03 00 5e 00 00 27 are valid multicast MAC addresses VID You can forward frames with matching destination MAC address to port s within a VLAN group Enter the ID that identifies the VLAN group here If yo
254. ication field enter a password 16 character long Cost The interface cost is used for calculating the routing table Enter a number between 0 and 65535 The default interface cost is 15 Priority The priority you assign to the interface is used in router elections to decide which router is going to be the Designated Router DR or the Backup Designated Router BDR You can assign a number between 0 and 255 A priority of 0 means that the router will not participate in router elections Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Clear Click Clear to set the above fields back to the factory defaults Index This field displays the index number for an interface Network This field displays the IP interface information Area ID This field displays the area ID in an IP address format with dotted decimal notation of an area to associate the interface to that area Authenticati on This field displays the authentication method used Same as Area None Simple or MD5 Key ID When the Authentication field displays MD5 this field displays the identification number of the key used Cost This field displays the interface cost used for calculating the ro
255. ield 5 Select Fixed to configure port 2 to be a permanent member of this VLAN 6 Clear the TX Tagging check box to set the Switch to remove VLAN tags before sending 7 Click Add to save the settings to the run time memory Settings in the run time memory are lost when the Switch s power is turned off Figure 33 Tutorial Create a Static VLAN EIR NN ACTIVE Name VLAN Group ID Ada Cancel Clear Port Control Normal 1 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden 3 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden 4 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden 5 Q al c C Fp dde K 24 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden 25 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden 26 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden 27 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden 28 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden VLAN Status Tagging M Tx Tagging M Tx Tagging M TxTagging M TxTagging M Tx Tagging MV Tx Tagging M Tx Tagging M TxTag ing M Tx Tagging XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials 8 Click the VLAN Status link in the Static VLAN screen and then the VLAN Port Setting link in the VLAN Status screen Figure 34 Tutorial Click the VLAN Port Setting Link c VLAN Status J VLAN Port Setting Static VLAN VLAN Search by VID Search The Number of VLAN 2 Index VID Elapsed Time Status 1 1 49 52 07 Static 2 102 0 00 15 Static Change Pages Previous Next 9 Enter 102 in the PVI D field for port 2 to add a tag to incoming untagged frames received on that port s
256. ield displays the maximum temperature measured at this sensor MIN This field displays the minimum temperature measured at this sensor Threshold This field displays the upper temperature limit at this sensor XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting Table 9 Basic Setting gt System Info continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Status This field displays Normal for temperatures below the threshold and Error for those above Fan Speed A properly functioning fan is an essential component along with a RPM sufficiently ventilated cool operating environment in order for the device to stay within the temperature threshold Each fan has a sensor that is capable of detecting and reporting if the fan speed falls below the threshold shown Current This field displays this fan s current speed in Revolutions Per Minute RPM MAX This field displays this fan s maximum speed measured in RPM MIN This field displays this fan s minimum speed measured in RPM 41 is displayed for speeds too small to measure under 2000 RPM Threshold This field displays the minimum speed at which a normal fan should work Status Normal indicates that this fan is functioning above the minimum speed Error indicates that this fan is functioning below the minimum speed Voltage V The power supply for each voltage has a sensor that is capable of detecting and reporting if the voltage falls out of the tolerance range
257. igure XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 40 Access Control 1 HTTPS connection requests from an SSL aware web browser go to port 443 by default on the Switch s WS web server 2 HTTP connection requests from a web browser go to port 80 by default on the Switch s WS web server Figure 210 HTTPS Implementation WS 49 80 HTTPS HTTP Note If you disable HTTP in the Service Access Control screen then the Switch blocks all HTTP connection attempts 40 8 HTTPS Example If you haven t changed the default HTTPS port on the Switch then in your browser enter https Switch IP Address as the web site address where Switch IP Address is the IP address or domain name of the Switch you wish to access 40 8 1 Internet Explorer Warning Messages When you attempt to access the Switch HTTPS server a Windows dialog box pops up asking if you trust the server certificate Click View Certificate if you want to verify that the certificate is from the Switch XGS 4728F User s Guide 351 Chapter 40 Access Control 40 8 2 You see the following Security Alert screen in Internet Explorer Select Yes to proceed to the web configurator login screen if you select No then web configu Figure 211 Security Alert Dialog Box Internet Explorer rator access is blocked o A o amp Netscape Navigator Warning Messages Security Alert Information you exchange with this site cannot be viewed or changed
258. igure the VLAN Setting screen as shown Figure 181 DHCP Relay for Two VLANs Configuration Example c OME Status VID e O DHCP Status oet Relay Server Client IP Pool Starting Address 000 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Size of Client IP Pool IP Subnet Mask Default Gateway Primary DNS Server Secondary DNS Server 0 0 0 0 Relay Remote DHCP Server 1 172231 0 100 Remote DHCP Server 2 0 0 0 0 Remote DHCP Server 3 0 0 0 0 Relay Agent Information Option 82 Information rH Add Cancel Clear VID Type DHCP Status Delete 1 Relay 192 168 1 100 E Delete Cancel XGS 4728F User s Guide VRRP This chapter shows you how to configure and monitor the Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol VRRP on the Switch 38 1 VRRP Overview Each host on a network is configured to send packets to a statically configured default gateway this Switch The default gateway can become a single point of failure Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol VRRP defined in RFC 2338 allows you to create redundant backup gateways to ensure that the default gateway of a host is always available In VRRP a virtual router VR represents a number of physical layer 3 devices An IP address is associated with the virtual router A layer 3 device having the same IP address is the preferred master router while the other Layer 3 devices are the backup routers The master router forwards traffic for the virtual router When th
259. imal Gateway notation for example 192 168 1 254 Domain DNS Domain Name System is for mapping a domain name to its Name Server corresponding IP address and vice versa Enter a domain name server IP address in order to be able to use a domain name instead of an IP address Default Specify which traffic flow I n Band or Out of band the Switch is to send Management packets originating from itself such as SNMP traps or packets with unknown source Select Out of band to have the Switch send the packets to the management port labelled MGMT This means that device s connected to the other port s do not receive these packets Select I n Band to have the Switch send the packets to all ports except the management port labelled MGMT to which connected device s do not receive these packets Management IP Address Use these fields to set the settings for the out of band management port XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting Table 12 Basic Setting gt IP Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION IP Enter the out of band management IP address of your Switch in dotted Address decimal notation For example 192 168 0 1 IP Subnet Enter the IP subnet mask of your Switch in dotted decimal notation for Mask example 255 255 255 0 Default Enter the IP address of the default outgoing gateway in dotted decimal Gateway notation for example 192 168 0 254 Apply Click Apply to save you
260. inding table but the port number was not valid Delete Select this and click Delete to remove the specified entry Delete Click this to remove the selected entries Cancel Click this to clear the Delete check boxes above 26 6 1 ARP Inspection VLAN Status Use this screen to look at various statistics about ARP packets in each VLAN To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection VLAN Status Figure 128 ARP Inspection VLAN Status Show VLAN range ED ARP Inspection VLAN Status ng Status Enabled VLAN C Selected VLAN Start VID End VID VID Received Apply Request Reply Forwarded Dropped The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 81 ARP Inspection VLAN Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Show VLAN range Use this section to specify the VLANs you want to look at in the section below Enabled VLAN Select this to look at all the VLANs on which ARP inspection is enabled in the section below Selected VLAN Select this to look at all the VLANs in a specific range in the section below Then enter the lowest VLAN ID Start VI D and the highest VLAN ID End VID you want to look at Apply Click this to display the specified range of VLANs in the section below XGS 4728F User s Guide 247 Chapter 26 IP Source Guard Table 81 ARP Inspection VLAN Status LABEL DESCRIPT
261. ing VLAN Port based VLAN setting Tag based IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Number of VLAN 4K 1K static maximum Supports GVRP Double tagging for VLAN stacking Protocol Based VLAN Subnet Based VLAN Port Aggregation Supports IEEE 802 3ad static and dynamic LACP port trunking Six groups up to 8 ports each Port mirroring All ports support port mirroring Support port mirroring per IP TCP UDP Bandwidth control Supports rate limiting at 64K increment XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 50 Product Specifications Table 149 Switching Specifications continued Layer 3 IP Capability IPV4 support Features 64 IP routing domains 8K IP address table 12K routing paths Wire speed IP forwarding Routing Unicast RIP V1 V2 OSPF V2 protocols Multicast DVMRP IGMP V1 V2 V3 Static Routing 64 VRRP entries IP services DHCP relay VLAN based DHCP server relay DHCP Snooping Filtering Support L2 MAC filtering L3 IP filtering Layer 4 TCP UDP socket Multicast IGMP snooping IGMP v1 v2 v3 16 VLAN maximum user configurable IGMP filtering 5 MVR entries IGMP timer Multicast reserve group Static multicast IGMP snooping fast leave IGMP snooping statistics IGMP throttling AAA Support RADIUS and TACACS Security IEEE 802 1x port based authentication Static MAC address filtering Static MAC address forwarding MAC Freeze Limiting number of dynamic addresse
262. ink Status 1 Yes 192 168 1 10 24 1 Backup Alive 38 4 2 Two Subnets Example The following figure depicts an example in which two switches share the network traffic Hosts in the two network groups use different default gateways Each switch is configured to backup a virtual router using VRRP You wish to configure switch A as the master router for virtual router VR1 and as a backup for virtual router VR2 On the other hand switch B is the master for VR2 and a backup for VR1 Figure 192 VRRP Configuration Example Two Virtual Router Network 192 168 1 1 172 21 1 1 VRID 1 192 168 1 20 VRID 2 E 192 168 1 10 Default Gateway 192 168 1 21 172 21 1 10 B You need to configure the VRRP Configuration screen for virtual router VR2 on each switch while keeping the VRRP configuration in example 1 for virtual router XGS 4728F User s Guide 325 Chapter 38 VRRP VR1 refer to Section 38 4 2 on page 325 Configure the VRRP parameters on the switches as shown in the figures below Figure 193 VRRP Example 2 VRRP Parameter Settings for VR2 on Switch A Active iv Name Example2 Network 192 168 1 1 24 Virtual Router ID 2 v Advertisement Interval h Preempt Mode iv Priority foo 172 21 1 100 192 168 1 21 0 0 0 0 Uplink Gateway Primary Virtual IP Secondary Virtual IP Active iv jos lampes Network 192 168 1 10 24 Virtual Router ID 2 gt Advertisement I
263. intable ASCII character long in this field Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Click Cancel to discard all changes made in this table Cancel XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 38 VRRP 38 3 2 VRRP Parameters This section describes the VRRP parameters 38 3 2 1 Advertisement Interval The master router sends out Hello messages to let the other backup routers know that it is still up and running The time interval between sending the Hello messages is the advertisement interval By default a Hello message is sent out every second If the backup routers do not receive a Hello message from the master router after this interval expires it is assumed that the master router is down Then the backup router with the highest priority becomes the master router Note All routers participating in the virtual router must use the same advertisement interval 38 3 2 2 Priority Configure the priority level 1 to 254 to set which backup router to take over in case the master router goes down The backup router with the highest priority will take over The priority of the VRRP router that owns the IP address es associated with the virtual router is 255 38 3 2 3 Preempt Mode If the mas
264. irst Select Peer to process any BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Units received on this port Select Tunnel to forward BPDUs received on this port Select Discard to drop any BPDU received on this port Select Network to process a BPDU with no VLAN tag and forward a tagged BPDU CX4 Cable Select the number of meters for the length of the LOGBASE CX4 cable you use to connect between the Switch and another switch for stacking XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting Table 13 Basic Setting gt Port Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting XGS 4728F User s Guide VLAN 95 Static MAC Forward Setup 115 Static Multicast Forward Setup 119 Filtering 123 Spanning Tree Protocol 125 Bandwidth Control 145 Broadcast Storm Control 149 Mirroring 151 Link Aggregation 153 Port Authentication 163 Port Security 169 Classifier 173 Policy Rule 179 Queuing Method 187 VLAN Stacking 191 Multicast 199 AAA 215 IP Source Guard 231 ART Ill Advanced Setup
265. is going DSCP and Per Hop Behavior DiffServ defines a new DS Differentiated Services field to replace the Type of Service TOS field in the IP header The DS field contains a 2 bit unused field and a 6 bit DSCP field which can define up to 64 service levels The following figure illustrates the DS field DSCP is backward compatible with the three precedence bits in the ToS octet so that non DiffServ compliant ToS enabled network device will not conflict with the DSCP mapping DSCP 6 bits Unused 2 bits XGS 4728F User s Guide 179 Chapter 21 Policy Rule The DSCP value determines the forwarding behavior the PHB Per Hop Behavior that each packet gets across the DiffServ network Based on the marking rule different kinds of traffic can be marked for different kinds of forwarding Resources can then be allocated according to the DSCP values and the configured policies 21 2 Configuring Policy Rules You must first configure a classifier in the Classifier screen Refer to Section 20 2 on page 173 for more information XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 21 Policy Rule Click Advanced Applications Policy Rule in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 94 Advanced Application gt Policy Rule Active Name Classifier s General Metering Bandwidth Kbps Out of Profile Parameters oem 1 DSCP Priority Ov DSCP TOS Ov Forwarding No change Discard the packe
266. iscuous port can communicate with any port in the same VLAN An isolated port can communicate with the promiscuous port s only Note You can have up to one private VLAN rule for each VLAN Figure 144 Private VLAN Example Nae 7 VLAN 123 Isolated ports 2 6 l Promiscuous port 10 eee s 9 Note Make sure you keep at least one port in the promiscuous port list for a VLAN with private VLAN enabled Otherwise this VLAN is blocked from the whole network XGS 4728F User s Guide 267 Chapter 30 Private VLAN 30 2 Configuring Private VLAN Click Advanced Application gt Private VLAN in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 145 Advanced Application Private VLAN Active Name VLAN ID OLAS Promiscuous Ports Index Active Add Cancel Clear Name VLAN Promiscuous Ports Delete The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 90 Advanced Application Private VLAN LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Check this box to enable private VLAN in a VLAN Name Enter a descriptive name up to 32 printable ASCII characters for identification purposes VLAN ID Enter a VLAN ID from 1 to 4094 This is the VLAN to which this rule applies Promiscuous Ports Enter the number of the port s that can communicate with any ports in the same VLAN Other ports belonging to this VLAN will be added to the isolation list and can
267. itch Clear this check box to disable this feature Port This field displays a port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Broadcast Select this option and specify how many broadcast packets the port pkt s receives per second Multicast pkt s Select this option and specify how many multicast packets the port receives per second DLF pkt s Select this option and specify how many destination lookup failure DLF packets the port receives per second Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XGS 4728F User s Guide Mirroring This chapter discusses port mirroring setup screens 16 1 Port Mirroring Setup Port mirroring allows you to copy a traffic flow to a monitor port the port you copy the traffic to in order that you can examine the traffic from the monitor port without interference Click Advanced Application gt Mirroring in the navigation p
268. k Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes 33 5 Configuring OSPF Redistribution Use this screen to configure route redistribution and summary addresses Route redistribution is used when other routers which use RIP routing protocol and or static routes need to exchange routing information with the Switch using OSPF routing protocol A summary address is used to cover more than one routing entries in order to reduce the routing table size In the OSPF Configuration screen click Redistribute to display the OSPF Redistribution screen Figure 154 IP Application gt OSPF Configuration gt Redistribute ORS d b Configure Redistribute Route Active Type Metric value RIP O 18 15 Static O 18 15 Apply Cancel Summary address Subnet mask Add Cancel Index Summary address Subnet mask Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 100 IP Application gt OSPF Configuration gt Redistribute LABEL DESCRIPTION Redistribute Route redistribution allows your Switch to import and translate external Route routes learned through RIP routing protocol or configured manually Static into the OSPF network transparently Active Select this option to activate route redistribution for routes learned through the selected protocol XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 33 OSPF Table
269. l based on the manager agent model The manager issues a request and the agent returns responses using the following protocol operations Table 123 SNMP Commands COMMAND DESCRIPTION Get Allows the manager to retrieve an object variable from the agent GetNext Allows the manager to retrieve the next object variable from a table or list within an agent In SNMPv1 when a manager wants to retrieve all elements of a table from an agent it initiates a Get operation followed by a series of GetNext operations Set Allows the manager to set values for object variables within an agent Trap Used by the agent to inform the manager of some events 40 3 1 SNMP v3 and Security SNMP v3 enhances security for SNMP management SNMP managers can be required to authenticate with agents before conducting SNMP management sessions Security can be further enhanced by encrypting the SNMP messages sent from the managers Encryption protects the contents of the SNMP messages When the contents of the SNMP messages are encrypted only the intended recipients can read them 40 3 2 Supported MIBs MIBs let administrators collect statistics and monitor status and performance The Switch supports the following MI Bs SNMP MIB II RFC 1213 RFC 1157 SNMP v1 RFC 1493 Bridge MIBs RFC 1643 Ethernet MIBs RFC 1155 SMI RFC 2674 SNMPv2 SNMPv2c RFC 1757 RMON SNMPv2 SNMPv2c or later version compliant with RFC 20
270. l network segment and 224 0 0 9 is used to send RIP routing information to all RIP v2 routers on the same network segment A multicast router will not forward a packet with the destination IP address within this range to other networks See the IANA web site for more information The layer 2 multicast MAC addresses used by Cisco layer 2 protocols 01 00 0C CC CC CC and 01 00 0C CC CC CD are also included in this group Specify the action to perform when the Switch receives a frame with a reserved multicast address Select Drop to discard the frame s Select Flooding to send the frame s to all ports Port This field displays the port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Immed Leave Select this option to set the Switch to remove this port from the multicast tree when an IGMP version 2 leave message is received on this port Select this option if there is only one host connected to this port Normal Leave Enter an IGMP normal leave timeout value from 200 to 6 348 800 in miliseconds Select this option to have the Switch use this timeout to update the forwarding table for the port This defines how many seconds the Switch waits for an IGMP re
271. lculated checksum is not equal to the checksum in the file that binding and all others after it are ignored 26 1 1 3 DHCP Relay Option 82 Information The Switch can add information to DHCP requests that it does not discard This provides the DHCP server more information about the source of the requests The Switch can add the following information Slot ID 1 byte port ID 1 byte and source VLAN ID 2 bytes System name up to 32 bytes This information is stored in an Agent Information field in the option 82 field of the DHCP headers of client DHCP request frames See Chapter 37 on page 307 for more information about DHCP relay option 82 When the DHCP server responds the Switch removes the information in the Agent Information field before forwarding the response to the original source You can configure this setting for each source VLAN This setting is independent of the DHCP relay settings Chapter 37 on page 307 26 1 1 4 Configuring DHCP Snooping Follow these steps to configure DHCP snooping on the Switch 1 Enable DHCP snooping on the Switch 2 Enable DHCP snooping on each VLAN and configure DHCP relay option 82 XGS 4728F User s Guide 233 Chapter 26 IP Source Guard 3 26 1 2 Configure trusted and untrusted ports and specify the maximum number of DHCP packets that each port can receive per second Configure static bindings ARP Inspection Overview Use ARP inspection to filter unauthoriz
272. le path of the loop guard probe packet is also shown In this example the probe packet is sent from port N and returns on another port As long as loop guard is enabled on XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 27 Loop Guard port N The Switch will shut down port N if it detects that the probe packet has returned to the Switch Figure 136 Loop Guard Network Loop Note After resolving the loop problem on your network you can re activate the disabled port via the web configurator see Section 8 7 on page 89 or via commands see the Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide 27 2 Loop Guard Setup Click Advanced Application gt Loop Guard in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Note The loop guard feature can not be enabled on the ports that have Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP MRSTP or MSTP enabled Figure 137 Advanced Application Loop Guard CE oop Active O p e a Active oO nn amp t Nh H DEDCEDCED CEDEDEI Apply Cancel XGS 4728F User s Guide 257 Chapter 27 Loop Guard The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 86 Advanced Application Loop Guard LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this option to enable loop guard on the Switch The Switch generates syslog internal log messages as well as SNMP traps when it shuts down a port via the loop guard feature
273. le the Switch Uploading the config file replaces the specified configuration file system including your Switch configurations system related data including the default password the error log and the trace log FILE TYPE Firmware ras bin This is the generic name for the ZyNOS firmware on the Switch Example FTP Commands ftp put firmware bin ras This is a sample FTP session showing the transfer of the computer file firmware bin to the Switch ftp get config config cfg This is a sample FTP session saving the current configuration to a file called config cfg on your computer If your T FTP client does not allow you to have a destination filename different than the source you will need to rename them as the Switch only recognizes config and ras Be sure you keep unaltered copies of both files for later use Be sure to upload the correct model firmware as uploading the wrong model firmware may damage your device 39 8 2 FTP Command Line Procedure ok N A c Launch the FTP client on your computer Enter open followed by a space and the IP address of your Switch Press ENTER when prompted for a username Enter your password as requested the default is 1234 Enter bin to set transfer mode to binary XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 39 Maintenance 6 Use put to transfer files from the computer to the Switch for example put firmware bin ras transfers t
274. lect whether this port is a trusted port Trusted or an untrusted port Untrusted Trusted ports are connected to DHCP servers or other switches and the Switch discards DHCP packets from trusted ports only if the rate at which DHCP packets arrive is too high Untrusted ports are connected to subscribers and the Switch discards DHCP packets from untrusted ports in the following situations The packet is a DHCP server packet for example OFFER ACK or NACK The source MAC address and source IP address in the packet do not match any of the current bindings The packet is a RELEASE or DECLINE packet and the source Pd address and source port do not match any of the current indings The rate at which DHCP packets arrive is too high Rate pps Specify the maximum number for DHCP packets 1 2048 that the Switch receives from each port each second The Switch discards any additional DHCP packets Enter 0 to disable this limit which is recommended for trusted ports Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last saved values 26 5 2 DHCP Snooping VLAN Configure Use this screen to enable DHCP snooping on each VLAN an
275. llowing sections list the attributes sent from the Switch to the RADIUS server when performing authentication 25 3 1 1 Attributes Used for Authenticating Privilege Access User Name the format of the User Name attribute is enab where is the privilege level 1 14 User Password NAS Identifier NAS IP Address 25 3 1 2 Attributes Used to Login Users User Name User Password NAS Identifier NAS IP Address 25 3 1 3 Attributes Used by the IEEE 802 1x Authentication User Name NAS Identifier NAS IP Address NAS Port NAS Port Type XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 25 AAA This value is set to Ethernet 15 on the Switch Calling Station Id Frame MTU EAP Message State Message Authenticator 25 3 2 Attributes Used for Accounting The following sections list the attributes sent from the Switch to the RADIUS server when performing authentication 25 3 2 1 Attributes Used for Accounting System Events NAS IP Address NAS Identifier Acct Status Type Acct Session D The format of Acct Session Id is date time 8 digit sequential number for example 2007041917210300000001 date 2007 04 19 time 17 21 03 serial number 00000001 Acct Delay Time 25 3 2 2 Attributes Used for Accounting Exec Events The attributes are listed in the following table along with the time that they are sent the difference between Console and Telnet SSH Exec events is that the Telnet SSH events utilize the Calling Statio
276. loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Clear Click this to clear the fields above VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group to which this DHCP settings apply Type This field displays Server or Relay for the DHCP mode DHCP Status For DHCP server configuration this field displays the starting IP address and the size of the IP address pool For DHCP relay configuration this field displays the first remote DHCP server IP address Delete Select the configuration entries you want to remove and click Delete to remove them Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 37 DHCP 37 5 1 Example DHCP Relay for Two VLANs The following example displays two VLANs VIDs 1 and 2 for a campus network Two DHCP servers are installed to serve each VLAN The system is set up to forward DHCP requests from the dormitory rooms VLAN 1 to the DHCP server with an IP address of 192 168 1 100 Requests from the academic buildings VLAN 2 are sent to the other DHCP server with an IP address of 172 23 10 100 Figure 180 DHCP Relay for Two VLANs mmm DHCP 172 23 10 100 m XGS 4728F User s Guide 315 Chapter 37 DHCP For the example network conf
277. lt poe aias 313 37 5 1 Example DHCP Relay for Two VLAMS 1 cinese ena rta ain aan i aaa 315 Chapter 38 bili E E EE E E E ET 317 cnm iie co e E 317 DMA VRRP AE nea Pd appa bod ho edt teda EE 318 er VRRF CS USO cssss cecseu sx etri REM E R 319 E wid ucc ec E EOE Ai 319 Deere da a aa e E E induci usd ie ia Rn Maa exea H cnl ark o SO dM A u d na 321 28 3 2 Configuring VRRP Parqmbglele 2 5 eee cose et iraa Nia ge dead 322 203 4 Gonig ring VRRP Para el BIS sicci ir Rec ER PE ones S 323 30 4 VRRP Configuration EXOIDISE aossscussdkicodtu ioa Euer dU FR CREDE Eee RuDU EX da Rua Vau as ane 323 384 1 One Subnet Network Example 1c poccc cen petu Inr etee ntn R epa e pee pene EEEa 324 XGS 4728F User s Guide Table of Contents BBL TWO SUHE ExXSIEB Loose aon OR PEL au p ceo AU d a Pe adc B dou 325 Part V Bearer A 327 Chapter 39 Lug H 329 39 1 The Maintenance Bereli suicidon tuaana aee K Fab C Gub ER ct OTEA aa Saura d a E DEG RUE Ka 329 ccpaEe rsenisR riget tot osadsusisenanbenstinasasseunmdsncens waedousuuaeasienas 330 Bad od Cin URANO sorti pound data E 330 28 POLOS SIBI aaao E ioo dana EE AA ceeded NOH pac Baked dad DLE 331 99 9 Firmware UID STAGE me 331 90 6 Hestore a ALN FIE 1s scc rer Pe A paved ep tni dna di v Rd 332 99 7 Backip a CTA To S o SS 333 SIS FTP Cria LINE e 333 SOLD Penamne CONVENON sissisodan aaia aai SAAN ANS
278. method in the screen that appears Figure 86 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication Port Authentication g 802 1x Click here MAC Authentication Click here XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 18 Port Authentication 18 2 1 Activate IEEE 802 1x Security Use this screen to activate IEEE 802 1x security In the Port Authentication screen click 802 1x to display the configuration screen as shown Figure 87 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication gt 802 1x OD 8021x d Active Port Authentication Active Reauthentication Reauthentication Timer E On seconds On 3600 seconds r On 3600 asconds cr On gt 3600 seconds On 3600 seconds On 3600 seconds On 9600 seconds On 3600 _ seconds Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 42 Advanced Application Port Authentication 802 1x LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to permit 802 1x authentication on the Switch Note You must first enable 802 1x authentication on the Switch before configuring it on each port Port This field displays a port number P Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all
279. n 13 1 5 on page 128 for more information on MSTP Note This screen is only available after you activate MSTP on the Switch Figure 75 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status MSTP CST Bridge Bridge ID Hello Time second Max Age second Forwarding Delay second Cost to Bridge Port ID Configuration Name Revision Number Configuration Digest Topology Changed Times Time Since Last Change Instance Instance 0 MSTI 1 Bridge Bridge ID internal Cost Port ID Spanning Tree Protocol Status Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP Root 0000 000000000000 0 0 Configuration RSTP MRSTP Our Bridge 8000 000000000000 2 20 15 0 0 0x0000 0x0000 001349000002 0 A317523DB32DA2D62 0 0 VLAN 1 4093 Regional Root Our Bridge 0000 000000000000 0 0x0000 8001 000000000000 0 0x0000 MSTP The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 33 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status MSTP LABEL DESCRIPTION Configuration Click Configuration to specify which STP mode you want to activate Click MSTP to edit MSTP settings on the Switch CST This section describes the Common Spanning Tree settings XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol Table 33 Advanced Application Spanning Tree Protocol Status MSTP Delay second LABEL DESCRIPTION Bridge Root refer
280. n CORR OL ER DEO QD E UR dad d 98 AM Nl er TN ne 98 DOT VLAN SAU E UE 99 BL DIS isst be Hen n Reborn n ding Robe rs M tastes 100 25 5 Conia a State VLA oscitetestooc iter a roce UM ereu daa tI pev Dua eU FER FARK EU tones 100 SG a Configure VLAN Port Senos scctsancssqemicietutintieecc pu E ecsenedi cu erum niu d eie d E URS 102 Je cune BASEO VILIS iiicespteupaadrideriddrcesvecidrk oa opc sw da vans acabe Ed RD e Rea 103 9 7 Configuring Subnet Based VLAN cciss sciccsiascspascolscieiaceecdeadateialeceebarnadasiaeiaieaieeecoiaisibeesis 104 9o Pralecelisased LAN oa ERFURT ERR PR RM ph EYURM I RN MR RR ES E aioe 106 99 Connguring Protocol Based VLAN MEER 107 910 Create an IP based VLAN Example ucc tret errores ana ennan aniria 109 911 Por pDased VLAN SOUE aguasoxdtaiugdipaptipas aperi EA abc Rd Dr af 110 2 11 1 Conigure a Por based VLAN seiceanna tiaa AR 110 Chapter 10 Statie MAGC Forward Seip a a 115 DINE LC YE UU Um UN M NEN M 115 XGS 4728F User s Guide 18 Table of Contents 10 2 Configuring Statie MAG Farwarding ieneeiexeme gei ida ac eril s nO ee GRE t 115 Chapter 11 Static dor a Forward l c 119 Tcl Static Multicast Forwarding Overview 5uasisertecciespt oett ber ttun antt Gee DER E QURE pesca RN 119 112 Ganfiguring Static Multicast FO ARAN sccciisccdcscccccrsscacasmicetusdnchueteaasieeaksccesineneistacnemencocay 120 Chapter 12 aij 9
281. n Id attribute Table 71 RADIUS Attributes Exec Events via Console ATTRIBUTE START INTERIM UPDATE STOP User Name v v NAS I dentifier v v NAS IP Address v v Service Type Acct Status Type Acct Delay Time Acct Session ld Acct Authentic Acct Session Time Acct Terminate Cause XGS 4728F User s Guide 227 Chapter 25 AAA 25 3 2 3 Table 72 RADIUS Attributes Exec Events via Telnet SSH ATTRIBUTE START INTERIM UPDATE STOP User Name v v v NAS I dentifier v v NAS IP Address v v Service Type Calling Station Id Acct Status Type Acct Delay Time Acct Session ld Acct Authentic Acct Session Time Acct Terminate Cause Attributes Used for Accounting IEEE 802 1x Events The attributes are listed in the following table along with the time of the session they are sent Table 73 RADIUS Attributes Exec Events via Console ATTRIBUTE START INTERIM UPDATE STOP User Name v v NAS IP Address v v NAS Port v v Class Called Station Id Calling Station Id NAS I dentifier NAS Port Type Acct Status Type Acct Delay Time Acct Session d Acct Authentic Acct Input Octets Acct Output Octets Acct Session Time Acct Input Packets Acct Output Pa
282. n Options The DHCP configuration on the Switch is divided into Global and VLAN screens The screen you should use for configuration depends on the DHCP services you want to offer the DHCP clients on your network Choose the configuration screen based on the following criteria Global The Switch forwards all DHCP requests to the same DHCP server XGS 4728F User s Guide 307 Chapter 37 DHCP VLAN The Switch is configured on a VLAN by VLAN basis The Switch can be configured as a DHCP server for one VLAN and at the same time the Switch can be configured to relay DHCP requests for clients in another VLAN 37 2 DHCP Status Click IP Application gt DHCP in the navigation panel The DHCP Status screen displays Figure 174 IP Application gt DHCP Status ED DHCP Status Global VLAN Server Status Index VID 1 2 Server Status 192 168 2 100 IP Pool Size 66 Relay Status Relay Mode VLAN 1 3 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 110 P Application DHCP Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Server Status This section displays configuration settings related to the Switch s DHCP server mode Index This is the index number VID This field displays the VLAN ID for which the Switch is a DHCP server Server Status This field displays the starting DHCP client IP address IP Pool Size Relay Status This field displays the number of IP addresses
283. n be 100 Mbps or 1000 Mbps The duplex mode can be both half or full duplex at 100 Mbps and full duplex only at 1000 Mbps An auto negotiating port can detect and adjust to the optimum Ethernet speed 100 1000 Mbps and duplex mode full duplex or half duplex of the connected device An auto crossover auto MDI MDI X port automatically works with a straight through or crossover Ethernet cable 3 1 2 1 Default Ethernet Settings The factory default negotiation settings for the Ethernet ports on the Switch are Speed Auto Duplex Auto Flow control Off 3 1 3 Mini GBIC Slots These are 24 slots for Small Form Factor Pluggable SFP transceivers A transceiver is a single unit that houses a transmitter and a receiver Use a transceiver to connect a fiber optic cable to the Switch The Switch does not come with transceivers You must use transceivers that comply with the Small Form Factor Pluggable SFP Transceiver Multisource Agreement MSA See the SFF committee s I NF 8074i specification Rev 1 0 for details You can change transceivers while the Switch is operating You can use different transceivers to connect to Ethernet switches with different types of fiber optic connectors Type SFP connection interface Connection speed 1 Gigabit per second Gbps To avoid possible eye injury do not look into an operating fiber optic module s connectors XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 3 Hardware Overview 3 1
284. n link to display the VRRP Configuration screen as shown next Note You can only configure VRRP on interfaces with unique VLAN IDs XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 38 VRRP Note Routing domains with the same VLAN ID are not displayed in the table indicated Figure 184 IP Application gt VRRP Configuration gt IP Interface VRRP Configuration 7 Status Index Network Authentication 1 192 168 1 10 24 None Apply Cancel Active 3 Name name Network 192 168 1 10 24 v Virtual Router ID 1 gt Adertisement Interval 1 Preempt Mode IV Priority foo Uplink Gateway nono Primary Virtual IP nono Secondary Virtual IP noon Add Cancel Clear Uplink Gateway Priority Delete 192 168 1100 110 n Index X Active Name Network VRID Primary VIP 1 Yes Example 192 168 1 10 24 1 192 168 1 1 Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 116 IP Application gt VRRP Configuration gt IP Interface LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This field displays the index number of an entry Network This field displays the IP address and number of subnet mask bit of an IP domain Authenticati Select None to disable authentication This is the default setting on Select Simple to use a simple password to authenticate VRRP packet exchanges on this interface Key When you select Simple in the Authentication field enter a password key up to eight pr
285. n specific VLAN and specify trusted ports Filter Aging Time Filter aging time This setting has no effect on existing MAC address filters Enter how long 1 2147483647 seconds the MAC address filter remains in the Switch after the Switch identifies an unauthorized ARP packet The Switch automatically deletes the MAC address filter afterwards Type 0 if you want the MAC address filter to be permanent Log Profile Log buffer size Enter the maximum number 1 1024 of log messages that were generated by ARP packets and have not been sent to the syslog server yet Make sure this number is appropriate for the specified Syslog rate and Log interval If the number of log messages in the Switch exceeds this number the Switch stops recording log messages and simply starts counting the number of entries that were dropped due to unavailable buffer Click Clearing log status table in the ARP Inspection Log Status screen to clear the log and reset this counter See Section 26 6 2 on page 248 XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 26 IP Source Guard Table 83 ARP Inspection Configure continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Syslog rate Type the maximum number of syslog messages the Switch can send to the syslog server in one batch This number is expressed as a rate because the batch frequency is determined by the Log I nterval You must configure the syslog server Chapter 42 on page 359 to use this Enter O
286. n ste E o prx dea rM tata endi dn a ERU 211 2481 MR Gontiguralian Example e apii epp t dud pc e pod d a ee pla oa c adopt duds 212 Chapter 25 r r M 215 25 1 Authentication Authorization and Accounting AAA ssssseeen 215 25s Local cec loc e 216 251 2 RADIUS and TRO usdinondanpurcdace isn OE dnd nlsi peor du aN cas nde Ad cad 216 War onc TS 216 25A RADIIS Server Del sepius x a prb ad n PRA EE basa uan E d ER Ends 217 25 2 2 TAC Ro ioco sisicscinwisopeciomsipstustertnoriaaiteauueanbindaibatiiaaasuleyaayadaiuouss 219 OE PP OGG P t 221 XGS 4728F User s Guide Table of Contents 25034 Vando Specie APIBUS sse poa apo tpa plata Hr bora dant ab LR n 224 2525 T mel Procol POOLE uiridacrkrrccddatkau Dudas Ens cae Lat ORE EE sn ask ES r cda abc da ex 225 25 9 Supported RADIUS ATIIDUDBS iueisssetece ite ate tede Sar re ipei a a 226 25 3 1 Attributes Used Tor Authentication iuis en socii rpm er nre ra a sid cd aite 226 25 ibus Used Tor ZGCOUERI aac oecanstat pte epI pe pPdi cua bebes ludi erc dne E Pee Du pr bbb cu B RUE 227 Chapter 26 IP Source Guar X Y A a0 231 2E IP Souto uad CIV BROW sci ir os E A ds dod TOR Rd 231 25 1 1 DHCP Srooping QUSPIBIE sruni nda ierit Rast backs SOOO MU ERE CUR EIU 232 20TA
287. n submenus at the bottom of the navigation panel The recommended screen resolution is 1024 by 768 pixels Adjust the value in your computer and then you should see the rest of Advanced Application submenus at the bottom of the navigation panel There is unauthorized access to my Switch via telnet HTTP and SSH Click the Display button in the System Log field in the Management gt Diagnostic screen to check for unauthorized access to your Switch To avoid unauthorized access configure the secured client setting in the Management gt Access Control gt Remote Management screen for telnet HTTP and SSH see Section 40 10 on page 355 Computers not belonging to the secured client set cannot get permission to access the Switch XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 49 Troubleshooting 49 3 Switch Configuration lost my configuration settings after restart the Switch Make sure you save your configuration into the Switch s nonvolatile memory each time you make changes Click Save at the top right corner of the web configurator to save the configuration permanently See also Section 39 3 on page 330 for more information about how to save your configuration XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 49 Troubleshooting XGS 4728F User s Guide Product Specifications The following tables summarize the Switch s hardware and firmware features Table 147 Hardware Specifications SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION
288. n tries the second TACACS server Index This is a read only number representing a TACACS server entry IP Address Enter the IP address of an external TACACS server in dotted decimal notation TCP Port The default port of a TACACS server for authentication is 49 You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so Shared Secret Specify a password up to 32 alphanumeric characters as the key to be shared between the external TACACS server and the Switch This key is not sent over the network This key must be the same on the external TACACS server and the Switch Delete Check this box if you want to remove an existing TACACS server entry from the Switch This entry is deleted when you click Apply Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Accounting Use this section to configure your TACACS accounting settings Server Timeout Specify the amount of time in seconds that the Switch waits for an accounting request response from the TACACS server Index This is a read only number representing a TACACS accounting server entry P Address Enter the I P address
289. n two hosts over an unsecured network Figure 208 SSH Communication Example P f Internet SSH Server wm Sa SSH Client XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 40 Access Control 40 5 How SSH works The following table summarizes how a secure connection is established between two remote hosts Figure 209 How SSH Works E Internet v 1 Host Identification The SSH client sends a connection request to the SSH server The server identifies itself with a host key The client encrypts a randomly generated session key with the host key and server key and sends the result back to the server The client automatically saves any new server public keys In subsequent connections the server public key is checked against the saved version on the client computer 2 Encryption Method Once the identification is verified both the client and server must agree on the type of encryption method to use XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 40 Access Control Authentication and Data Transmission After the identification is verified and data encryption activated a secure tunnel is established between the client and the server The client then sends its authentication information user name and password to the server to log in to the server 40 6 SSH Implementation on the Switch 40 6 1 Your Switch supports SSH version 2 using RSA authentication and three encryption methods DES 3DES and Blowfish The SSH serve
290. nal loopback test XGS 4728F User s Guide This chapter explains the syslog screens 42 1 Syslog Overview The syslog protocol allows devices to send event notification messages across an IP network to syslog servers that collect the event messages A syslog enabled device can generate a syslog message and send it to a syslog server Syslog is defined in RFC 3164 The RFC defines the packet format content and system log related information of syslog messages Each syslog message has a facility and severity level The syslog facility identifies a file in the syslog server Refer to the documentation of your syslog program for details The following table describes the syslog severity levels Table 135 Syslog Severity Levels CODE SEVERITY Emergency The system is unusable Alert Action must be taken immediately Critical The system condition is critical Error There is an error condition on the system Warning There is a warning condition on the system Notice There is a normal but significant condition on the system Informational The syslog contains an informational message N ODO Om AJ wji NI FR oO Debug The message is intended for debug level purposes XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 42 Syslog 42 2 Syslog Setup Click Management gt Syslog in the navigation panel to display this screen The syslog feature sends logs to an external syslog server U
291. namic link aggregation 153 E egress port 113 Ethernet broadcast address 379 Ethernet port test 358 Ethernet ports 35 default settings 36 example summary address 286 exchange RIP and OSPF information 285 external authentication server 216 F fan speed 79 FCC interference statement 409 file transfer using FTP command example 334 filename convention configuration configuration file names 333 filtering 123 rules 123 filtering database MAC table 371 firmware 78 upgrade 331 367 flow control 90 back pressure 90 EEE802 3x 90 forwarding delay 141 frames tagged 103 untagged 103 front panel 35 FTP 28 333 file transfer procedure 334 restrictions over WAN 335 G GARP 96 GARP Generic Attribute Registration Protocol 96 GARP terminology 96 GARP timer 85 96 general features 398 general setup 80 getting help 54 GMT Greenwich Mean Time 81 GVRP 96 103 and port assignment 103 GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol 96 H hardware installation 31 mounting 32 hardware monitor 78 hardware overview 35 hello time 141 hops 141 HTTPS 350 certificates 350 implementation 350 public keys private keys 350 HTTPS example 351 humidity 394 XGS 4728F User s Guide Index IEEE 802 1p priority 85 IEEE 802 1x activate 166 167 219 reauthentication 166 IEEE 802 1x port authentication 163 IGMP 295 how it works 292 overview 291 port based 293 setup 294 version 199 version
292. navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Clustering Candidate The following fields relate to the switches that are potential cluster members List A list of suitable candidates found by auto discovery is shown here The switches must be directly connected Directly connected switches that are set to be cluster managers will not be visible in the Clustering Candidate list Switches that are not in the same management VLAN group will not be visible in the Clustering Candidate list Password Each cluster member s password is its web configurator password Select a member in the Clustering Candidate list and then enter its web configurator password If that switch administrator changes the web configurator password afterwards then it cannot be managed from the Cluster Manager Its Status is displayed as Error in the Cluster Management Status screen and a warning icon A appears in the member summary list below If multiple devices have the same password then hold SHIFT and click those switches to select them Then enter their common web configurator password Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you
293. nce Switching Example rores tnnt rre nnt 26 1 0 3 Gigabit Ethemet tothe Desk aerarii amis easdem dac onc ded 27 1 1 4 IEEE 802 10 VLAN Application ExXamMplg iius e rata naiinis 27 d Ways io Manage me SI sie ed Por iba Ha m E aa 28 1 3 Good Habits Tor Managing the SWIN 1 otia otro ii ees AER tenu dIS 28 Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection eseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eene ennt nnn nnne nnn 31 Peay Urata zr MD c UTE 31 2 2 Mounting Me Switi oh a Rak aussuncndaxencduanden iiid naaa ar 32 2 2 1 Rack mounted Installation Requirements 1 uucecccceueee certae rettet crecer 32 2 2 2 Attaching the Mounting Brackets to the Switch sssssseseeeee 32 2 2 9 Mounting the Switch on s Rack riesen eddie e qun aere aiei ad Chapter 3 cor 24i 1 A 0 35 3 4 Font Panel Donnesldlls oeexuidxixexebiubitGen Dijo unns deroga oai aso Cerca t Pra bonos 35 21 Doa Personality Interiaces aicsussiniieucimaiee do Cni sukani niaidne de cd da aa iaa odas a 35 3 1 2 WOU BSS T PONS eec a cee aetetcuasnewstceeniaun wate eee teens 36 SLO IS SE aoea 36 De Ra ILIO E O ees 38 GEA POVOT COMET O aia PT 39 XGS 4728F User s Guide EN Table of Contents 3 2 2 External Backup Power Supply CODFBCtor uuuuse aera hri ndr a RR ende 41 22 BEDS POT esatenndiszidennnasntsreras Cela bend E tk PO bebiddolau ptf bar Se D Faser d doa Ead 41 KREIS 41 x GEIMPIDI Cito gg
294. nced Application gt VLAN Stacking screen to display the screen as shown Figure 101 Advanced Application VLAN Stacking Selective QinQ ED Selective QNA NP VLAN Stacking Active C Name Port El CVID z SPVID Priority o Index Active Name Port CVID SPVID Priority Delete Ad Cancel Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 58 Advanced Application VLAN Stacking Selective QinQ LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Check this box to activate this rule Name Port Enter a descriptive name up to 32 printable ASCII characters for identification purposes The port number identifies the port you are configuring CVID Enter a customer VLAN ID the inner VLAN tag from 1 to 4094 This is the VLAN tag carried in the packets from the subscribers SPVID SPVID is the service provider s VLAN ID the outer VLAN tag Enter the service provider ID from 1 to 4094 for frames received on this port See Chapter 9 on page 95 for more background information on VLAN ID Priority Select a priority level from O to 7 This is the service provider s priority level that adds to the frames received on this port 0 is the lowest priority level and 7 is the highest Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top n
295. nds Each port has a Join Period timer The allowed Join Time range is between 100 and 65535 milliseconds the default is 200 milliseconds See Chapter 9 on page 95 for more background information Leave Timer Leave Time sets the duration of the Leave Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds Each port has a single Leave Period timer Leave Time must be two times larger than Join Timer the default is 600 milliseconds Leave All Leave All Timer sets the duration of the Leave All Period timer for GVRP in Timer milliseconds Each port has a single Leave All Period timer Leave All Timer must be larger than Leave Timer Priority Queue Assignment EEE 802 1p defines up to eight separate traffic types by inserting a tag into a MAC layer frame that contains bits to define class of service Frames without an explicit priority tag are given the default priority of the ingress port Use the following fields to configure the priority level to physical queue mapping The Switch has eight physical queues that you can map to the 8 priority levels On the Switch traffic assigned to higher index queues gets through faster while traffic in lower index queues is dropped if the network is congested Priority Level The following descriptions are based on the traffic types defined in the IEEE 802 1d standard which incorporates the 802 1p Level 7 Typically used for network control traffic such as router configuration messages L
296. ning Tree See Section 13 1 on page 125 for background information on STP Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 13 4 Configure Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Use this screen to configure RSTP settings see Section 13 1 on page 125 for more information on RSTP Click RSTP in the Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol screen Figure 70 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status Active O Bridge Priority 32768 v Hello Time b Seconds MAX Age bo Seconds Forwarding Delay 15 Seconds Port Active Priority Path Cost NN d 1 a h28 4 2 P 128 M 3 a h28 4 4 h28 4 5 r h28 a 6 a h28 4 7 r 128 4 o 25 m 128 1 26 T 128 1 Apply Cancel 132 XGS 4728F User s Guide i Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 28 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt RSTP LABEL DESCRIPTION Status Click Status to display the RSTP Status screen see Figure 71 on page 134 Active Select this check box to activate RSTP Clear this checkbox to dis
297. nion on the last Sunday of March All of the time zones in the European Union start using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment 1 A M GMT or UTC So in the European Union you would select Last Sunday March and the last field depends on your time zone In Germany for instance you would select 2 00 because Germany s time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC GMT 1 XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting Table 10 Basic Setting gt General Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION End Date Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time ends if you selected Daylight Saving Time The time field uses the 24 hour format Here are a couple of examples Daylight Saving Time ends in the United States on the last Sunday of October Each time zone in the United States stops using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A M local time So in the United States you would select First Sunday November and 2 00 Daylight Saving Time ends in the European Union on the last Sunday of October All of the time zones in the European Union stop using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment 1 A M GMT or UTC So in the European Union you would select Last Sunday October and the last field depends on your time zone In Germany for instance you would select 2 00 because Germany s time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC GMT 1 Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if
298. nsert the entry in the summary table below and save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Clear Click Clear to set the above fields back to the factory defaults 21 3 Viewing and Editing Policy Configuration To view a summary of the classifier configuration scroll down to the summary table at the bottom of the Policy screen To change the settings of a rule click a number in the I ndex field Figure 95 Advanced Application gt Policy Rule Summary Table Index Active Name Classifier s Delete 1 Test Example m Delete Cancel XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 21 Policy Rule The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 51 Policy Summary Table LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This field displays the policy index number Click an index number to edit the policy Active This field displays Yes when policy is activated and No when is it deactivated Name This field displays the name you have assigned to this policy Classifier This field displays the name s of the classifier to which this policy applies s Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to cl
299. nsists of up to 64 printable characters spaces are allowed Location Type the geographic location of your Switch You can use up to 32 printable ASCII characters spaces are allowed Contact Type the name of the person in charge of this Switch You can use up to Person s Name 32 printable ASCII characters spaces are allowed 80 XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting Table 10 Basic Setting gt General Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Use Time Type the time service protocol that your timeserver uses Not all time Server when servers support all protocols so you may have to use trial and error to Bootup find a protocol that works The main differences between them are the time format When you select the Daytime RFC 867 format the Switch displays the day month year and time with no time zone adjustment When you use this format it is recommended that you use a Daytime timeserver within your geographical time zone Time RFC 868 format displays a 4 byte integer giving the total number of seconds since 1970 1 1 at 0 0 0 NTP RFC 1305 is similar to Time RFC 868 None is the default value Enter the time manually Each time you turn on the Switch the time and date will be reset to 1970 1 1 0 0 Time Server IP Address Type the IP address of your timeserver The Switch searches for the timeserver for up to 60 seconds If you select a timeserver that is unreachable
300. nterval hh Preempt Mode Vv Priority uo Uplink Gateway 22113100 Primary Virtual IP 221688121 Secondary Virtual IP nono Figure 194 VRRP Example 2 VRRP Parameter Settings for VR2 on Switch B After configuring and saving the VRRP configuration the VRRP Status screens for both switches are shown next Figure 195 VRRP Example 2 VRRP Status on Switch A ED VRRP Stat S Configuration Index Active Network VRID VR Status Uplink Status 1 Yes 192 168 1 1 24 2 Backup Alive 2 Yes 192 168 1 1 24 1 Master Alive Figure 196 VRRP Example 2 VRRP Status on Switch B ED VRRP Status Configuration Index Active Network VRID VR Status Uplink Status 1 Yes 192 168 1 10 24 2 Master Alive 2 Yes 192 168 1 10 24 1 Backup Alive XGS 4728F User s Guide PART V Management Maintenance 329 Access Control 337 Diagnostic 357 Syslog 359 Cluster Management 363 MAC Table 371 IP Table 375 ARP Table 379 Routing Table 381 Configure Clone 383 327 Maintenance This chapter explains how to configure the maintenance screens that let you maintain the firmware and configuration files 39 1 The Maintenance Screen Use this screen to manage firmware and your configuration files Click Management gt Maintenance in the navigation panel to open the following screen Figure 197 Management Maintenance ED Maintenance d Current Configuration 1 Fi
301. ntiated Servi 299 ZWEITES o ETT E E 299 26 1 T ESGP and Per PD BESIDE eter pebiase adn d eda obo D PE da e dae 299 20 1 2 Difer Network EQUUS IS un teas rUtaRU Loose Lil te DUE a aiaa 300 38 2 Two Rate Three Color Marker Traffic POI ssccc sostictsecccerccaccenscenessrennsedacsermseencceetiuandonse 300 2621 IRIGIM Colors iid ModE uas cepa sii ramen apad o Ponit c dac cet 301 36 2 2 gre Color aware o Rest P E 301 eomm eiua e ccciniuedlans cence E AE a EA Ee aS 302 36 3 1 Configuring 2 Rate 3 Color Marker Settings sse 303 284 DSGCPste4EEE 802 1p Priority Settings sensasies edibn RES cU dann EE eH 305 261 1 Gonnjadb DSP Sell il isuri ones oogrxtil dub toda de cp raa a Ko 306 Chapter 37 DACP CMM 307 SPE DHOF OVON IBW peer TR 307 UMP eU eec 307 2r J 2 DHCP Conaubsporn CODE ou asddug enaa Cad Des retten Cua dul dS cac das pd 307 mus DENZPHSIBBS 3 ieetitiutreti desir iledb bes qesubb se sede tbi Dledb les iude Lead i tds cb b a obbe ru Ni b ipa Es P ERU 308 97a DHOP Sarai OUS Deal scie rb Die Robb ROG dere EP tv d eO MED dU Md 308 tea AES clc MNT T NU UU MIU 310 Sr T DHCF Relay Agent ICOFRTRRUDIY serisinin eia 310 374 2 Goniguring DHCP Global Relay suunssroanaiita a a 311 37 4 3 Global DHCP Relay Configuration Example ssseseeeeeeeee 312 27 5 CoMmiguiing DHCP VLAN SEMINGS aecliuss e eee eoe Et ene Fen petes nk
302. o block traffic between two specific ports within the Switch you can use port isolation or private VLAN see Chapter 30 on page 267 for more information However it does not work across multiple switches For example broadcast traffic from isolated ports on a switch say B can be forwarded to all ports on other switches A and C including the isolated ports Isolated ports AN Root port 7 Designated port 8 SO C Ngee Smart isolation allows you to prevent isolated ports on different switches from transmitting traffic to each other After you enable RSTP MRSTP and smart isolation on the Switch the designated port s will be added to the isolated port list In the following example switch A is the root bridge Switch B s root port 7 connects to switch A and switch B s designated port 8 connects to switch C Traffic from isolated ports on switch B can only be sent through non isolated port 1 or root port 7 to switch A This prevents isolated ports on switch B sending traffic through designated port 8 to switch C Traffic received on designated port 8 from switch C will not be forwarded to any other isolated ports on switch B Before Smart isolation Isolated ports 2 6 Root port 7 Designated port 8 After Smart Isolation Isolated ports 2 6 8 Root port 7 Designated port 8 You should enable RSTP or MRSTP before you can use smart isolation on the Switch If the network topology changes the Switch aut
303. o that the frames are forwarded to the VLAN group that the tag defines 10 Click Apply to save your changes back to the run time memory Figure 35 Tutorial Add Tag for Frames Received on Port 2 PRAM Subnet Based Vian Protocol Based Vlan VLAN Status GVRP O Port Ingress Check PVID GVRP Acceptable Frame Type VLAN Trunking Isolation rj l u a far r1 m 1 m ft jf a zr rn 3 z 1 m Al z CAMMA e NE a s n E e mw s r z so fo faa r Cancel 11 Click the Save link in the upper right corner of the web configurator to save your configuration permanently XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials 6 2 3 Configuring DHCP Relay Follow the steps below to enable DHCP relay on the Switch and allow the Switch to add relay agent information such as the VLAN ID to DHCP requests 1 Click IP Application DHCP and then the Global link to open the DHCP Relay screen 2 Select the Active check box 3 Enter the DHCP server s IP address 192 168 2 3 in this example in the Remote DHCP Server 1 field 4 Select the Option 82 and the I nformation check boxes 5 Click Apply to save your changes back to the run time memory Figure 36 Tutorial Set DHCP Server and Relay Information Oe ore Status Active Remote DHCP Server 1 192 158 2 3 Remote DHCP Server 2 0 0 0 0 Remote DHCP Server 3 0 0 0 0 Relay Agent Information v Option 82 Information v XGS 47
304. ocal area network An IP version 4 address is 32 bits long In an Ethernet LAN MAC addresses are 48 bits long The ARP Table maintains an association between each MAC address and its corresponding IP address 46 1 1 How ARP Works When an incoming packet destined for a host device on a local area network arrives at the Switch the Switch s ARP program looks in the ARP Table and if it finds the address it sends it to the device If no entry is found for the IP address ARP broadcasts the request to all the devices on the LAN The Switch fills in its own MAC and IP address in the sender address fields and puts the known IP address of the target in the target IP address field In addition the Switch puts all ones in the target MAC field FF FF FF FF FF FF is the Ethernet broadcast address The replying device which is either the IP address of the device being sought or the router that knows the way replaces the broadcast address with the target s MAC address swaps the sender and target pairs and unicasts the answer directly back to the requesting machine ARP updates the ARP Table for future reference and then sends the packet to the MAC address that replied XGS 4728F User s Guide 379 Chapter 46 ARP Table 46 2 Viewing the ARP Table Click Management ARP Table in the navigation panel to open the following screen Use the ARP table to view IP to MAC address mapping s Figure 229 Management gt ARP Table Index
305. ocol type or select Other and enter the protocol number in decimal value Refer to Table 49 on page 177 for more information You may select Establish Only for TCP protocol type This means that the Switch will pick out the packets that are sent to establish TCP connections Source IP Address Address Prefix Enter a source IP address in dotted decimal notation Specify the address prefix by entering the number of ones in the subnet mask Socket Number Note You must select either UDP or TCP in the IP Protocol field before you configure the socket numbers Select Any to apply the rule to all TCP UDP protocol port numbers or select the second option and enter a TCP UDP protocol port number Destinatio n IP Address Address Prefix Enter a destination IP address in dotted decimal notation Specify the address prefix by entering the number of ones in the subnet mask XGS 4728F User s Guide 175 Chapter 20 Classifier Table 46 Advanced Application gt Classifier continued LABEL DESCRIPTION ee Note You must select either UDP or TCP in the IP Protocol field before you configure the socket numbers Select Any to apply the rule to all TCP UDP protocol port numbers or select the second option and enter a TCP UDP protocol port number Add Click Add to insert the entry in the summary table below and save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch lose
306. of an external TACACS accounting server in dotted decimal notation TCP Port The default port of a TACACS accounting server is 49 You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do SO XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 25 AAA Table 67 Advanced Application gt AAA gt TACACS Server Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Shared Secret Specify a password up to 32 alphanumeric characters as the key to be shared between the external TACACS accounting server and the Switch This key is not sent over the network This key must be the same on the external TACACS accounting server and the Switch Delete Check this box if you want to remove an existing TACACS accounting server entry from the Switch This entry is deleted when you click Apply Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh AAA Setup Use this screen to configure authentication authorization and accounting settings on the Switch Click on the AAA Setup link in the AAA screen to view the screen as shown Figure 118 Advanced Application gt AAA gt AAA Setup Authentication Type Login Authoriz
307. ol used to manage and monitor TCP IP based devices SNMP is used to exchange management information between the network management system NMS and a network element NE A manager station can manage and monitor the Switch through the network via SNMP version one SNMPv1 SNMP version 2c or SNMP version 3 The next figure illustrates an SNMP management operation SNMP is only available if TCP IP is configured Figure 204 SNMP Management Model Manager Im Agent Agent Agent Managed Device Managed Device Managed Device An SNMP managed network consists of two main components agents and a manager An agent is a management software module that resides in a managed Switch the Switch An agent translates the local management information from the managed Switch into a form compatible with SNMP The manager is the console through which network administrators perform network management functions It executes applications that control and monitor managed devices The managed devices contain object variables managed objects that define each piece of information to be collected about a Switch Examples of variables include number of packets received node port status and so on A Management Information Base MIB is a collection of managed objects SNMP allows a manager and agents to communicate for the purpose of accessing these objects XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 40 Access Control SNMP itself is a simple request response protoco
308. ol Tagging Normal M Tx Tagging 1 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden Iv Tx Tagging 2 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M Tx Tagging 3 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M Tx Tagging 4 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden Iv TxTagging 5 C Normal Fixed C Forbidden Tx Tagging 6 C Normal Fixed C Forbidden Tx Tagging 7 C Normal Fixed C Forbidden TxTagging 8 Normal j Forbidden M Taggi et vag ums Add Cancel Clear XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials 3 Goto Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting and set the PVID of the ports 5 6 and 7 to 100 This tags untagged incoming frames on ports 5 6 and 7 with the tag 100 Figure 26 Tutorial Tag Untagged Frames c OMELETTE Subnet Based Vian Protocol Based Vlan VLAN Status GVRP O Port Ingress Check PVID GVRP Acceptable Frame Type VLAN Trunking Isolation ri ri Au x O rH 1 O fi m Au x 2 Li fi n Au gt O El 3 C fi rH Au x r rH ro far D 5 r far D m 6 O far D Oo 7 r du s r B GN mo Apply Cancel 4 Goto Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt DHCP snooping gt Configure activate and specify VLAN 100 as the DHCP VLAN as shown Click Apply Figure 27 Tutorial Specify DHCP VLAN C DHCP Snooping Configure J Port VLAN DHCP Snooping Active iv C Disable DHCP VI 100 Database Agent URL Timeout interval 300 seconds Write delay interval son seconds Renew
309. omatically updates the isolated port list with the latest designated port information XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting Note The uplink port connected to the Internet should be the root port Otherwise with smart isolation enabled the isolated ports cannot access the Internet 8 5 Switch Setup Screen Click Basic Setting and then Switch Setup in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown The VLAN setup screens change depending on whether you choose 802 1Q or Port Based in the VLAN Type field in this screen Refer to the chapter on VLAN Figure 41 Basic Setting Switch Setup EESTI aD VLAN Type goate C Port Based Bridge Control Protocol Transparency Active L Smart Isolation Active a MAC Address Learning Aging Time 300 __ seconds Join Timer 20 milliseconds GARP Timer Leave Timer 600 milliseconds Leave All Timer 10000 milliseconds Priority Queue Assignment Level 7 Level6 gg Level5 5 v Level4 4 Level3 3 vi Level2 gg Level1 lo v Leveld 2 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 11 Basic Setting Switch Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION VLAN Type Choose 802 1Q or Port Based The VLAN Setup screen changes depending on whether you choose 802 1Q VLAN type or Port Based VLAN type in this screen See Chapter 9 on page 95 for more information Bridge Control Select Active to allow the Switch to handle bridging control pro
310. onfigured in the Switch Setup menu You can also configure a protocol based VLAN or a subnet based VLAN in these screens Static MAC This link takes you to screens where you can configure static MAC Forwarding addresses for a port These static MAC addresses do not age out Static This link takes you to a screen where you can configure static multicast Multicast MAC addresses for port s These static multicast MAC addresses do not Forwarding age out Filtering This link takes you to a screen to set up filtering rules Spanning Tree This link takes you to screens where you can configure the RSTP MRSTP Protocol MSTP to prevent network loops Bandwidth This link takes you to screens where you can cap the maximum Control bandwidth allowed from specified source s to specified destination s Broadcast This link takes you to a screen to set up broadcast filters Storm Control Mirroring This link takes you to screens where you can copy traffic from one port or ports to another port in order that you can examine the traffic from the first port without interference Link This link takes you to screen where you can logically aggregate physical Aggregation links to form one logical higher bandwidth link Port This link takes you to a screen where you can configure IEEE 802 1x port Authentication authentication as well as MAC authentication for clients communicating via the Switch Port Security This link tak
311. ontrol Table 129 Management gt Access Control gt SNMP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Privacy Specify the encryption method for SNMP communication from this user You can choose one of the following e DES Data Encryption Standard is a widely used but breakable method of data encryption It applies a 56 bit key to each 64 bit block of data AES Advanced Encryption Standard is another method for data encryption that also uses a secret key AES applies a 128 bit key to 128 bit blocks of data Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 40 3 5 Configuring SNMP Trap Group From the SNMP screen click Trap Group to view the screen as shown Use the Trap Group screen to specify the types of SNMP traps that should be sent to each SNMP manager Figure 206 Management gt Access Control gt SNMP gt Trap Group mur NEN SNMP Setting Trap Destination IP s Type Options System 7 coldstart warmstart fanspeed temperature voltage reset timesync intrusionlock loopguard Interface linkup linkdown autonegotiation dp transceiver ddm AMA D authentication
312. ood broadcast packets transmitted Pause This field shows the number of 802 3x Pause packets transmitted Tagged This field shows the number of packets with VLAN tags transmitted Rx Packet The following fields display detailed information about packets received RX Packets This field shows the number of good packets unicast multicast and broadcast received Multicast This field shows the number of good multicast packets received Broadcast This field shows the number of good broadcast packets received Pause This field shows the number of 802 3x Pause packets received Control This field shows the number of control packets received including those with CRC error but it does not include the 802 3x Pause packets TX Collision The following fields display information on collisions while transmitting Single This is a count of successfully transmitted packets for which transmission is inhibited by exactly one collision Multiple This is a count of successfully transmitted packets for which transmission was inhibited by more than one collision Excessive This is a count of packets for which transmission failed due to excessive collisions Excessive collision is defined as the number of maximum collisions before the retransmission count is reset Late This is the number of times a late collision is detected that is after 512 bits of the packets have already been transmitted XGS 4728
313. oops might result The allowed range is 4 to 30 seconds As a general rule Note 2 Forward Delay 1 gt Max Age gt 2 Hello Time 1 Maximum hops Enter the number of hops between 1 and 255 in an MSTP region before the BPDU is discarded and the port information is aged Configuration Name Enter a descriptive name up to 32 characters of an MST region Revision Enter a number to identify a region s configuration Devices must have Number the same revision number to belong to the same region Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Instance Use this section to configure MSTI Multiple Spanning Tree Instance settings Instance Enter the number you want to use to identify this MST instance on the Switch The Switch supports instance numbers 0 16 XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol Table 32 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MSTP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Bridge Priority Set the priority of the Switch for the specific spanning tree instance The lower the number the more likely the Switch will be chosen as the root bridge wit
314. ority only When the highest priority queue empties traffic on the next highest priority queue begins Q7 has the highest priority and QO the lowest Weighted Fair Queuing is used to guarantee each queue s minimum bandwidth based on their bandwidth weight the number you configure in the Weight field Queues with larger weights get more guaranteed bandwidth than queues with smaller weights Weighted Round Robin Scheduling services queues on a rotating basis based on their queue weight the number you configure in the queue Weight field Queues with larger weights get more service than queues with smaller weights Weight When you select WFQ or WRR enter the queue weight here Bandwidth is divided across the different traffic queues according to their weights Q0 Q7 This field is applicable only when you select WFQ or WRR Select a queue QO to Q7 to have the Switch use Strictly Priority to service the subsequent queue s after and including the specified queue for the 1000Base T 1000Base X and 10 Gigabit Ethernet ports For example if you select Q5 the Switch services traffic on Q5 Q6 and Q7 using Strictly Priority Select None to always use WFQ or WRR Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring
315. ormal PHY 35 0 35 0 29 0 85 0 Normal MAC 40 0 41 0 29 0 85 0 Normal FAN Speed RPM Current MAX MIN Threshold Status FAN 6360 6390 6286 3100 Normal FAN2 6428 6451 6242 3100 Normal FAN3 5506 5521 5375 3100 Normal Voltage V Current MAX MIN Threshold Status 1 2VIN 1 217 1 217 1 217 B96 Normal 1 25VIN 1 248 1 248 1 248 B96 Normal 1 8VIN 1 843 1 843 1 843 B Normal 3 3VIN 3 360 3 360 3 342 B Normal 12VIM 11 584 11 584 11 584 1096 Normal XGS 4728F V3 90 BBC 2 b1 02 11 2010 D0 19 cb 6f91 59 System Name Ethernet Address The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 9 Basic Setting gt System Info LABEL DESCRIPTION System This field displays the descriptive name of the Switch for identification Name purposes ZyNOS F W This field displays the version number of the Switch s current firmware Version including the date created Ethernet This field refers to the Ethernet MAC Media Access Control address of the Address Switch Hardware Mon itor Temperature The Switch has temperature sensors that are capable of detecting and Unit reporting if the temperature rises above the threshold You may choose the temperature unit Centigrade or Fahrenheit in this field Temperature BOARD PHY and MAC refer to the location of the temperature sensors on the Switch printed circuit board Current This shows the current temperature at this sensor MAX This f
316. ort e i XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 7 System Status and Port Statistics The following table describes the labels in this screen Table7 Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This identifies the Ethernet port Click a port number to display the Port Details screen refer to Figure 38 on page 73 Name This is the name you assigned to this port in the Basic Setting gt Port Setup screen Link This field displays the speed either 10M for 10 Mbps 100M for 100 Mbps 1000M for 1000 Mbps and 10G for 10 Gbps and the duplex F for full duplex or H for half It also shows the cable type Copper or Fiber for the combo ports State If STP Spanning Tree Protocol is enabled this field displays the STP state of the port See Section 13 1 3 on page 127 for more information If STP is disabled this field displays FORWARDING if the link is up otherwise it displays STOP LACP This fields displays whether LACP Link Aggregation Control Protocol has been enabled on the port TxPkts This field shows the number of transmitted frames on this port RxPkts This field shows the number of received frames on this port Errors This field shows the number of received errors on this port Tx KB s This field shows the transmission speed of data sent on this port in kilobytes per second Rx KB s This field shows the transmission speed of data received on this port in kilobytes per second
317. ory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last saved values XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 26 IP Source Guard 26 5 1 DHCP Snooping Port Configure Use this screen to specify whether ports are trusted or untrusted ports for DHCP snooping Note The Switch will drop all DHCP requests if you enable DHCP snooping and there are no trusted ports You can also specify the maximum number for DHCP packets that each port trusted or untrusted can receive each second To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt DHCP Snooping gt Configure gt Port Figure 125 DHCP Snooping Port Configure CO DHCP Snooping Port Configure J Configure Port Server Trusted state Rate pps Untrusted Untrusted b 2 Untrusted pS 3 Untrusted o o oo 4 Untrusted pS 5 Untrusted o 6 Untrusted o 7 Untrusted b Apply Cancel XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 26 IP Source Guard The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 78 DHCP Snooping Port Configure LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This field displays the port number If you configure the port the settings are applied to all of the ports Server Trusted state Se
318. oua arid aac paa cross aa ec ar ec RO cna ntu oec Ga onc RR 69 Chapter 7 System Status and Port Statistics auus end din dtd Ra FRE ERR E RR RR 1A REIR PE IR Rak REF aa KiaK ata 71 poE Uo fe 71 Peron CINES DL M 71 12 XGS 4728F User s Guide Table of Contents Qo laus Pot Dells aina bb otn aea aeta a ond Pat poc Ran 73 Chapter 8 Base SENO n Se re a A G 77 NEN CU PT a EU 77 ccr reni 78 EODEM OS wixnindnaxixigucnib diii ades Cami das E padri dam dr rU pon ur oss 80 SA Mnice mista e i eI 82 E41 mart lois Sill aigean Dia rr rrer Teer rr ert errr on E RR neu uod d ra etree 83 Ga Me iem IL E T T 84 HR M evans 86 So F NT et 86 Ca FOR oO ede c 89 GCSE E 93 Chapter 9 Lis 95 91 Introduction te IEEE 802 TO Tagged VLANS usse teietes aannaaien 95 9 1 1 Forwarding Tagged and Untagged Frames essen 95 pe Aoi ei VLAN POC ere cuteihbeeinediltebdbisbpsbee Ultimos UiOddi aM UNES a EUER IR BER TN du LEE QU RE n QUON 96 J2 Nc T m 96 EL EUMD ioca onu b KE Caf Ma treet ret rennet ener CEDAR aU CU N UG ream CUR TROUPE 96 Super vL TAONG scutsacdtesntcidlotabeir eot hostiteste bei debeat nce itat nue itmot n ed toda Ehe tant ib asit do EP RE 97 94 Select The VLAN TYDE autoxxxstentcait tero EN at busp dia
319. oups that are unknown to those switches to pass through their VLAN trunking port s Figure 44 Port VLAN Trunking c E TN EB N V1 v2 D V1 v2 9 4 Select the VLAN Type Select a VLAN type in the Basic Setting Switch Setup screen Figure 45 Switch Setup Select VLAN Type L ED Switch Setup amp 802410 VLAN Type C Port Based 9 5 Static VLAN Use a static VLAN to decide whether an incoming frame on a port should be sent to a VLAN group as normal depending on its VLAN tag sent to a group whether it has a VLAN tag or not blocked from a VLAN group regardless of its VLAN tag You can also tag all outgoing frames that were previously untagged from a port with the specified VID XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN 9 5 1 VLAN Status See Section 9 1 on page 95 for more information on Static VLAN Click Advanced Application gt VLAN from the navigation panel to display the VLAN Status screen as shown next Figure 46 Advanced Application gt VLAN VLAN Status ORE Status J VLAN Port Setting Static VLAN VLAN Search by VID Search The Number of YLAN 1 Index VID Elapsed Time Status 1 1 0 52 21 Static Change Pages Previous Next The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 15 Advanced Application gt VLAN VLAN Status LABEL DESCRIPTION VLAN Search Enter an existing VLAN ID number s separated by a comma an
320. ource VLAN ID in the binding Port This field displays the port number in the binding If this field is blank the binding applies to all ports 26 3 IP Source Guard Static Binding Use this screen to manage static bindings for DHCP snooping and ARP inspection Static bindings are uniquely identified by the MAC address and VLAN ID Each MAC address and VLAN ID can only be in one static binding If you try to create a static binding with the same MAC address and VLAN ID as an existing static binding the XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 26 IP Source Guard new static binding replaces the original one To open this screen click Advanced Application IP Source Guard Static Binding Figure 122 IP Source Guard Static Binding ESE NEN IPSG MAC Address IP Address VLAN Port D G Any Add Cancel Clear Index MAC Address IP Address Lease Type VLAN Port Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 75 IP Source Guard Static Binding LABEL DESCRIPTION MAC Address Enter the source MAC address in the binding IP Address Enter the IP address assigned to the MAC address in the binding VLAN Enter the source VLAN ID in the binding Port Specify the port s in the binding If this binding has one port select the first radio button and enter the port number in the field to the right If this binding
321. p to which frames containing the specified multicast MAC address will be forwarded Port This field displays the port s within a identified VLAN group to which frames containing the specified multicast MAC address will be forwarded Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes XGS 4728F User s Guide This chapter discusses MAC address port filtering 12 1 Configure a Filtering Rule Filtering Configure the Switch to filter traffic based on the traffic s source destination MAC addresses and or VLAN group ID Click Advanced Application gt Filtering in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown next Figure 62 Advanced Application gt Filtering ED Filtering g Active Name Action MAC VID r Discard source Discard destination CECE CO Ada Cancel Clear Index Active Name MAC Address VID Delete Cancel The following table describes the related labels in this screen Table 24 Advanced Application gt Filtering LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Make sure to select this check box to activate your rule You may temporarily deactivate a rule without deleting it by deselecting this check box Name Type a descriptive name up to 32 printable ASCII characters for this rule This is for identification only XGS 4728F User s Guide LE Chap
322. packets and will be translated into the VID you specified in the Translated VI D field Enter a VLAN ID from 1 to 4094 into which the customer VID carried in the packets will be translated Priority Select a priority level from 0 to 7 This is the priority level that replaces the customer priority level in the tagged packets or adds to the untagged packets Add Click Add to insert the entry in the summary table below and save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration Index This is the number of the VLAN mapping entry in the table Active This shows whether this entry is activated or not Name This is the descriptive name for this rule XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 28 VLAN Mapping Table 88 VLAN Mapping Configuration continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This is the port number to which this rule is applied VID This is the customer VLAN ID in the incoming packets Translated VID This is the VLAN ID that replaces the customer VLAN ID in the tagged packets Priority This is the priority level that replaces the customer priority level in the tagged packets Delete Check the rule s that you want to
323. port before removing an IGMP snooping membership entry when an IGMP leave message is received on this port from a host Fast Leave Enter an IGMP fast leave timeout value from 200 to 6 348 800 in miliseconds Select this option to have the Switch use this timeout to update the forwarding table for the port This defines how many seconds the Switch waits for an IGMP report before removing an IGMP snooping membership entry when an IGMP leave message is received on this port from a host XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 24 Multicast Table 60 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Group Limited Max Group Num Select this option to limit the number of multicast groups this port is allowed to join Enter the number of multicast groups this port is allowed to join Once a port is registered in the specified number of multicast groups any new IGMP join report frame s is dropped on this port Throttling IGMP throttling controls how the Switch deals with the IGMP reports when the maximum number of the IGMP groups a port can join is reached Select Deny to drop any new IGMP join report received on this port until an existing multicast forwarding table entry is aged out Select Replace to replace an existing entry in the multicast forwarding table with the new IGMP report s received on this port IGMP Filtering Profile Select the name of t
324. port 2 then only the devices with these five learned MAC addresses may access port 2 at any one time A sixth device would have to wait until one of the five learned MAC addresses aged out MAC address aging out time can be set in the Switch Setup screen The valid range is from O to 16384 0 means this feature is disabled Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration Clear Click Clear to clear the fields to the factory defaults Index This field displays the index number of the rule Click an index number to change the settings Active This field displays Yes when the rule is activated and No when is it deactivated Port This field displays the number of the port to which this rule is applied VID This is the VLAN ID number to which the port belongs Limit Number This is the maximum number of MAC addresses which a port can learn in a VLAN Delete Check the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete column and then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to clear the selected checkbox es in the Delete column XGS 4728F User s Guide Classifier This chapter introduces and shows you how to
325. product s page 3 Select the certification you wish to view from this page ZyXEL Limited Warranty ZyXEL warrants to the original end user purchaser that this product is free from any defects in materials or workmanship for a period of up to two years from the date of purchase During the warranty period and upon proof of purchase should the product have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and or materials ZyXEL will at its discretion repair or replace the defective products or components without charge for either parts or labor and to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to restore the product or components to proper operating condition Any replacement will consist of a new or re manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal or higher value and will be solely at the discretion of ZyXEL This warranty shall not apply if the product has been modified misused tampered with damaged by an act of God or subjected to abnormal working conditions Note Repair or replacement as provided under this warranty is the exclusive remedy of the purchaser This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties express or implied including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose ZyXEL shall in no event be held liable for indirect or consequential damages of any kind to the purchaser To obtain the services of this warranty contact ZyXEL s Service Center for your Return Material Au
326. ption Agent URL Write delay timer Abort timer Agent running Delay timer expiry Abort timer expiry Last succeeded time Last failed time Last failed reason Total attempts Startup failures Successful transfers Failed transfers Successful reads Failed reads Successful writes Failed writes Database detail Description First successful access Last ignored bindings counters Binding collisions Invalid interfaces Parse failures Expired leases Unsupported vlans Lastignored time Total ignored bindings counters Binding collisions Invalid interfaces Parse failures Expired leases Unsupported vlans e Confiqure IPS Status 300 seconds 300 seconds None Not Running Not Running None None No failure recorded Times oioioioioioioio Status None ocoocooo None ocoocooo XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 26 IP Source Guard The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 76 DHCP Snooping LABEL DESCRIPTION Database Status This section displays the current settings for the DHCP snooping database You can configure them in the DHCP Snooping Configure screen See Section 26 5 on page 241 Agent URL This field displays the location of the DHCP snooping database Write delay timer This field displays how long in seconds the Switch tries to complete a specific update in the DHCP snooping database before it gives up Abort timer
327. quests that it relays to a DHCP server Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XGS 4728F User s Guide 311 Chapter 37 DHCP 37 4 3 Global DHCP Relay Configuration Example The follow figure shows a network example where the Switch is used to relay DHCP requests for the VLAN1 and VLAN2 domains There is only one DHCP server that services the DHCP clients in both domains Figure 177 Global DHCP Relay Network Example b DHCP Server B 7 192 168 1 100 O VLAN2 Configure the DHCP Relay screen as shown Make sure you select the Option 82 check box to set the Switch to send additional information such as the VLAN ID together with the DHCP requests to the DHCP server This allows the DHCP server to assign the appropriate IP address according to the VLAN ID Figure 178 DHCP Relay Configuration Example a DHCP Relay Status Active Iv Remote DHCP Server 1 192 168 1 100 Remote DHCP Server 2 0 0 0 0 Remote DHCP Server 3 0 0 0 0 Relay Agent Information Vv Option 82 Information r1 Apply Cancel 312 XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 37 DHCP 37 5 Configuring DHCP VLAN
328. r VRID This field displays the ID number of the virtual router XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 38 VRRP Table 115 P Application VRRP Status continued LABEL DESCRIPTION VR Status This field displays the status of the virtual router This field is Master indicating that this Switch functions as the master router This field is Backup indicating that this Switch functions as a backup router This field displays I nit when this Switch is initiating the VRRP protocol or when the Uplink Status field displays Dead Uplink This field displays the status of the link between this Switch and the uplink Status gateway This field is Alive indicating that the link between this Switch and the uplink gateway is up Otherwise this field is Dead This field displays Probe when this Switch is check for the link state Poll The text box displays how often in seconds this screen refreshes You Interval s may change the refresh interval by typing a new number in the text box and then clicking Set I nterval Stop Click Stop to halt system statistic polling 38 3 VRRP Configuration The following sections describe the different parts of the VRRP Configuration screen 38 3 1 IP Interface Setup Before configuring VRRP first create an IP interface or routing domain in the IP Setup screen see the Section 8 6 on page 86 for more information Click IP Application VRRP and click the Configuratio
329. r Server Telephone XGS 4728F User s Guide Safety Warnings Safety Warnings Do NOT use this product near water for example in a wet basement or near a swimming pool Do NOT expose your device to dampness dust or corrosive liquids Do NOT store things on the device Do NOT install use or service this device during a thunderstorm There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device Do NOT open the device or unit Opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks ONLY qualified service personnel should service or disassemble this device Please contact your vendor for further information For continued protection against risk of fire replace only with same type and rating of fuse Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them Always disconnect all cables from this device before servicing or disassembling Use ONLY an appropriate power adaptor or cord for your device Connect it to the right supply voltage for example 110V AC in North America or 230V AC in Europe Do NOT allow anything to rest on the power adaptor or cord and do NOT place the product where anyone can walk on the power adaptor or cord Do NOT use the device if the power adaptor or cord is damaged as it might
330. r yet Total number of logs This field displays the number of log messages that were generated by ARP packets and that have not been sent to the syslog server yet If one or more log messages are dropped due to unavailable buffer there is an entry called overflow with the current number of dropped log messages Index This field displays a sequential number for each log message Port This field displays the source port of the ARP packet VID This field displays the source VLAN ID of the ARP packet Sender Mac This field displays the source MAC address of the ARP packet XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 26 IP Source Guard Table 82 ARP Inspection Log Status continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Sender IP This field displays the source IP address of the ARP packet Num Pkts This field displays the number of ARP packets that were consolidated into this log message The Switch consolidates identical log messages generated by ARP packets in the log consolidation interval into one log message You can configure this interval in the ARP Inspection Configure screen See Section 26 7 on page 249 Reason This field displays the reason the log message was generated dhcp deny An ARP packet was discarded because it violated a dynamic binding with the same MAC address and VLAN ID static deny An ARP packet was discarded because it violated a static binding with the same MAC address and VLAN ID
331. r changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration IP Interface Use these fields to create or edit IP routing domains on the Switch IP Enter the IP address of your Switch in dotted decimal notation for Address example 192 168 1 1 This is the IP address of the Switch in an IP routing domain IP Subnet Enter the IP subnet mask of an IP routing domain in dotted decimal Mask notation for example 255 255 255 0 VID Enter the VLAN identification number to which an IP routing domain belongs Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration Index This field displays the index number of an entry IP Address This field displays IP address of the Switch in the IP domain IP Subnet This field displays the subnet mask of the Switch in the IP domain Mask VID This field displays the VLAN identification number of the IP domain on the Switch Delete Click Delete to remove the selected
332. r failure Once the Switch receives power from the backup power supply it will not automatically switch back to using the internal power supply even when the power is resumed 3 2 3 Console Port For local management you can use a computer with terminal emulation software configured to the following parameters VT100 terminal emulation 9600 bps No parity 8 data bits 1 stop bit No flow control Connect the male 9 pin end of the RS 232 console cable to the console port of the Switch Connect the female end to a serial port COM1 COM2 or other COM port of your computer 3 3 LEDs The following table describes the LEDs Table3 LEDs LED COLO STATUS DESCRIPTION BPS Green Blinking The system is receiving power from the backup power supply On The backup power supply is connected and active Off The backup power supply is not ready or not active PWR Green On The system is turned on Off The system is off SYS Green Blinking The system is rebooting and performing self diagnostic tests On The system is on and functioning properly Off The power is off or the system is not ready malfunctioning XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 3 Hardware Overview Table3 LEDs continued LED COLO status DESCRIPTION ALM Red On There is a hardware failure Off The system is functioning normally S1 Green On The Swi
333. r is implemented on the Switch for remote management and file transfer on port 22 Only one SSH connection is allowed at a time Requirements for Using SSH You must install an SSH client program on a client computer Windows or Linux operating system that is used to connect to the Switch over SSH 40 7 Introduction to HTTPS HTTPS HyperText Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer or HTTP over SSL is a web protocol that encrypts and decrypts web pages Secure Socket Layer SSL is an application level protocol that enables secure transactions of data by ensuring confidentiality an unauthorized party cannot read the transferred data authentication one party can identify the other party and data integrity you know if data has been changed It relies upon certificates public keys and private keys HTTPS on the Switch is used so that you may securely access the Switch using the web configurator The SSL protocol specifies that the SSL server the Switch must always authenticate itself to the SSL client the computer which requests the HTTPS connection with the Switch whereas the SSL client only should authenticate itself when the SSL server requires it to do so Authenticating client certificates is optional and if selected means the SSL client must send the Switch a certificate You must apply for a certificate for the browser from a Certificate Authority CA that is a trusted CA on the Switch Please refer to the following f
334. r more information on IP multicast addresses End Address Enter the ending IP multicast address of the multicast group in dotted decimal notation Enter the same IP address as the Start Address field if you want to configure only one IP address for a multicast group Refer to Section 24 1 1 on page 199 for more information on IP multicast addresses XGS 4728F User s Guide 2n Chapter 24 Multicast Table 64 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR Group Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh MVLAN This field displays the multicast VLAN ID Name This field displays the descriptive name for this setting Start This field displays the starting IP address of the multicast group Address End Address This field displays the ending IP address of the multicast group Delete Select Delete All or Delete Group and click Delete to remove the selected entry ies from the table Cancel Select Cancel to clear the checkbox es in the table 24 8 1 MVR Configuration Example The following figure shows a network example where ports 1 2 and 3 on
335. r password Click Management gt Access Control gt Logins to display the next screen Figure 18 Change Administrator Login Password Access Control New Password Retype to confirm Please record your new password whenever you change it The system will lock you out if you have forgotten your password Edit Logins Login User Name Password Retype to confirm MM n iom SM eae wistianismisiiscr vismisiimistaii Jj ees D ine L S ll Apply Cancel 4 4 Saving Your Configuration When you are done modifying the settings in a screen click Apply to save your changes back to the run time memory Settings in the run time memory are lost when the Switch s power is turned off Click the Save link in the upper right hand corner of the web configurator to save your configuration to nonvolatile memory Nonvolatile memory refers to the Switch s storage that remains even if the Switch s power is turned off Note Use the Save link when you are done with a configuration session XGS 4728F User s Guide 51 Chapter 4 The Web Configurator 4 5 Switch Lockout You could block yourself and all others from using in band management managing through the data ports if you do one of the following 1 Delete the management VLAN default is VLAN 1 2 Delete all port based VLANs with the CPU port as a member The CPU port is the management port of the Switch 3 Filter all traffic to the CPU por
336. r the profile name and specify a different IP multicast address range Start Address Type the starting multicast IP address for a range of multicast IP addresses that you want to belong to the IGMP filter profile End Address Type the ending multicast IP address for a range of IP addresses that you want to belong to the IGMP filter profile If you want to add a single multicast IP address enter it in both the Start Address and End Address fields Add Click Add to save the profile to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Clear Click Clear to clear the fields to the factory defaults Profile Name This field displays the descriptive name of the profile Start Address End Address This field displays the start of the multicast address range This field displays the end of the multicast address range XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 24 Multicast Table 62 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Filtering Profile continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Delete To delete the profile s and all the accompanying rules select the profile s that you want to remove in the Delete Profile column then click the Delete button To delete a rule s from a profile select the rule s
337. r the subnet mask for this summary IP address which can cover mask multiple networks Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 33 6 Configuring OSPF Interfaces To configure an OSPF interface first create an IP routing domain in the IP Setup screen see Section 8 6 on page 86 for more information Once you create an IP routing domain an OSPF interface entry is automatically created See Section 33 1 on page 277 for more information on OSPF XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 33 OSPF In the OSPF Configuration screen click Interface to display the OSPF nterface screen Figure 155 IP Application gt OSPF Configuration gt OSPF Interface Network Area ID Authentication Key ID Key Cost Priority Ossie Configuration 192 168 1 1 24 192 168 1 1 None X 1 15 1 Index Network 1 192 168 1 1 24 Add Cancel Clear Area ID Authentication Key ID Cost Priority Delete 182 168 1 1 None 1 15 111 C Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 101 IP Application gt OSPF Configuration gt OSPF Interface LABEL Network DESCRIPTION Select an IP interf
338. r their VLAN group The service provider can separate these two VLANs within its network by adding tag 37 to XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 23 VLAN Stacking distinguish customer A and tag 48 to distinguish customer B at edge device 1 and then stripping those tags at edge device 2 as the data frames leave the network Figure 98 VLAN Stacking Example A A VLAN 24 VLAN 24 23 2 VLAN Stacking Port Roles Each port can have three VLAN stacking roles Normal Access Port and Tunnel the latter is for Gigabit ports only Select Normal for regular non VLAN stacking IEEE 802 1Q frame switching Select Access Port for ingress ports on the service provider s edge devices 1 and 2 in the VLAN stacking example figure The incoming frame is treated as untagged so a second VLAN tag outer VLAN tag can be added Note Static VLAN Tx Tagging MUST be disabled on a port where you choose Normal or Access Port Select Tunnel Port available for Gigabit ports only for egress ports at the edge of the service provider s network All VLANs belonging to a customer can be aggregated into a single service provider s VLAN using the outer VLAN tag defined by the Service Provider s SP VLAN ID VID Note Static VLAN Tx Tagging MUST be enabled on a port where you choose Tunnel Port XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 23 VLAN Stacking 23 3 VLAN Tag Format A VLAN tag service provider VLAN stacking or customer IEEE
339. rce Guard Table 84 ARP Inspection Port Configure continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Burst interval The burst interval is the length of time over which the rate of ARP seconds packets is monitored for each port For example if the Rate is 15 pps and the burst interval is 1 second then the Switch accepts a maximum of 15 ARP packets in every one second interval If the burst interval is 5 seconds then the Switch accepts a maximum of 75 ARP packets in every five second interval Enter the length 1 15 seconds of the burst interval Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last saved values 26 7 2 ARP Inspection VLAN Configure Use this screen to enable ARP inspection on each VLAN and to specify when the Switch generates log messages for receiving ARP packets from each VLAN To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection Configure VLAN Figure 132 ARP Inspection VLAN Configure E ARP Inspection VLAN Configure Confiqure VLAN Start VID End VID Apply VID Enabled Log S No None Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 85
340. reen 10 1000 Mbps Amber 100 Mbps mini GBI C 1000Base T LEDs steady link state blinking transmitting receiving Operating Temperature 09 C 459 C 322 F 113 F Humidity 10 9096 non condensing Storage Environment Temperature 109 C 702 C 132 F 158 F Humidity 10 9096 non condensing Ground Wire Gauge 18 AWG or larger Power Wire Gauge 18 AWG or larger Fuse Specification 250 VAC TAA For DC version switchboard Approvals Safety UL 60950 1 CSA 60950 1 EN 60950 1 IEC 60950 1 EMC FCC Part 15 Class A CE EMC Class A Table 148 Firmware Specifications FEATURE DESCRIPTION Default IP Address In band 192 168 1 1 Out of band Management port 192 168 0 1 Default Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 24 bits Administrator User admin Name Default Password 1234 Number of Login Accounts Configurable on the Switch 4 management accounts configured on the Switch Authentication via RADIUS and TACACS also available IP Routing Domain An IP interface also known as an IP routing domain is not bound to a physical port Configure an IP routing domain to allow the Switch to route traffic between different networks XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 50 Product Specifications Table 148 Firmware Specifications FEATURE DESCRIPTION VLAN A VLAN Virtual Local Area Network allows a physical netwo
341. remove in the Delete column and then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes XGS 4728F User s Guide Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling This chapter shows you how to configure layer 2 protocol tunneling on the Switch 29 1 Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling Overview Layer 2 protocol tunneling L2PT is used on the service provider s edge devices L2PT allows edge switches 1 and 2 in the following figure to tunnel layer 2 STP Spanning Tree Protocol CDP Cisco Discovery Protocol and VTP VLAN Trunking Protocol packets between customer switches A B and C in the following figure connected through the service provider s network The edge switch encapsulates layer 2 protocol packets with a specific MAC address before sending them across the service provider s network to other edge switches Figure 141 Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling Network Scenario Service Provider s i Network L In the following example if you enable L2PT for STP you can have switches A B C and D in the same spanning tree even though switch A is not directly connected to switches B C and D Topology change information can be propagated throughout the service provider s network To emulate a point to point topology between two customer switches at different sites such as A and B you can enable protocol tunneling on edge switches 1 and XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 29 Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling 2 for PAgP
342. rent update has finished successfully or timed out In this case the Switch waits to start the next update until it completes the current one Agent URL Enter the location of the DHCP snooping database The location should be expressed like this tftp domain name or I P address directory if applicable file name for example tftp 192 168 10 1 database txt Timeout interval Enter how long 10 65535 seconds the Switch tries to complete a specific update in the DHCP snooping database before it gives up Write delay interval Enter how long 10 65535 seconds the Switch waits to update the DHCP snooping database the first time the current bindings change after an update Once the next update is scheduled additional changes in current bindings are automatically included in the next update Renew DHCP Snooping URL Enter the location of a DHCP snooping database and click Renew if you want the Switch to load it You can use this to load dynamic bindings from a different DHCP snooping database than the one specified in Agent URL When the Switch loads dynamic bindings from a DHCP snooping database it does not discard the current dynamic bindings first If there is a conflict the Switch keeps the dynamic binding in volatile memory and updates the Binding collisions counter in the DHCP Snooping screen Section 26 4 on page 238 Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time mem
343. rgot the IP address for the Switch 1 2 3 The default in band IP address is 192 168 1 1 Use the console port to log in to the Switch Use the MGMT port to log in to the Switch the default IP address of the MGMT port is 192 168 0 1 If this does not work you have to reset the device to its factory defaults See Section 4 6 on page 52 388 XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 49 Troubleshooting forgot the username and or password 1 The default username is admin and the default password is 1234 2 If this does not work you have to reset the device to its factory defaults See Section 4 6 on page 52 cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator 1 Make sure you are using the correct IP address The default in band IP address is 192 168 1 1 f you changed the IP address use the new IP address f you changed the IP address and have forgotten it see the troubleshooting suggestions for forgot the IP address for the Switch 2 Check the hardware connections and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected See Section 3 3 on page 41 3 Make sure your Internet browser does not block pop up windows and has JavaScripts and Java enabled 4 Make sure your computer is in the same subnet as the Switch If you know that there are routers between your computer and the Switch skip this step 5 Reset the device to its factory defaults and try to access the Switch with the d
344. rk to be partitioned into multiple logical networks Devices on a logical network belong to one group A device can belong to more than one group With VLAN a device cannot directly talk to or hear from devices that are not in the same group s the traffic must first go through a router VLAN Stacking MAC Address Filter Use VLAN stacking to add an outer VLAN tag to the inner IEEE 802 1Q tagged frames that enter the network By tagging the tagged frames double tagged frames the service provider can manage up to 4 094 VLAN groups with each group containing up to 4 094 customer VLANs This allows a service provider to provide different service based on specific VLANs for many different customers Filter traffic based on the source and or destination MAC address and VLAN group ID DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Use this feature to have the Switch assign IP addresses an IP default gateway and DNS servers to computers on your network IGMP Snooping The Switch supports IGMP snooping enabling group multicast traffic to be only forwarded to ports that are members of that group thus allowing you to significantly reduce multicast traffic passing through your Switch Differentiated Services DiffServ With DiffServ the Switch marks packets so that they receive specific per hop treatment at DiffServ compliant network devices along the route based on the application types and traffic flow Clas
345. rmware Upgrade Restore Configuration Backup Configuration Load Factory Default Save Configuration Reboot System Click Here Click Here Click Here Click Here Config 1 Config 2 Config 1 Config 2 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 119 Management gt Maintenance LABEL DESCRIPTION Current This field displays which configuration Configuration 1 or Configuration 2 is currently operating on the Switch Firmware Click Click Here to go to the Firmware Upgrade screen Upgrade Restore Click Click Here to go to the Restore Configuration screen Configurati on Backup Click Click Here to go to the Backup Configuration screen Configurati on Load Click Click Here to reset the configuration to the factory default settings Factory Default XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 39 Maintenance 39 2 Table 119 Management gt Maintenance continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Save Click Config 1 to save the current configuration settings to Configuration Configurati 1 on the Switch on Click Config 2 to save the current configuration settings to Configuration 2 on the Switch Reboot Click Config 1 to reboot the system and load Configuration 1 on the System Switch Click Config 2 to reboot the system and load Configuration 2 on the Switch Note Make sure to click the Save button in any screen to save your settings to the current configura
346. rned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 276 XGS 4728F User s Guide OSPF This chapter describes the OSPF Open Shortest Path First routing protocol and shows you how to configure OSPF 33 1 OSPF Overview OSPF Open Shortest Path First is a link state protocol designed to distribute routing information within an autonomous system AS An autonomous system is a collection of networks using a common routing protocol to exchange routing information OSPF offers some advantages over traditional vector space routing protocols such as RIP The following table summarizes some of the major differences between OSPF and RIP Table 93 OSPF vs RIP OSPF RIP Network Large Small with up to 15 routers Size Metrics Bandwidth hop count throughput Hop count round trip time and reliability Convergenc Fast Slow e 33 1 1 OSPF Autonomous Systems and Areas An OSPF autonomous system AS can be divided into logical areas Each area represents a group of adjacent networks All areas are connected to a backbone also known as area 0 The backbone is the transit area to route packets between two areas A stub area at the edge of an AS is not a transit area since there is only one connection to the stub area
347. rotocol used to establish membership in a multicast group it is not used to carry user data Refer to RFC 1112 RFC 2236 and RFC 3376 for information on IGMP versions 1 2 and 3 respectively IP Multicast Addresses In IPv4 a multicast address allows a device to send packets to a specific group of hosts multicast group in a different subnetwork A multicast IP address represents a traffic receiving group not individual receiving devices IP addresses in the Class D range 224 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 are used for IP multicasting Certain IP multicast numbers are reserved by IANA for special purposes see the IANA website for more information IGMP Filtering With the IGMP filtering feature you can control which IGMP groups a subscriber on a port can join This allows you to control the distribution of multicast services such as content information distribution based on service plans and types of subscription You can set the Switch to filter the multicast group join reports on a per port basis by configuring an IGMP filtering profile and associating the profile to a port XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 24 Multicast 24 1 3 24 1 4 IGMP Snooping The Switch can passively snoop on I GMP packets transferred between IP multicast routers switches and IP multicast hosts to learn the IP multicast group membership It checks IGMP packets passing through it picks out the group registration information and configures multica
348. rst to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Source Port Select this option to set this port as the MVR source port that sends and receives multicast traffic All source ports must belong to a single multicast VLAN Receiver Port Select this option to set this port as a receiver port that only receives multicast traffic None Select this option to set the port not to participate in MVR No MVR multicast traffic is sent or received on this port Tagging Select this checkbox if you want the port to tag the VLAN ID in all outgoing frames transmitted Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh VLAN This field displays the multicast VLAN ID Active This field displays whether the multicast group is enabled or not Name This field displays the descriptive name for this setting Mode This field displays the MVR mode Source Port This field displays the source port number s Receiver Port This field displays the receiver port number s 802 1p This field displays the priority level
349. rt Enter the port where the MAC address entered in the previous field will be automatically forwarded Add Click Add to save your rule to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses this rule if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults Index Click an index number to modify a static MAC address rule for a port Active This field displays whether this static MAC address forwarding rule is active Yes or not No You may temporarily deactivate a rule without deleting it Name This field displays the descriptive name for identification purposes for this static MAC address forwarding rule This field displays the MAC address that will be forwarded and the VLAN identification number to which the MAC address belongs VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 10 Static MAC Forward Setup Table 22 Advanced Application Static MAC Forwarding continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This field displays the port where the MAC address shown in the next field will be forwarded Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes XGS 472
350. ru M 43 Chapter 4 The Web 0 45 LEM er MERE E TU UU T T 45 PSION iann EN ean Dad RE aa abu Festina itu dept dd 45 CEUgE Seni1 3e c r 46 425 Cee Your Password isnsaseiidirect ot Feb da aede cad ce a Ra gv dn dax ag T pads 51 4A Gano Your LSHIOUISDOEE seamana E er NTa 51 ALG OMCN LOGKOUT RE 52 m2 ROSETTE SNET anaa AASA A aN s aad Emu Dd 52 4 6 1 Baload ihe Coniguration Fle 1 ieeoiiscie tbi dd e tete adae a ves Duda a aa Dude D Re UIS 52 4 7 Logging Qui ar the Web Contigifalal 2 oon sedo t a etre a tete bb n RR dS Ree 54 Li Mgr aa TI TUTTI 54 Chapter 5 initial Setup O SOO 55 ZNERIOI M 55 5T CORA e IP LENGHT ACS sosczunums renes Dogg Fansub Na apa cs and UE ad 55 5 1 2 Conigurmg DHCP Server Saettiht B smerissen ia aS 57 Bae Grang a ILAN iira o ea aAa AAN NEATA 57 sa e anea ad E T t cr 59 LO Ene lig RIF siusis a a 60 Chapter 6 Hu A9 o 61 6 1 How to Use DHCP Snooping on The SWING uuu aieac e kaena sad nbn aic rra tik tac 61 6 2 How to Wee DHCP Relay on the Swit auiccoestbbesvicdsss beptXs dub bere sua d ao peti d s hene Ux d PEE o Nd dk rene qid 65 a1 DHCP Relay Tutar OG dede os petit d eot rad ped Dr ket a dates 65 Bc OCAMI E VLA sapri neni oneree rant a oat Paz eR Gau UES e Fa dS E E 66 Sooo MI rer gra DHCP ARIA TR 69 eee ToGBUBIOS OH 42
351. rver X Figure 160 IGMP Version 3 Example x zz II Group 225 1 1 1 Server 13 2 2 2 Join 225 1 1 1 Include 10 1 1 1 34 2 Port based IGMP The Switch sends I GMP Query packets to all ports The Switch then listens for IGMP Report packets and it records which port the messages came from It then delivers multicast traffic to only those ports from which it received a request to join a multicast group XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 34 IGMP 34 3 Configuring IGMP Click IP Application gt IGMP in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown next Each entry in the table is automatically created when you configure a new IP domain in the IP Setup screen refer to Section 8 6 on page 86 Figure 161 IP Application gt IGMP e xcu Active O Unknown Multicast Frame c Flooding C Drop Index 1 2 Network Version 172 23 37 208 24 None 192 158 1 1 24 None z Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 103 P Application IGMP LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to enable IGMP on the Switch Note You cannot enable both IGMP snooping and IGMP at the same time Refer to Section 24 4 on page 203 for more information on IGMP snooping Unknown Multicast Frame Specify the action to perform when the Switch receives an unknown multicast frame Unknown multicast frames are addressed to multicast groups for whi
352. rver so that they are still available after a restart To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt DHCP Snooping gt Configure Figure 124 DHCP Snooping Configure D DHCP Snooping Configure Port VLAN DHCP Snooping Active r Disable DHCP Vian X Database Agent URL Timeout interval 300 seconds Write delay interval 300 seconds Renew DHCP Snooping URL Renew Apply Cancel XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 26 IP Source Guard The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 77 DHCP Snooping Configure LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this to enable DHCP snooping on the Switch You still have to enable DHCP snooping on specific VLAN and specify trusted ports Note The Switch will drop all DHCP requests if you enable DHCP snooping and there are no trusted ports DHCP Vlan Select a VLAN ID if you want the Switch to forward DHCP packets to DHCP servers on a specific VLAN Note You have to enable DHCP snooping on the DHCP VLAN too You can enable Option82 in the DHCP Snooping VLAN Configure screen Section 26 5 2 on page 244 to help the DHCP servers distinguish between DHCP requests from different VLAN Select Disable if you do not want the Switch to forward DHCP packets to a specific VLAN Database If Timeout interval is greater than Write delay interval it is possible that the next update is scheduled to occur before the cur
353. s Management Connect to a computer using an RJ 45 Ethernet cable for local Port configuration of the Switch Console Port Only connect this port to your computer using an RS 232 cable if you want to configure the Switch using the command line interface CLI via the console port 3 2 1 Power Connector Make sure you are using the correct power source as shown on the panel and that no objects obstruct the airflow of the fans Use the following procedures to connect the Switch to a power source after you have installed it Note Check the power supply requirements in Chapter 50 on page 393 and make sure you are using an appropriate power source Keep the power supply switch and the Switch s power switch in the OFF position until you come to the procedure for turning on the power XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 3 Hardware Overview Use only power wires of the required diameter for connecting the Switch to a power supply 3 2 1 1 AC Power Connection Note This is only for the AC model of the Switch Connect the female end of the power cord to the power socket of your Switch Connect the other end of the cord to a power outlet 3 2 1 2 DC Power Connection Note This is only for the DC model of the Switch The Switch uses a single ETB series terminal block plug with four pins which allows you to connect up to two separate power supplies If one power supply fails the system can operate on th
354. s The following are some default DVMRP timer values Each IP routing domain DVMRP configuration must be in a different VLAN group otherwise you see the following screen Figure 166 DVMRP Duplicate VID Error Message Error Error Routing domains with same VID can t enable DVMRP simultaneously Back Table 105 DVMRP Default Timer Values DVMRP FIELD DEFAULT VALUE Probe interval 10 sec Report interval 35 sec Route expiration time 140 sec Prune lifetime Variable less than two hours Prune retransmission time 3 sec with exponential back off Graft retransmission time 5 sec with exponential back off XGS 4728F User s Guide 36 1 36 1 1 Differentiated Services This chapter shows you how to configure Differentiated Services DiffServ on the Switch DiffServ Overview Quality of Service QoS is used to prioritize source to destination traffic flows All packets in the flow are given the same priority You can use CoS class of service to give different priorities to different packet types DiffServ is a class of service CoS model that marks packets so that they receive specific per hop treatment at DiffServ compliant network devices along the route based on the application types and traffic flow Packets are marked with DiffServ Code Points DSCPs indicating the level of service desired This allows the intermediary DiffServ compliant network
355. s for a port It is not recommended you disable port security together with MAC address learning as this will result in many broadcasts By default MAC address learning is still enabled even though the port security is not activated XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 19 Port Security 19 2 Port Security Setup Click Advanced Application gt Port Security in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 89 Advanced Application gt Port Security Port Security Active Port Active i a 1 m 2 1 3 rH 4 7 r ED Port Security eg VLAN MAC Address Limit MAC Freeze Port List MAC freeze Address Learning Limited Number of Learned MAC Address IV xl xl Tt ks Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 44 Advanced Application gt Port Security LABEL DESCRIPTION Port List Enter the number of the port s separated by a comma on which you want to enable port security and disable MAC address learning After you click MAC freeze all previously learned MAC addresses on the specified port s will become static MAC addresses and display in the Static MAC Forwarding screen MAC freeze Click MAC freeze to have the Switch automatically select the Active check boxes and clear the Address Learning check boxes only for the ports specified in the Port list Active Select this option to enable port security on the Switch Port This field di
356. s Guide 207 Chapter 24 Multicast 24 6 2 24 6 3 Once configured the Switch maintains a forwarding table that matches the multicast stream to the associated multicast group MVR Modes You can set your Switch to operate in either dynamic or compatible mode In dynamic mode the Switch sends IGMP leave and join reports to the other multicast devices such as multicast routers or servers in the multicast VLAN This allows the multicast devices to update the multicast forwarding table to forward or not forward multicast traffic to the receiver ports In compatible mode the Switch does not send any IGMP reports In this case you must manually configure the forwarding settings on the multicast devices in the multicast VLAN How MVR Works The following figure shows a multicast television example where a subscriber device such as a computer in VLAN 1 receives multicast traffic from the streaming media server S via the Switch Multiple subscriber devices can connect through a port configured as the receiver on the Switch When the subscriber selects a television channel computer A sends an IGMP report to the Switch to join the appropriate multicast group If the IGMP report matches one of the configured MVR multicast group addresses on the Switch an entry is created in the forwarding table on the Switch This maps the subscriber VLAN to the list of forwarding destinations for the specified multicast traffic When the su
357. s field displays the subnet mask for this destination Gateway This field displays the IP address of the gateway The gateway is the Address immediate neighbor of your Switch that will forward the packet to the destination Metric This field displays the cost of transmission for routing purposes Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes XGS 4728F User s Guide 32 1 RIP This chapter shows you how to configure RIP Routing Information Protocol RIP Overview RIP Routing Information Protocol allows a routing device to exchange routing information with other routers The Direction field controls the sending and receiving of RIP packets When set to Both the Switch will broadcast its routing table periodically and incorporate the RIP information that it receives Incoming the Switch will not send any RIP packets but will accept all RIP packets received Outgoing the Switch will send out RIP packets but will not accept any RIP packets received None the Switch will not send any RIP packets and will ignore any RIP packets received The Version field controls the format and the broadcasting method of the RIP packets that the Switch sends it recognizes both formats when receiving RIP 1 is universally supported but RIP 2 carries more information RIP 1 is probably adequate for most networks unless
358. s per port The following list which is not exhaustive illustrates the standards supported in the Switch Table 150 Standards Supported STANDARD DESCRIPTION RFC 826 Address Resolution Protocol ARP RFC 867 Daytime Protocol RFC 868 Time Protocol RFC 894 Ethernet II Encapsulation XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 50 Product Specifications Table 150 Standards Supported continued STANDARD DESCRIPTION RFC 1058 RIP 1 Routing Information Protocol RFC 1112 IGMP v1 RFC 1155 SMI RFC 1157 SNMPv1 Simple Network Management Protocol version 1 RFC 1213 SNMP MIB II RFC 1305 Network Time Protocol NTP version 3 RFC 1441 SNMPv2 Simple Network Management Protocol version 2 RFC 1493 Bridge MIBs RFC 1643 Ethernet MIBs RFC 1723 RIP 2 Routing Information Protocol RFC 1757 RMON RFC 1901 SNMPv2c Simple Network Management Protocol version 2c RFC 2131 RFC 2132 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP RFC 2138 RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RFC 2139 RADIUS Accounting RFC 2236 Internet Group Management Protocol Version 2 RFC 2338 Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol VRRP RFC 2698 Two Rate Three Color Marker TRTCM RFC 2865 RADIUS Vendor Specific Attribute RFC 2674 P BRI DGE MIB Q BRI DGE MIB RFC 3046 DHCP Relay RFC 3164 Syslog RFC 3376 Internet Group
359. s power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Clear Click Clear to set the above fields back to the factory defaults 33 4 1 View OSPF Area Information Table The bottom of the OSPF Configuration screen displays a summary table of all the OSPF areas you have configured Figure 153 IP Application gt OSPF Configuration Summary Table Index Name 1 Examp Area ID Stub Network le 192 168 1 1 None No rH Delete Cancel Authentication Delete The following table describes the related labels in this screen Table 99 IP Application gt OSPF Configuration Summary Table LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This field displays the index number of an area Name This field displays the descriptive name of an area Area ID This field displays the area ID that uses the format of an IP address in dotted decimal notation that uniquely identifies an area An area ID of 0 0 0 0 indicates the backbone Authenticati on This field displays the authentication method used None Simple or MD5 XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 33 OSPF Table 99 IP Application gt OSPF Configuration Summary Table continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Stub This field displays whether an area is a stub network Yes or not No Network Delete Clic
360. s screen to configure a list of external syslog servers Figure 219 Management gt Syslog gt Server Setup e Syslog Server Setup Syslog Setup Active C Server Address 0 0 0 0 Log Level Level 0 Add Cancel Clear index Active IP Address Log Level Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 137 Management gt Syslog gt Server Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to have the device send logs to this syslog server Clear the check box if you want to create a syslog server entry but not have the device send logs to it you can edit the entry later Server Address Enter the IP address of the syslog server Log Level Select the severity level s of the logs that you want the device to send to this syslog server The lower the number the more critical the logs are Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Clear Click Clearto return the fields to the factory defaults Index This is the index number of a syslog server entry Click this number to edit the entry Active This field displays Yes if the device is to send logs to t
361. s these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Clear Click Clear to set the above fields back to the factory defaults 20 3 Viewing and Editing Classifier Configuration 176 To view a summary of the classifier configuration scroll down to the summary table at the bottom of the Classifier screen To change the settings of a rule click a number in the Index field Note When two rules conflict with each other a higher layer rule has priority over a lower layer rule Figure 92 Advanced Application gt Classifier Summary Table Index Active Name Rule Delete 3 Yes Example EtherType IP SrcMac 00 50 ba ad 4f 81 SrcPort port 2 O Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 47 Classifier Summary Table LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This field displays the index number of the rule Click an index number to edit the rule Active This field displays Yes when the rule is activated and No when it is deactivated Name This field displays the descriptive name for this rule This is for identification purposes only Rule This field displays a summary of the classifier rule s settings XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 20 Classifier Table 47 Cla
362. s to the base of the spanning tree the root bridge Our Bridge is this Switch This Switch may also be the root bridge Bridge ID This is the unique identifier for this bridge consisting of bridge priority plus MAC address This ID is the same for Root and Our Bridge if the Switch is the root switch Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds at which the root switch transmits second a configuration message Max Age This is the maximum time in seconds a switch can wait without second receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure Forwarding This is the time in seconds the root switch will wait before changing states that is listening to learning to forwarding Cost to Bridge This is the path cost from the root port on this Switch to the root switch Port ID This is the priority and number of the port on the Switch through which this Switch must communicate with the root of the Spanning Tree Configuration Name Revision Number This field displays the configuration name for this MST region This field displays the revision number for this MST region Configuration Digest Topology Changed Times A configuration digest is generated from the VLAN MSTI mapping information This field displays the 16 octet signature that is included in an MSTP BPDU This field displays the digest when MSTP is activated on the system This is the number of times the spanning tree has
363. save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh VLAN Name Use this section of the screen to add VLANs upon which the Switch is to perform IGMP snooping Enter the descriptive name of the VLAN for identification purposes XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 24 Multicast Table 61 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Snooping VLAN continued LABEL DESCRIPTION VID Enter the ID of a static VLAN the valid range is between 1 and 4094 Note You cannot configure the same VLAN ID as in the MVR screen Add Click Add to insert the entry in the summary table below and save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration Clear Click this to clear the fields Index This is the number of the IGMP snooping VLAN entry in the table Name This field displays the descriptive name for this VLAN group VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group Delete Check the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete column then click the Delete button Cancel
364. se this screen to configure the device s system logging settings Figure 218 Management gt Syslog lt Hace Syslog Server Setup Syslog Logging type System Interface Switch AAA IP Active M Active Facility iv local use 0 local use 0 local use 0 local use 0 local use 0 v SL XXII m Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 136 Management gt Syslog LABEL DESCRIPTION Syslog Select Active to turn on syslog system logging and then configure the syslog setting Logging Type This column displays the names of the categories of logs that the device can generate Active Select this option to set the device to generate logs for the corresponding category Facility The log facility allows you to send logs to different files in the syslog server Refer to the documentation of your syslog program for more details Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 42 Syslog 42 3 Syslog Server Setup Click Management gt Syslog gt Syslog Server Setup to open the following screen Use thi
365. senting a RADIUS server entry IP Address Enter the IP address of an external RADIUS server in dotted decimal notation UDP Port The default port of a RADIUS server for authentication is 1812 You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so Shared Secret Specify a password up to 32 alphanumeric characters as the key to be shared between the external RADIUS server and the Switch This key is not sent over the network This key must be the same on the external RADIUS server and the Switch Delete Check this box if you want to remove an existing RADIUS server entry from the Switch This entry is deleted when you click Apply Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Accounting Use this section to configure your RADIUS accounting server settings Server Timeout Specify the amount of time in seconds that the Switch waits for an accounting request response from the RADIUS accounting server Index This is a read only number representing a RADIUS accounting server entry IP Address Enter the IP address of an external RADIUS accounting server in dotted decimal notation UDP
366. ser Use Internet Explorer 6 0 and later or Firefox 2 0 and later versions The recommended screen resolution is 1024 by 768 pixels In order to use the web configurator you need to allow Web browser pop up windows from your device Web pop up blocking is enabled by default in Windows XP SP Service Pack 2 JavaScript enabled by default Java permissions enabled by default 4 2 System Login 1 Start your web browser 2 Type http and the IP address of the Switch for example the default management IP address is 192 168 1 1 through an in band non MGMT port and 192 168 0 1 through the MGMT port in the Location or Address field Press ENTER XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 4 The Web Configurator 3 The login screen appears The default username is admin and associated default password is 1234 The date and time display as shown if you have not configured a time server nor manually entered a time and date in the General Setup screen Figure 16 Web Configurator Login qe Please type your user name and password Site 182 168 1 1 Realm XGS 4728F at Thu Jan 1 00 00 17 1970 User Name Password Save this password in your password list omes 4 Click OK to view the first web configurator screen 4 3 The Status Screen The Status screen is the first screen that displays when you access the web configurator XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 4 The Web Configurator T
367. sifier and Policy You can create a policy to define actions to be performed on a traffic flow grouped by a classifier according to specific criteria such as the IP address port number or protocol type etc Queuing Queuing is used to help solve performance degradation when there is network congestion Three scheduling services are supported Strict Priority Queuing SPQ Weighted Round Robin WRR and Weighted Fair Queuing WFQ This allows the Switch to maintain separate queues for packets from each individual source or flow and prevent a source from monopolizing the bandwidth Port Mirroring Port mirroring allows you to copy traffic going from one or all ports to another or all ports in order that you can examine the traffic from the mirror port the port you copy the traffic to without interference Static Route Static routes tell the Switch how to forward IP traffic when you configure the TCP IP parameters manually Multicast VLAN Registration MVR Multicast VLAN Registration MVR is designed for applications such as Media on Demand MoD using multicast traffic across a network MVR allows one single multicast VLAN to be shared among different subscriber VLANs on the network This improves bandwidth utilization by reducing multicast traffic in the subscriber VLANs and simplifies multicast group XGS 4728F User s Guide management Chapter 50 Product Specifications Table 148 Firmw
368. size XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 7 System Status and Port Statistics XGS 4728F User s Guide Basic Setting This chapter describes how to configure the System Info General Setup Switch Setup IP Setup and Port Setup screens 8 1 Overview The System Info screen displays general Switch information such as firmware version number and hardware polling information such as fan speeds The General Setup screen allows you to configure general Switch identification information The General Setup screen also allows you to set the system time manually or get the current time and date from an external server when you turn on your Switch The real time is then displayed in the Switch logs The Switch Setup screen allows you to set up and configure global Switch features The IP Setup screen allows you to configure a Switch IP address in each routing domain subnet mask s and DNS domain name server for management purposes XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting 8 2 System Information In the navigation panel click Basic Setting gt System I nfo to display the screen as shown You can check the firmware version number and monitor the Switch temperature fan speeds and voltage in this screen Figure 39 Basic Setting gt System Info Hardware Monitor System Ino J ZyNOS FAW Version Temperature Unit C Temperature C Current MAX MIN Threshold Status BOARD 40 0 40 0 31 0 75 0 N
369. sole port telnet or SSH e Dotlx Configure the Switch to send information when an IEEE 802 1x client begins a session authenticates via the Switch ends a session as well as interim updates of a session Commands Configure the Switch to send information when a a of specified privilege level and higher are executed on the witch Active Select this to activate accounting for a specified event types Broadcast Select this to have the Switch send accounting information to all configured accounting servers at the same time If you don t select this and you have two accounting servers set up then the Switch sends information to the first accounting server and if it doesn t get a response from the accounting server then it tries the second accounting server Mode The Switch supports two modes of recording login events Select start stop to have the Switch send information to the accounting server when a user begins a session during a user s session if it lasts past the Update Period and when a user ends a session stop only to have the Switch send information to the accounting server only when a user ends a session Method Privilege Select whether you want to use RADIUS or TACACS for accounting of specific types of events TACACS is the only method for recording Commands type of event This field is only configurable for Commands type of event Select the threshold command privil
370. some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Ingress Rate Active Select this check box to activate commit rate limits on this port Rate Active Commit Specify the guaranteed bandwidth allowed in kilobits per second Kbps for the incoming traffic flow on a port The commit rate should be less than the peak rate The sum of commit rates cannot be greater than or equal to the uplink bandwidth Select this check box to activate peak rate limits on this port Peak Rate Specify the maximum bandwidth allowed in kilobits per second Kbps for the incoming traffic flow on a port XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 14 Bandwidth Control Table 34 Advanced Application gt Bandwidth Control continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to activate egress rate limits on this port Egress Rate Specify the maximum bandwidth allowed in kilobits per second Kbps for the out going traffic flow on a port Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to b
371. spection gt Configure gt Port Figure 131 ARP Inspection Port Configure C Ow Een Configure ens pingit Rate pps p interval seconds Untrusted v asd ta Unused 5 h 2 Untusted 5 3 Untrustea E 5 s _jUnirusted mM 5 6 00s 4llmstedi 5 1 0 0B Se Se awa fl Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 84 ARP Inspection Port Configure LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This field displays the port number If you configure the port the settings are applied to all of the ports Trusted State Select whether this port is a trusted port Trusted or an untrusted port Untrusted The Switch does not discard ARP packets on trusted ports for any reason The Switch discards ARP packets on untrusted ports in the following situations The sender s information in the ARP packet does not match any of the current bindings The rate at which ARP packets arrive is too high You can specify the maximum rate at which ARP packets can arrive on untrusted ports Limit Rate and Burst Interval settings have no effect on trusted ports Rate pps Specify the maximum rate 1 2048 packets per second at which the Switch receives ARP packets from each port The Switch discards any additional ARP packets Enter 0 to disable this limit XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 26 IP Sou
372. splays a port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some of the settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them 170 XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 19 Port Security Table 44 Advanced Application gt Port Security continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to enable the port security feature on this port The Switch forwards packets whose MAC address es is in the MAC address table on this port Packets with no matching MAC address es are dropped Clear this check box to disable the port security feature The Switch forwards all packets on this port Address MAC address learning reduces outgoing broadcast traffic For MAC Learning address learning to occur on a port the port itself must be active with address learning enabled Limited Use this field to limit the number of dynamic MAC addresses that may Number of be learned on a port For example if you set this field to 5 on port 2 Learned MAC then only the devices with these five learned MAC addresses may access Address port 2 at any one time A sixth device must wait until one of the five learned MAC addresses ages out MAC address aging out time can be set in the Switch Setup screen The valid range is
373. ssifier Click Advanced Application Classifier in the navigation panel to display the configuration screen as shown Figure 91 Advanced Application Classifier Narnia IP Address 0 008 Address Prefix Layer 3 1 Source e G Any ocket Number c IP Address jB 1 Address Prefix 000 Destination m G Any ocket Number cf Add Cancel Clear Index Active Name Rule Delete Cancel Active O Name Packet Format All VLAN ay Cc Priorit a cla All X Ethernet Type C Others Hex Layer 2 Ga gt Any MAC Address C MAC 3 Source G A Any Port C F Destinat MAC Add disi estination ress C MAC j DSCP S A amp All Establish Only rotoco C Others Dec Delete The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 46 Advanced Application gt Classifier LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this option to enable this rule Name Enter a descriptive name for this rule for identifying purposes IEEE 802 3 standards RFC 894 Ethernet encapsulation Packet Specify the format of the packet Choices are All 802 3 tagged 802 3 Format untagged Ethernet II tagged and Ethernet II untagged A value of 802 3 indicates that the packets are formatted according to the A value of Ethernet II indicates that the packets are formatted according to XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 20 Classifier Table 46
374. ssifier Summary Table LABEL DESCRIPTION Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes The following table shows some other common Ethernet types and the corresponding protocol number Table 48 Common Ethernet Types and Protocol Number ETHERNET TYPE PROTOCOL NUMBER IP ETHII 0800 X 75 Internet 0801 NBS Internet 0802 ECMA Internet 0803 Chaosnet 0804 X 25 Level 3 0805 XNS Compat 0807 Banyan Systems OBAD BBN Simnet 5208 IBM SNA 80D5 AppleTalk AARP 80F3 Some of the most common IP ports are Table 49 Common IP Ports OLET PORT NAME 2 FTP 23 Telnet 25 SMTP 53 DNS 80 HTTP 110 POP3 XGS 4728F User s Guide 1 77 Chapter 20 Classifier 20 4 Classifier Example The following screen shows an example of configuring a classifier that identifies all 178 traffic from MAC address 00 50 ba ad 4f 81 on port 2 Figure 93 Classifier Example Classifier Active Vv Name Example Packet Format All bd VLAN oe c G Any rior Y c fox JAI Ethernet Type C Others Hex DSCP a C AI Establish Only IP Protocol C Others Dec IP Address 0000 P Address Prefix Layer 3 Source c Any Socket Numb ocket Number c IP Add i ooo C ress 0 0 0 0 i Address Prefix D
375. sting accordingly IGMP snooping allows the Switch to learn multicast groups without you having to manually configure them The Switch forwards multicast traffic destined for multicast groups that it has learned from IGMP snooping or that you have manually configured to ports that are members of that group IGMP snooping generates no additional network traffic allowing you to significantly reduce multicast traffic passing through your Switch IGMP Snooping and VLANs The Switch can perform IGMP snooping on up to 16 VLANs You can configure the Switch to automatically learn multicast group membership of any VLANs The Switch then performs IGMP snooping on the first 16 VLANs that send IGMP packets This is referred to as auto mode Alternatively you can specify the VLANs that IGMP snooping should be performed on This is referred to as fixed mode In fixed mode the Switch does not learn multicast group membership of any VLANs other than those explicitly added as an IGMP snooping VLAN 24 2 Multicast Status Click Advanced Applications gt Multicast to display the screen as shown This screen shows the multicast group information See Section 24 1 on page 199 for more information on multicasting Figure 102 Advanced Application gt Multicast OLMIS Multicast Setting Index VID Port Multicast Group The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 59 Multicast Status LABEL DESCRIPTION
376. t Do not drop the matching frame previously marked for dropping Priority No change Setthe packet s 802 1 priority Send the packet to priority queue o Replace the 802 1 priority field with the IP TOS value Diffserv No change Setthe packet s TOS field Replace the IP TOS field with the 802 1 priority value Set the Diffserv Codepoint field in the frame Action Outgoing Send the packet to the mirror port Send the packet to the egress port Metering Enable Drop the packet Out of profile Change the DSCP value action Set Out Drop Precedence Do not drop the matching frame previously marked for dropping Add Cancel Clear Index Active Name Classifier s Delete Delete Cancel XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 21 Policy Rule The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 50 Advanced Application gt Policy Rule LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this option to enable the policy Name Enter a descriptive name for identification purposes Classifier s This field displays the active classifier s you configure in the Classifier screen Select the classifier s to which this policy rule applies To select more than one classifier press SHIFT and select the choices at the same time Parameters Set the fields below for this policy You only have to set the field s that is related to the
377. t 4 Disable all ports 5 Misconfigure the text configuration file 6 Forget the password and or IP address 7 Prevent all services from accessing the Switch 8 Change a service port number but forget it Note Be careful not to lock yourself and others out of the Switch If you do lock yourself out try using out of band management via the management port to configure the Switch 4 6 Resetting the Switch If you lock yourself and others from the Switch or forget the administrator password you will need to reload the factory default configuration file or reset the Switch back to the factory defaults 4 6 1 Reload the Configuration File Uploading the factory default configuration file replaces the current configuration file with the factory default configuration file This means that you will lose all previous configurations and the speed of the console port will be reset to the default of 9600bps with 8 data bit no parity one stop bit and flow control set to none The password will also be reset to 1234 and the IP address to 192 168 1 1 To upload the configuration file do the following 52 XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 4 The Web Configurator 1 Connect to the console port using a computer with terminal emulation software See Section 3 2 on page 38 for details 2 Disconnect and reconnect the Switch s power to begin a session When you reconnect the Switch s power you will see the initial screen 3 When you
378. t number and VLAN ID to DHCP requests that it broadcasts to the DHCP VLAN if specified or VLAN You can specify the DHCP VLAN in the DHCP Snooping Configure screen See Section 26 5 on page 241 Information Select this to have the Switch add the system name to DHCP requests that it broadcasts to the DHCP VLAN if specified or VLAN You can configure the system name in the General Setup screen See Chapter 8 on page 77 You can specify the DHCP VLAN in the DHCP Snooping Configure screen See Section 26 5 on page 241 XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 26 IP Source Guard Table 79 DHCP Snooping VLAN Configure continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last saved values 26 6 ARP Inspection Status Use this screen to look at the current list of MAC address filters that were created because the Switch identified an unauthorized ARP packet When the Switch identifies an unauthorized ARP packet it automatically creates a MAC address filter to block traffic from the source MAC address and source VLAN ID of the unauthorized ARP packet To open this screen click Advanced Appli
379. table Static MAC addresses do not age out When you set up static MAC address rules you are setting static MAC addresses for a port This may reduce the need for broadcasting Static MAC address forwarding together with port security allows only computers in the MAC address table on a port to access the Switch See Chapter 19 on page 169 for more information on port security XGS 4728F User s Guide 115 Chapter 10 Static MAC Forward Setup Click Advanced Applications Static MAC Forwarding in the navigation panel to display the configuration screen as shown Figure 57 Advanced Application Static MAC Forwarding Active Name MAC Address VID Port Index Active Xeon nd nnnm LE dE HE o E Ada Cancel Clear Name MAC Address VID Port Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 22 Advanced Application Static MAC Forwarding LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to activate your rule You may temporarily deactivate a rule without deleting it by clearing this check box Name Enter a descriptive name for identification purposes for this static MAC address forwarding rule MAC Address Enter the MAC address in valid MAC address format that is six hexadecimal character pairs Note Static MAC addresses do not age out MAC Address VID Enter the VLAN identification number Po
380. table contains the route information to the network s that the Switch can reach The Switch automatically updates the routing table with the RIP information received from other Ethernet devices 47 2 Viewing the Routing Table Status Use this screen to view routing table information Click Management gt Routing Table in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 230 Management gt Routing Table c ONECDSDDREUDEITUCHNNNGG Index Destination 1 192 158 1 0 24 2 10 10 10 0 24 Gateway 192 168 1 1 10 10 10 1 Interface Metric 192 168 1 1 1 10 10 10 1 1 Type STATIC STATIC The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 145 Management gt Routing Table LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This field displays the index number Destination This field displays the destination IP routing domain Gateway This field displays the IP address of the gateway device Interface This field displays the IP address of the Interface Metric This field displays the cost of the route Type This field displays the method used to learn the route OSPF added as an OSPF interface RIP learned from incoming RIP packets or STATIC added as a static entry XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 47 Routing Table XGS 4728F User s Guide Configure Clone This chapter shows you how you can copy the settings of one port onto other ports 48 1 Configure Clone
381. table or even crashes If you forget your password you will have to reset the Switch to its factory default settings If you backed up an earlier configuration file you would not have to totally re configure the Switch You could simply restore your last configuration XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch XGS 4728F User s Guide Hardware Installation and Connection This chapter shows you how to install and connect the Switch 2 1 Freestanding Installation 1 Make sure the Switch is clean and dry 2 Set the Switch on a smooth level surface strong enough to support the weight of the Switch and the connected cables Make sure there is a power outlet nearby 3 Make sure there is enough clearance around the Switch to allow air circulation and the attachment of cables and the power cord 4 Remove the adhesive backing from the rubber feet 5 Attach the rubber feet to each corner on the bottom of the Switch These rubber feet help protect the Switch from shock or vibration and ensure space between devices when stacking Figure 5 Attaching Rubber Feet XGS 4728F User s Guide 31 Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection Note Do NOT block the ventilation holes Leave space between devices when stacking Note For proper ventilation allow at least 4 inches 10 cm of clearance at the front and 3 4 inches 8 cm at the back of the Switch This is especially important for en
382. tatic Routing RIP OSPF IGMP DVMRP DiffServ DHCP VRRP Management Maintenance Access Control Diagnostic Syslog Cluster Management MAC Table IP Table ARP Table Routing Table Configure Clone The following table describes the links in the navigation panel Table 5 Navigation Panel Links LINK DESCRIPTION Basic Settings System Info This link takes you to a screen that displays general system and hardware monitoring information General Setup This link takes you to a screen where you can configure general identification information and time settings for the Switch Switch Setup This link takes you to a screen where you can set up global Switch parameters such as VLAN type MAC address learning IGMP snooping GARP and priority queues IP Setup This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the IP address subnet mask necessary for Switch management and DNS domain name server and set up to 64 IP routing domains Port Setup This link takes you to screens where you can configure speed flow control and priority settings for individual Switch ports Advanced Application XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 4 The Web Configurator Table 5 Navigation Panel Links continued LINK DESCRIPTION VLAN This link takes you to screens where you can configure port based or 802 1Q VLAN depending on what you c
383. tch is connected to other switches in the stack on Stacking Port 1 Off The Switch is not connected to other switches in the stack on Stacking Port 1 S2 Green On The Switch is connected to other switches in the stack on Stacking Port 2 Off The Switch is not connected to other switches in the stack on Stacking Port 2 System Status Displays The Switch is starting up hourglas s icon Displays The LED is showing the Stack ID number of the Switch Stack ID number 1000Base T Gigabit Ports V 1 24 Green Blinking The system is transmitting receiving to from a 10 1000 Mbps Ethernet network On The link to a 10 1000 Mbps Ethernet network is up Amber Blinking The system is transmitting receiving to from a 100 Mbps Ethernet network On The link to a 100 Mbps Ethernet network is up Off The link to an Ethernet network is down 1000Base X Mini GBIC Slots A 1 24 Green On The port has a successful connection Blinking The port is receiving or transmitting data Off This link is disconnected XGS 4728F User s Guide PART Il Basic Configuration The Web Configurator 45 Initial Setup Example 55 System Status and Port Statistics 71 Basic Setting 77 The Web Configurator This section introduces the configuration and functions of the web configurator 4 1 Introduction The web configurator is an HTML based management interface that allows easy Switch setup and management via Internet brow
384. tch was unable to update the bindings in the DHCP snooping database Database detail First successful access This field displays the first time the Switch accessed the DHCP snooping database for any reason Last ignored bindings counters This section displays the number of times and the reasons the Switch ignored bindings the last time it read bindings from the DHCP binding database You can clear these counters by restarting the Switch or using CLI commands See the Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide Binding collisions This field displays the number of bindings the Switch ignored because the Switch already had a binding with the same MAC address and VLAN ID Invalid interfaces Parse failures This field displays the number of bindings the Switch ignored because the port number was a trusted interface or does not exist anymore This field displays the number of bindings the Switch ignored because the Switch was unable to understand the binding in the DHCP binding database Expired leases This field displays the number of bindings the Switch ignored because the lease time had already expired Unsupported vlans This field displays the number of bindings the Switch ignored because the VLAN ID does not exist anymore Last ignored time This field displays the last time the Switch ignored any bindings for any reason from the DHCP binding database Total ignored bindings counters T
385. tches to register and de register attribute values with other GARP participants within a bridged LAN GARP is a protocol that provides a generic mechanism for protocols that serve a more specific application for example GVRP 9 2 1 1 GARP Timers Switches join VLANs by making a declaration A declaration is made by issuing a Join message using GARP Declarations are withdrawn by issuing a Leave message A Leave All message terminates all registrations GARP timers set declaration timeout values 9 2 2 GVRP GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol is a registration protocol that defines a way for switches to register necessary VLAN members on ports across the network Enable this function to permit VLAN groups beyond the local Switch Please refer to the following table for common IEEE 802 1Q VLAN terminology Table 14 IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Terminology VLAN PARAMETER TERM DESCRIPTION VLAN Type Permanent VLAN This is a static VLAN created manually Dynamic VLAN This is a VLAN configured by a GVRP registration deregistration process XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN Table 14 IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Terminology continued Administrative Control VLAN PARAMETER TERM DESCRIPTION VLAN Registration Fixed Fixed registration ports are permanent VLAN members Registration Forbidden Ports with registration forbidden are forbidden to join the specified VLAN Normal Registration
386. ter 12 Filtering Table 24 Advanced Application gt Flltering continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Action Select Discard source to drop frames from the source MAC address specified in the MAC field The Switch can still send frames to the MAC address Select Discard destination to drop frames to the destination MAC address specified in the MAC address The Switch can still receive frames originating from the MAC address Select Discard source and Discard destination to block traffic to from the MAC address specified in the MAC field MAC Type a MAC address in a valid MAC address format that is six hexadecimal character pairs VID Type the VLAN group identification number Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Clear Click Clear to clear the fields to the factory defaults Index This field displays the index number of the rule Click an index number to change the settings Active This field displays Yes when the rule is activated and No when is it deactivated Name This field displays the descriptive name for this rule This is for identification purposes only MAC This field displays the source destination MAC address
387. ter router is unavailable a backup router assumes the role of the master router However when another backup router with a higher priority joins the network it will preempt the lower priority backup router that is the master Disable preempt mode to prevent this from happening By default a layer 3 device with the same IP address as the virtual router will become the master router regardless of the preempt mode XGS 4728F User s Guide 321 Chapter 38 VRRP 38 3 3 Configuring VRRP Parameters After you set up an IP interface configure the VRRP parameters in the VRRP Configuration screen Figure 185 IP Application gt VRRP Configuration gt VRRP Parameters Active r Name name Network 192 168 1 10 24 v Virtual Router ID 1m Adertisement Interval 1 Preempt Mode iv Priority 100 Uplink Gateway 0 0 0 0 Primary Virtual IP 0 0 0 0 Secondary Virtual IP 0 0 0 0 Add Cancel Clear The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 117 P Application gt VRRP Configuration gt VRRP Parameters LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this option to enable this VRRP entry Name Enter a descriptive name up to 32 printable ASCII characters for identification purposes Network Select an IP domain to which this VRRP entry applies Virtual Router ID irn virtual router number 1 to 7 for which this VRRP entry is created You can configure up to seven virtual routers for one network
388. ter shows you how to configure static routes 31 1 Configuring Static Routing Static routes tell the Switch how to forward IP traffic when you configure the TCP IP parameters manually Click IP Application gt Static Routing in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 146 IP Application gt Static Routing Etec a Active Ci Name Destination IP Address 0 0 0 0 IP Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Gateway IP Address 0 0 0 0 Metric Add Cancel Clear Index Active Name Destination Address Subnet Mask Gateway Address Metric Delete Yes Example 172 21 1 1 255 255 0 0 192 168 1 2 2 rH Delete Cancel The following table describes the related labels you use to create a static route Table 91 IP Application gt Static Routing LABEL DESCRIPTION Active This field allows you to activate deactivate this static route Name Enter a descriptive name up to 10 printable ASCII characters for identification purposes Destination This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination IP Address Routing is always based on network number If you need to specify a route to a single host use a subnet mask of 255 255 255 255 in the subnet mask field to force the network number to be identical to the host ID XGS 4728F User s Guide 273 Chapter 31 Static Route 274 Table 91 IP Application gt Static Routing continued LABEL DESCRIPTIO
389. that can be assigned to clients This section displays configuration settings related to the Switch s DHCP relay mode Relay Mode This field displays None if the Switch is not configured as a DHCP relay agent Global if the Switch is configured as a DHCP relay agent only VLAN followed by a VLAN ID if it is configured as a relay agent for specific VLAN s 37 3 DHCP Server Status Detail Click IP Application gt DHCP in the navigation panel and then click an existing index number of a DHCP server configuration to view the screen as shown Use XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 37 DHCP this screen to view details regarding DHCP server settings configured on the Switch Figure 175 IP Application gt DHCP gt DHCP Server Status Detail Server Status Detai Start IP Address End IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway Primary DNS Server Secondary DNS Server Address Leases Index IP Address Timer 192 168 1 33 192 168 1 62 255 255 255 0 192 168 1 254 192 168 5 1 192 168 5 2 Hardware Address DHCP Status Hostname The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 111 IP Application gt DHCP Server Status Detail LABEL DESCRIPTION Start IP This field displays the starting IP address of the IP address pool Address configured for this DHCP server instance Subnet Mask End IP Address This field displays the last IP address of the IP address
390. the Switch belong to VLAN 1 In addition port 7 belongs to the multicast group with VID 200 to receive multicast traffic the News and Movie channels from the remote streaming media server S Computers A B and C in VLAN 1 are able to receive the traffic Figure 110 MVR Configuration Example ie tverigs et ees a News 224 1 4 10 224 1 4 50 Multicast VID 200 Movie 230 1 2 50 230 1 2 60 RON z j ii gt u mm 212 XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 24 Multicast To configure the MVR settings on the Switch create a multicast group in the MVR screen and set the receiver and source ports Figure 111 MVR Configuration Example OD Multicast Setting Group Configuration Active Iv Name Premium Multicast VLAN ID po 802 1p Priority o gt Mode Dynamic C Compatible Port Source Port Receiver Port None Tagging gt q e 10 c o c C C z 11 EXAMPLE gt Ses To set the Switch to forward the multicast group traffic to the subscribers configure multicast group settings in the Group Configuration screen The XGS 4728F User s Guide 213 Chapter 24 Multicast following figure shows an example where two multicast groups News and Movie are configured for the multicast VLAN 200 Figure 112 MVR Group Configuration Example 8D Group Configuration d Multicast VLAN ID 200 z lt 5 Name Start Address End Address Movi
391. the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a commercial environment This device generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this device in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense CE Mark Warning This is a class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Taiwanese BSMI Bureau of Standards Metrology and Inspection A Warning EE ERRADAS Em EEA R ERG H GERIATR StH FASS RES E EASE Notices Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Cet appareil num rique de la classe A est conforme la norme NMB 003 du Canada CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT APPAREIL A LASER DE CLASS 1 PRODUCT COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040 10 AND 1040 11 PRODUIT CONFORME SELON 21 CFR 1040 10 ET 1040 11 XGS 4728F User s Guide Appendix B Legal Information Viewing Certifications 1 Goto http www zyxel com 2 Select your product on the ZyXEL home page to go to that
392. the Method 1 field If you want the Switch to check other sources for access privilege level specify them in Method 2 and Method 3 fields Select local to have the Switch check the access privilege configured for local authentication Select radius or tacacs to have the Switch check the access privilege via the external servers Login These fields specify which database the Switch should use first second and third to authenticate administrator accounts users for Switch management Configure the local user accounts in the Access Control Logins screen The TACACS and RADIUS are external servers Before you specify the priority make sure you have set up the corresponding database correctly first You can specify up to three methods for the Switch to authenticate administrator accounts The Switch checks the methods in the order you configure them first Method 1 then Method 2 and finally Method 3 You must configure the settings in the Method 1 field If you want the Switch to check other sources for administrator accounts specify them in Method 2 and Method 3 fields Select local to have the Switch check the administrator accounts configured in the Access Control gt Logins screen Select radius to have the Switch check the administrator accounts configured via the RADIUS Server Select tacacs to have the Switch check the administrator accounts configured via the TACACS Server Authorization Use this
393. the Switch The SNMP version on the Switch must match the version on the SNMP manager Choose SNMP version 2c v2c SNMP version 3 v3 or both v3v2c Note SNMP version 2c is backwards compatible with SNMP version 1 Get Community Set Community Enter the Get Community string which is the password for the incoming Get and GetNext requests from the management station The Get Community string is only used by SNMP managers using SNMP version 2c or lower Enter the Set Community which is the password for incoming Set requests from the management station The Set Community string is only used by SNMP managers using SNMP version 2c or lower XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 40 Access Control Table 129 Management gt Access Control gt SNMP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Trap Enter the Trap Community string which is the password sent with Community each trap to the SNMP manager The Trap Community string is only used by SNMP managers using SNMP version 2c or lower Trap Use this section to configure where to send SNMP traps from the Switch Destination Version Specify the version of the SNMP trap messages IP Enter the IP addresses of up to four managers to send your SNMP traps to Port Enter the port number upon which the manager listens for SNMP traps Username Enter the username to be sent to the SNMP manager along with the SNMP v3 trap Note This usernam
394. the cluster member switch s System Name Model This field displays the model name Status This field displays Online the cluster member switch is accessible Error for example the cluster member switch password was changed or the switch was set as the manager and so left the member list etc Offline the switch is disconnected Offline shows approximately 1 5 minutes after the link between cluster member and manager goes down 43 2 1 Cluster Member Switch Management Go to the Clustering Management Status screen of the cluster manager switch and then select an Index hyperlink from the list of members to go to that cluster member switch s web configurator home page This cluster member web XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 43 Cluster Management configurator home page and the home page that you d see if you accessed it directly are different Figure 222 Cluster Management Cluster Member Web Configurator Screen f Application IP Application Management Maintenance Access Control Diagnostic Syslog Cluster Management MAC Table IP Table ARP Table Routing Table Configure Clone Basic Setting System Info General Setup Switch Setup IP Setup Port Setup ES 2024PWRIES 2024PWR Advanced Application IP Application VLAN Static Routing Static MAC DiffServ Forwarding DHCP Filtering Spanning Tree Protocol Bandwidth Control Broadcast Storm Control Mirroring Link Aggregation Port Authentic
395. the device that causes a topology change first notifies the root bridge and then the root bridge notifies the network Both RSTP and STP flush unwanted learned addresses from the filtering database In RSTP the port states are Discarding Learning and Forwarding Note In this user s guide STP refers to both STP and RSTP 13 1 1 STP Terminology The root bridge is the base of the spanning tree XGS 4728F User s Guide 125 Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol 13 1 2 Path cost is the cost of transmitting a frame onto a LAN through that port The recommended cost is assigned according to the speed of the link to which a port is attached The slower the media the higher the cost Table 25 STP Path Costs LJ I D kRgE0 Path Cost 4Mbps 250 100 to 1000 1 to 65535 Path Cost 10Mbps 100 50 to 600 1 to 65535 Path Cost 16Mbps 62 40 to 400 1 to 65535 Path Cost 100Mbps 19 10 to 60 1 to 65535 Path Cost 1Gbps 3 to 10 1 to 65535 Path Cost 10Gbps 1to5 1 to 65535 On each bridge the bridge communicates with the root through the root port The root port is the port on this Switch with the lowest path cost to the root the root path cost If there is no root port then this Switch has been accepted as the root bridge of the spanning tree network For each LAN segment a designated bridge is selected This bridge has the lowest cost to the root among the bridges connected to the LAN How ST
396. the priority which is assigned to frames belonging to this protocol based VLAN Delete Click this to delete the protocol based VLANs which you marked for deletion Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN 9 10 Create an IP based VLAN Example This example shows you how to create an IP VLAN which includes ports 1 4 and 8 Follow these steps using the screen below 1 Activate this protocol based VLAN 2 Typethe port number you want to include in this protocol based VLAN Type 1 3 Give this protocol based VLAN a descriptive name Type I P VLAN 4 Select the protocol Leave the default value I P 5 Type the VLAN ID of an existing VLAN In our example we already created a static VLAN with an ID of 5 Type 5 6 Leave the priority set to O and click Add Figure 54 Protocol Based VLAN Configuration Example ED Protocol Based VLAN g Active Vv Port 1 Name IP VLAN IP Ethernet type C Others Hex VID 5 Priority 0 Add Cancel Index Active Port Name Ethernet type VID Priority Delete Delete Cancel To add more ports to this protocol based VLAN 1 Click the index number of the protocol based VLAN entry Click 1 2 Change the value in the Port field to the next port you want to add 3 Click Add XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN 9 11 Port based VLAN Setup Port based VLANs are VLANs where the packet for
397. thentication method The choices are Same as Area None default Simple and MD5 To exchange OSPF packets with a peer border router you must make the authentication method and or password settings the same as the peer border router Select Same as Area to use the same authentication method within the area and set the related fields when necessary Select None to disable authentication This is the default setting Select Simple to authenticate OSPF packets transmitted through this interface using a simple password Select MD5 to authenticate OSPF packets transmitted through this interface using MD5 authentication When you select MD5 in the Authentication field specify the identification number of the authentication you want to use XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 33 OSPF Table 102 IP Application gt OSPF Configuration gt OSPF Virtual Link continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Key When you select Simple in the Authentication field enter a password eight character long When you select MD5 in the Authentication field enter a password 16 character long Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Clear Click Clear to s
398. ther and all upstream Apple XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN Talk traffic from port 6 and 7 will be in another group and have higher priority than ARP traffic when they go through the uplink port to a backbone switch C Figure 52 Protocol Based VLAN Application Example 9 9 Configuring Protocol Based VLAN Click Protocol Based VLAN in the VLAN Port Setting screen to display the configuration screen as shown Figure 53 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting gt Protocol Based VLAN Vlan Port Setting Name c iP C Others Hex VID oz Priority Ethernet type Add Cancel Index Active Port Name Ethernet type VID Delete Cancel Priority Delete XGS 4728F User s Guide 107 Chapter 9 VLAN The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 20 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting gt Protocol Based VLAN Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Check this box to activate this protocol based VLAN Port Type a port number to be included in this protocol based VLAN This port must belong to a static VLAN in order to participate in a protocol based VLAN See Chapter 9 on page 95 for more details on setting up VLANs Name Enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters to identify this protocol based VLAN Ethernet type Use the drop down list box to select a predefined protocol to be included in
399. this protocol based VLAN or select Others and type the protocol number in hexadecimal notation For example the IP protocol in hexadecimal notation is 0800 and Novell IPX protocol is 8137 Note Protocols in the hexadecimal number range of 0x0000 to OxO5ff are not allowed to be used for protocol based VLANs VID Enter the ID of a VLAN to which the port belongs This must be an existing VLAN which you defined in the Advanced Applications gt VLAN screens Priority Select the priority level that the Switch will assign to frames belonging to this VLAN Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Index Active This is the index number identifying this protocol based VLAN Click on any of these numbers to edit an existing protocol based VLAN This field shows whether the protocol based VLAN is active or not Port This field shows which port belongs to this protocol based VLAN Name This field shows the name the protocol based VLAN Ethernet type This field shows which Ethernet protocol is part of this protocol based VLAN VID This field shows the VLAN ID of the port Priority This field shows
400. thorization number RMA Products must be returned Postage Prepaid It is recommended that the unit be insured when shipped Any returned products without proof of purchase or those with an out dated warranty will be repaired or replaced at the discretion of ZyXEL and the customer will be billed for parts and labor All repaired or replaced products will be shipped by ZyXEL to the corresponding return address Postage Paid This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights that vary from country to country Registration Register your product online to receive e mail notices of firmware upgrades and information at www zyxel com for global products or at www us zyxel com for North American products XGS 4728F User s Guide Appendix B Legal Information XGS 4728F User s Guide Index Numerics 802 1P priority 90 A access control limitations 337 login account 347 remote management 355 service port 354 SNMP 338 accounting setup 221 address learning MAC 104 107 Address Resolution Protocol ARP 379 383 384 administrator password 348 age 141 aggregator ID 157 159 aging time 85 applications bridging 25 IEEE 802 1Q VLAN 27 switched workgroup 26 Area Border Router ABR 278 area ID and OSPF 283 ARP how it works 379 viewing 380 ARP Address Resolution Protocol 379 ARP inspection 231 234 and MAC filter 234 configuring 235 syslog messages 235 trusted ports 235 AS Boundary
401. tion on the Switch Load Factory Default Follow the steps below to reset the Switch back to the factory defaults In the Maintenance screen click the Click Here button next to Load Factory Default to clear all Switch configuration information you configured and return to the factory defaults Click OK to reset all Switch configurations to the factory defaults Figure 198 Load Factory Default Start Microsoft Internet Explorer x 32 Are you sure you want to load factory default In the web configurator click the Save button to make the changes take effect If you want to access the Switch web configurator again you may need to change the IP address of your computer to be in the same subnet as that of the default Switch IP address 192 168 1 1 39 3 Save Configuration Click Config 1 to save the current configuration settings permanently to Configuration 1 on the Switch XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 39 Maintenance Click Config 2 to save the current configuration settings to Configuration 2 on the Switch Alternatively click Save on the top right hand corner in any screen to save the configuration changes to the current configuration Note Clicking the Apply or Add button does NOT save the changes permanently All unsaved changes are erased after you reboot the Switch 39 4 Reboot System Reboot System allows you to restart the Switch without physically turning the power off It also allows you
402. tion panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last saved values XGS 4728F User s Guide Loop Guard This chapter shows you how to configure the Switch to guard against loops on the edge of your network 27 1 Loop Guard Overview Loop guard allows you to configure the Switch to shut down a port if it detects that packets sent out on that port loop back to the Switch While you can use Spanning Tree Protocol STP to prevent loops in the core of your network STP cannot prevent loops that occur on the edge of your network Figure 133 Loop Guard vs STP Pe Loop Guard sees rm a a r 99 p smm m Loop guard is designed to handle loop problems on the edge of your network This can occur when a port is connected to a Switch that is in a loop state Loop state occurs as a result of human error It happens when two ports on a switch are connected with the same cable When a switch in loop state sends out broadcast messages the messages loop back to the switch and are re broadcast again and again causing a broadcast storm If a switch not in loop state connects to a switch in loop state then it will be affected by the switch in loop state
403. tion to distinguish between authorized and unauthorized packets in the network The Switch learns XGS 4728F User s Guide 235 Chapter 26 IP Source Guard the bindings by snooping DHCP packets dynamic bindings and from information provided manually by administrators static bindings To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard Figure 121 IP Source Guard OLE aD Static Binding DHCP Snooping Arp Inspection Index Mac Address IP Address Lease Type VID Port 1 a4 12 12 12 12 01 172 23 37 222 inifinity static 1 18 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 74 IP Source Guard LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This field displays a sequential number for each binding MAC Address This field displays the source MAC address in the binding P Address This field displays the IP address assigned to the MAC address in the binding Lease This field displays how many days hours minutes and seconds the binding is valid for example 2d3h4m5s means the binding is still valid for 2 days 3 hours 4 minutes and 5 seconds This field displays infinity if the binding is always valid for example a static binding Type This field displays how the Switch learned the binding static This binding was learned from information provided manually by an administrator dhcp snooping This binding was learned by snooping DHCP packets VID This field displays the s
404. tions allowed is the maximum number of IP routing domains allowed on the Switch See Section 8 6 on page 86 for more information on IP routing domains This is the IP routing domain IP address and subnet mask you set up in IP Setup VID DVMRP cannot be enabled on the same VLAN group across different IP routing domains that is you cannot have duplicate VIDs for different DVMRP configurations see Figure 166 on page 298 Active Select Active to enable DVMRP on this IP routing domain Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 35 3 1 DVMRP Configuration Error Messages You must have IGMP enabled when you enable DVMRP otherwise you see the screen as in the next figure Figure 164 DVMRP IGMP Not Set Error aum Error IGMP should be turned on before setting DVMRP Back When you disable IGMP but DVMRP is still active you also see another warning screen Figure 165 DVMRP Unable to Disable IGMP Error RUND Warning DVMRP is still enabled DVMRP will not function if IGMP is turned off Back XGS 4728F User s Guide 297 Chapter 35 DVMRP 35 4 Default DVMRP Timer Value
405. to Know Your Switch This chapter introduces the main features and applications of the Switch 1 1 Introduction Your Switch is a stand alone layer 3 Gigabit Ethernet GbE switch with two 12 Gigabit stacking ports as well as support for an optional 2 port 10 Gigabit uplink module By integrating router functions the Switch performs wire speed layer 3 routing in addition to layer 2 switching The Switch comes with 24 GbE dual personality interfaces A dual personality interface includes one Gigabit port and one slot for a mini GBIC transceiver SFP module with one port active at a time There are two XGS 4728F models The XGS 4728F DC model requires DC power supply input of 36 VDC to 72 VDC 1 5 A Max no tolerance The XGS 4728F AC model requires 100 VAC to 240 VAC 0 8 A power With its built in web configurator managing and configuring the Switch is easy In addition the Switch can also be managed via Telnet any terminal emulator program on the console port or third party SNMP management See Chapter 50 on page 393 for a full list of software features available on the Switch 1 1 1 Bridging Example In this example the Switch connects different company departments RD and Sales to the corporate backbone It can alleviate bandwidth contention and eliminate server and network bottlenecks All users that need high bandwidth can connect to high speed department servers via the Switch You can provide a XGS 4728F User s Guid
406. to the Switch The Switch uses the IP Table to determine how to forward packets See the following figure 1 TheSwitch examines a received packet and learns the port from which this source IP address came 2 The Switch checks to see if the packet s destination IP address matches a source IP address already learned in the I P Table f the Switch has already learned the port for this IP address then it forwards the packet to that port f the Switch has not already learned the port for this IP address then the packet is flooded to all ports Too much port flooding leads to network congestion XGS 4728F User s Guide 375 Chapter 45 IP Table f the Switch has already learned the port for this IP address but the destination port is the same as the port it came in on then it filters the packet Figure 227 IP Table Flowchart Is destination IP address in the IP Table Yes Is the outgoing port different from the incoming port Filter this Forward to packet outgoing port 45 2 Viewing the IP Table Click Management gt IP Table in the navigation panel to display the following screen Figure 228 Management IP Table Sort by 1 2 3 OME CD Index P VID Port IP Address VID Port Type 192 168 1 5 1 6 dynamic 192 168 1 10 0 CPU static 192 168 1 255 0 CPU static The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 143 Management gt IP Ta
407. tocols Protocol STP for example You also need to define how to treat a BPDU in the Transparency Port Setup screen XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting Table 11 Basic Setting Switch Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Smart Select Active to enable smart isolation on the Switch The designated Isolation port s then becomes the isolated port Smart isolation allows you to prevent isolated ports on different switches from transmitting traffic to each other Note To use smart isolation you should have configured 802 1Q VLAN port isolation or private VLAN and M RSTP on the Switch Smart isolation does not work with MSTP and or port based VLAN MAC Address MAC address learning reduces outgoing traffic broadcasts For MAC Learning address learning to occur on a port the port must be active Aging Time Enter a time from 10 to 1000000 seconds This is how long all dynamically learned MAC addresses remain in the MAC address table before they age out and must be relearned GARP Timer Switches join VLANs by making a declaration A declaration is made by issuing a Join message using GARP Declarations are withdrawn by issuing a Leave message A Leave All message terminates all registrations GARP timers set declaration timeout values See Chapter 9 on page 95 for more background information Join Timer Join Timer sets the duration of the Join Period timer for GVRP in milliseco
408. twork The allowed range is 6 to 40 seconds Forwarding Delay This is the maximum time in seconds a switch will wait before changing states This delay is required because every switch must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a blocking state otherwise temporary data loops might result The allowed range is 4 to 30 seconds As a general rule Note 2 Forward Delay 1 gt Max Age gt 2 Hello Time 1 Port This field displays the port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this check box to activate STP on this port Priority Configure the priority for each port here Priority decides which port should be disabled when more than one port forms a loop in the Switch Ports with a higher priority numeric value are disabled first The allowed range is between 0 and 255 and the default value is 128 Path Cost Path cost is the cost of transmitting a frame on to a LAN through that port It is recommended that you assign this value according to the speed of the bridge T
409. u don t have a specific target VLAN enter 1 Port Enter the port s where frames with destination MAC address that matched the entry above are forwarded You can enter multiple ports separated by no space comma or hyphen For example enter 3 5 for ports 3 4 and 5 Enter 3 5 7 for ports 3 5 and 7 Add Click Add to save your rule to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses this rule if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to their last saved values Clear Click Clear to begin configuring this screen afresh Index Click an index number to modify a static multicast MAC address rule for port s XGS 4728F User s Guide 121 Chapter 11 Static Multicast Forward Setup Table 23 Advanced Application gt Static Multicast Forwarding continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Active This field displays whether a static multicast MAC address forwarding rule is active Yes or not No You may temporarily deactivate a rule without deleting it Name This field displays the descriptive name for identification purposes for a static multicast MAC address forwarding rule MAC Address This field displays the multicast MAC address that identifies a multicast group VID This field displays the ID number of a VLAN grou
410. uing Method This chapter introduces the queuing methods supported 22 1 Queuing Method Overview Queuing is used to help solve performance degradation when there is network congestion Use the Queuing Method screen to configure queuing algorithms for outgoing traffic See also Priority Queue Assignment in Switch Setup and 802 1p Priority in Port Setup for related information Queuing algorithms allow switches to maintain separate queues for packets from each individual source or flow and prevent a source from monopolizing the bandwidth 22 1 1 Strictly Priority Strictly Priority SP services queues based on priority only As traffic comes into the Switch traffic on the highest priority queue Q7 is transmitted first When that queue empties traffic on the next highest priority queue Q6 is transmitted until Q6 empties and then traffic is transmitted on Q5 and so on If higher priority queues never empty then traffic on lower priority queues never gets sent SP does not automatically adapt to changing network requirements 22 1 2 Weighted Fair Queuing Weighted Fair Queuing is used to guarantee each queue s minimum bandwidth based on its bandwidth weight the number you configure in the Weight field when there is traffic congestion WFQ is activated only when a port has more traffic than it can handle Queues with larger weights get more guaranteed bandwidth than queues with smaller weights By default the weight for QO is 1 for Q1
411. urator to set up and use the Switch The tutorials include How to Use DHCP Snooping on the Switch How to Use DHCP Relay on the Switch 6 1 How to Use DHCP Snooping on the Switch You only want DHCP server A connected to port 5 to assign IP addresses to all devices in VLAN network V Create a VLAN containing ports 5 6 and 7 Connect a computer M to the Switch s MGMT port Figure 24 Tutorial DHCP Snooping Tutorial Overview Note For related information about DHCP snooping see Section 26 1 on page 231 The settings in this tutorial are as the following Table6 Tutorial Settings in this Tutorial HOST PORT DHCP SNOOPING CONNECTED VLAN PVID PORT TRUSTED DHCP Server A 5 1 and 100 100 Yes DHCP Client B 6 land100 100 No DHCP Client C 7 land100 100 No XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials 1 Access the Switch from the MGMT port through http 192 168 0 1 by default Log into the Switch by entering the username default admin and password default 1234 2 Goto Advanced Application gt VLAN gt Static VLAN and create a VLAN with ID of 100 Add ports 5 6 and 7 in the VLAN by selecting Fixed in the Control field as shown Deselect Tx Tagging because you don t want outgoing traffic to contain this VLAN tag Click Add Figure 25 Tutorial Create a VLAN and Add Ports to It qo EXD VLAN Status ACTIVE Name VLAN Group ID Port Contr
412. ure 168 in a DiffServ network classifies marks with a DSCP value the incoming packets into different traffic flows Platinum Gold Silver Bronze based on the configured marking rules A network administrator can then apply various traffic policies to the traffic flows For example one traffic policy would be to give higher drop precedence to one traffic flow over others In our example packets in the Bronze traffic flow are more likely to be dropped when congestion occurs than the packets in the Platinum traffic flow as they move across the DiffServ network Figure 168 DiffServ Network A Dona e4 VO o ases SE P Platinum G Gold IB S Silver IB B Bronze 36 2 Two Rate Three Color Marker Traffic Policing Traffic policing is the limiting of the input or output transmission rate of a class of traffic on the basis of user defined criteria Traffic policing methods measure traffic flows against user defined criteria and identify it as either conforming exceeding or violating the criteria Two Rate Three Color Marker TRTCM defined in RFC 2698 is a type of traffic policing that identifies packets by comparing them to two user defined rates the Committed Information Rate CIR and the Peak Information Rate PIR The CIR XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 36 Differentiated Services specifies the average rate at which packets are admitted to the network The PIR is greater than or equal to the CIR CIR and
413. use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XGS 4728F User s Guide This chapter explains the Diagnostic screen 41 1 Diagnostic Diagnostic Click Management gt Diagnostic in the navigation panel to open this screen Use this screen to check system logs ping IP addresses or perform port tests Diagnostic __ Figure 217 Management gt Diagnostic Resolving 192 168 1 23 Reply from 192 168 1 23 Reply from 192 168 1 23 Reply from 192 168 1 23 Ping Host Successful 192 168 1 23 System Log Display Clear IP Ping IP Address Ping Port 1 Port Test Ethernet Port Test The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 134 Management gt Diagnostic LABEL DESCRIPTION System Log Click Display to display a log of events in the multi line text box Click Clear to empty the text box and reset the syslog entry XGS 4728F User s Guide 357 Chapter 41 Diagnostic Table 134 Management gt Diagnostic continued LABEL DESCRIPTION IP Ping Type the IP address of a device that you want to ping in order to test a connection Click Ping to have the Switch ping the IP address in the field to the left Ethernet Port Test Enter a port number and click Port Test to perform an inter
414. uting table Priority This field displays the priority for this OSPF interface Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 33 7 OSPF Virtual Links Configure and view virtual link settings in this screen See Section 33 1 on page 277 for more information on OSPF XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 33 OSPF In the OSPF Configuration screen click Virtual Link to display the screen as shown next Figure 156 IP Application gt OSPF Configuration gt OSPF Virtual Link Name Area ID Peer Router ID Authentication Index Name OEE ai END Configuration ame No Configured Areeld o 0 0 0 None kyo Ro Key o Ada Cancel Clear Peer Router ID Authentication Key ID Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the related labels in this screen Table 102 IP Application gt OSPF Configuration gt OSPF Virtual Link LABEL DESCRIPTION Name Enter a descriptive name up to 32 printable ASCII characters for identification purposes Area ID Select the area ID in an IP address format with dotted decimal notation of an area to associate the interface to that area Peer Router ID Enter the ID of a peer border router Authenticatio n Key ID Note Virtual interface s must use the same authentication method within the same area Select an au
415. warding decision is based on the destination MAC address and its associated port Port based VLANs require allowed outgoing ports to be defined for each port Therefore if you wish to allow two subscriber ports to talk to each other for example between conference rooms in a hotel you must define the egress an egress port is an outgoing port that is a port through which a data packet leaves for both ports Port based VLANs are specific only to the Switch on which they were created Note When you activate port based VLAN the Switch uses a default VLAN ID of 1 You cannot change it Note In screens such as IP Setup and Filtering that require a VID you must enter 1 as the VID The port based VLAN setup screen is shown next The CPU management port forms a VLAN with all Ethernet ports 9 11 1 Configure a Port based VLAN Select Port Based as the VLAN Type in the Switch Setup screen and then click VLAN from the navigation panel to display the following screen Select either AII Connected or Port Isolated from the drop down list depending on your VLAN and VLAN security requirements If VLAN members need to communicate directly with each other then select All Connected Select Port Isolated if you want to restrict users from communicating directly Click Apply to save your settings XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN The following screen shows users on a port based all connected VLAN configuration Figure 55 Adv
416. wards multicast traffic to that network Figure 158 IGMP Version 1 Example The main difference in IGMP version 2 is that it provides a mechanism for a multicast group member to notify a multicast router that it is leaving a multicast group The multicast router then sends a group specific IGMP query to check if there are any members remaining in that group If the multicast router does not receive an IGMP report from any members it stops sending multicast traffic to that group This change helps shorten the leave convergence time in other words the amount of time that a multicast router believes that there are group members XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 34 IGMP on a particular network This in turn helps reduce the amount of multicast traffic going through the multicast router Figure 159 IGMP Version 2 Example IGMP version 3 allows a multicast host to join a multicast group and specify from which source multicast server it wants to receive multicast packets Alternatively a multicast host can specify from which multicast servers it does not want to receive multicast packets In the following figure multicast server X IP address 10 1 1 1 and multicast server Z IP address 13 2 2 2 both send multicast traffic to the same multicast group identified by the multicast IP address 225 1 1 1 In IGMP version 3 multicast host A can join multicast group 225 1 1 1 and specify that it only wants to receive multicast packets from se
417. ware mode the evaluation of the packets uses the existing packet loss priority TRTCM can increase a packet loss priority of a packet but it cannot XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 36 Differentiated Services decrease it Packets that have been previously marked red or yellow can only be marked with an equal or higher packet loss priority Packets marked red high packet loss priority continue to be red without evaluation against the PIR or CIR Packets marked yellow can only be marked red or remain yellow so they are only evaluated against the PIR Only the packets marked green are first evaluated against the PIR and then if they don t exceed the PIR level are they evaluated against the CIR Figure 170 TRTCM Color aware Mode 36 3 Activating DiffServ Activate DiffServ to apply marking rules or IEEE 802 1p priority mapping on the selected port s Click IP Application gt DiffServ in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 171 IP Application gt DiffServ D Diffserv J 2 rate 3 Color Marker DSCP Setting Active E Port Active 7 1 r1 2 3 3 pi 4 7 5 C 6 CF 7 r1 Me a IQ MM UN B QC Apply Cancel XGS 4728F User s Guide Chapter 36 Differentiated Services The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 106 P Application gt DiffServ LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this option to enable DiffServ on the Switch Port This fiel
418. word 348 loop guard 255 how it works 256 port shut down 257 probe packet 256 loop guard vs STP 255 LSA Link State Advertisement 278 MAC Media Access Control 78 MAC address 78 379 maximum number per port 171 172 MAC address learning 85 104 107 115 171 specify limit 171 MAC authentication 164 aging time 168 MAC filter and ARP inspection 234 MAC freeze 170 MAC table 371 how it works 371 viewing 372 maintanence configuration backup 333 firmware 331 restoring configuration 332 maintenance 329 current configuration 329 main screen 329 Management Information Base MIB 338 management port 113 managing the device good habits 28 using FTP See FTP using SNMP See SNMP using Telnet See command interface using the command interface See command interface using the web configurator See web configurator man in the middle attacks 234 max age 141 hops 141 metric 286 MIB and SNMP 338 supported MI Bs 339 MIB Management Information Base 338 mini GBIC ports 36 connection speed 36 connector type 36 transceiver installation 37 transceiver removal 37 mirroring ports 151 monitor port 151 152 mounting brackets 32 MSA MultiSource Agreement 36 MST Instance See MSTI 129 MST region 129 MSTI 129 MST ID 129 MSTI Multiple Spanning Tree Instance 128 MSTP 125 128 bridge ID 144 configuration 140 configuration digest 144 forwarding delay 141 Hello Time 144 hello time 141 Max Age 144 max age 141 max hops 1

ZyXEL XGS-4728F User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents